YALE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY Harper's Stereotype Edition. POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES, A RESIDENCE OP NEARLY EIGHT YEARS IN THE SOCIETY AND SANDVS^ICH ISLANDS. BY WILLIAM ELLIS. FROM THE LATEST LONDON EDITIOH. IN FOUR VOLUMES. VOL. III. NEW-YORK: PRmTED AND PUBLISHED BY J. &. J. HARPER, NO. 82 CLIFF-STEEET. AND SOLD BY THE FEINCIFAL BOOESBLLEES THROUGHOUT TBE UNITED STATES. 18 33. VAtt CONTENTS THE THIRD VOLUME. CHAPTER I. FROM PAGE 9 TO PAGE 32. GstablishmeBt of new Btations at Maltapu and Maeva— Appearance of the lake and surrounding scenery— Increased desire for books— Applications flrom the blind — Account of ifiro, an idolatrous priest— Methods of distrib uting books— Dangerous voyages— Motives influencing to desire the Scrip tures — Character of the translation — Cause of delay in baptizing native converts — General view ofthe ordinance — ^Baptism of the king — Preparatory instructions — First baptism in HuaKine — Mode of applying the water — Introduction of Christiau names — Baptism of infants — Views and feelings .ofthe parents. CHAPTER IL PROM PAGE 32 TO PAGE 45. Interesting state ofthe people — Extensive prevalence of/i severe epidemic — Former diseases in the islands comparatively few and mild— Priests the general physicians — Native practice of physic — Its intimate connexion with sorcery — Gods of the healing art— The tuabu, or broken back— Insanity- Native warm-batli— Oculists— Surgery— Setting a broken neck or back— The operation of trepan— Native remedies superseded by European medicine — Need of a more abundant supply— Former cruelty towards the sick— Par ricide— Present treatment of invalids — Death of Messrs. Tessier and Bick nell — Dying charge to the people — Missionary responsibility. CHAPTER III. FROM PAGE 46 TO PAGE 74. (General view of a Christian church— Uniformity of procedure in the differ ent stations— Instructions from England— Preparatory teaching— Distinct nature of a Christian church— Qualifications and duties of communicants— The sacrament of the Lord's Supper— Formation of the first church of Christ; in the leeward islands— Administration of the ordinance— Substi tute for bread— Order of the service— Character, experience, and peculiar ities ofthe communicants— Buaiti—Manner of adraitting church meipbei;?— Regard to the declarations of Scripture— Instaaoes of the pow;er of cor- ficience— Appointment of deacons— Ii»pr«Vfiment in parental disci^liflje— £iT^t a^entioQ to religion, ' g CONTENTS. CHAPTER IV.^ ¦FROM PAGE 74 TO PAGE 92. Government of the South Sea, islands monarchical and arbitrary- Intimately connected with idolatry— Diiferent ranks in society— Slavery— The proprie tors of land— The regal family— Sovereignty hereditary^Abdication ofthe father in favour of the son— Distinctions of royalty— Modes of travelling— Sacredness of the king's person— Homage of the people— Singular ceremo-. nies attending the inauguration of the king— Language of the Tahitian court— The royal residences— Dress, &c. — Sources of revenue — Tenijre of land— Division of the country— National counejls-rForfeiture of pos sessions. CHAPTER V. FROM PAGE 93 TO PAGE 112. Power of the chiefs and proprietors of land — Banishment and confiscation— The king's messenger— The niau, an emblem of authority— Ancient usages in reference to crime, &c.— Fatal effects of jealousy— Seizure of property- Punishment of theft— Public works— Supplies for the king— Despotic ra pacity—Extortion of the kinges servants — Unorganized state of civil polity- Desire a code of Christian laws— Advice and conduct of the missionaries- Preparation of the laws— Public enactment by the king in a national assem bly at Tahiti — Capital punishments — Manner of conducting public trials — Establishment of laws in Raiatea:— Preparation-of those for Huahine. CHAPTER VI. FROM PAGE 1]2 TO PAGE 132. Pomare's proposed restrictions on barter rejected by the chiefs of the leeward islands— Voyage to Eimeo— Departure for Tahiti— Danger during the night — Arrival at Burder's Point— State of the settlement— Papeete — Mount Hope— Interview with the king— The laws revised— Approved by the queen ¦T-Arrival of the Hope from England— Influence of letters, &c. — Return to Eimeo— Embarkation for the leeward islands— A night at sea— Appear ance of the heavens— Astronomy of the natives— Names of the stars.— The Twins— Tradition of their origin— Ajrtival in Huahine. CHAPTER VIL. FROM PAGE 133 TO PAGE 163. Promulgation of the new code of laws in Huahine — Literal translation ofthe laws on murder— Theft— Trespass — Stolen property— Lost property— Bar ter— Sabbath-breaking— Rebellion— Bigamy, &c.— Divorce, &;c.— Marriage —False accusation— Drunkenness— Dogs — Pigs— Conspiracy— Confessions —Revenue for the king and chiefs— Tattooing— Voyaging— Judges and ma gistrates-Regulations for judges, and trial by jury- Messengers or peace- officers— Manner of conducting public trials— Character of the Huahinean code— Reasons for dissuading (Vom capital punishments— Omission of oaths —Remarks on the different enactments— Subsequent amendments and en actments relative to the fisheries- Landmarks— Land rendered fVeehot^ property— First Tahitian parliament— Regulations relating to seamen deserK Ihg their vessels— Publicity of trials— Beneficial effects ofthe laws, CONTENTS. 7 CHAPTER Vni. PROM PAGE 164 TO PAGE 187. Visit flrom the windward islands— Opposition to the moral restraints of Chris tianity— Tattooing prohibited by the chiefs— Revival of the practice— Trial and penalty of the offenders — Rebellion against the laws and government — Public assembly— Address of Taua— Departure of the chiefs and people ft-om the encampment of the king's son— Singularity of their dress and appearance— Interview between the rival parlies— Return of Hautia and the captives— Arrival of the deputation at Tahiti— Account of Taaroarii— En couraging circumstances connected with his early Ufe — His marriage — Profligate associates— Effects of bad example — Disorderly conduct — Hia illness— Attention of the chiefs and people— Visits to his encampment— Last interview — Death of Taaroarii — Funeral procession — Impressive circum stances connected with his decease and interment-;— His monument and epitaph— Notice of his father— Hia widow and daughter— Institution of Christian burial— Dying expressions of native converts. CHAPTER IX. PROM PAGE 187 TO PAGE 206. Arrival of the deputation in Huahine— Death Of Pomare— Notice of his an cestry — Description of his person — His mental character and habits— Per severance and proficiency in writing— His letter to England, &c,— Estima tion in which he was held by the people— Pomare the iirst convert to Christianity — His commendable endeavours to promote its extension — De clension during the latter part of his life — His friendship to the missionaries uniform — His aid important — Circumstances connected with his death — Accession ofhis son Portiare m.— Coronation ofthe infant king — Encourag ing progress in learning — Early death — Extensive use of letters among the Sajaqders- Writing on plantain-leaves— Value of writing-paper— South Sea Aca- P(ii)ulation— Auura— His voyage to Maurua— Return to his native island — Destruction of the idols— Visit to Rurutu- Advancement of the people in knowledge, industry, and coiiifort— Unjust conduct of visiters— Ti-eatiilent of the shipwrecked by the natives— Progress of Christianity. PLATES IN VOL. HI. Vignette t. to faee the title. View of Fa-re Harbour, in Huahine .....^ pago 221 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. CHAPTER I. Establishment of new stations at Maiiapu 'and Maeva— Appearance of the lake aud surrounding scenery — Increased desire for books — Applications H'om tbe blind — Account of Hiro, an idolatrous priest— Methods i>f distrib uting books — Dangerous voyages — Motives influencing to desire the Scrip tures — Character of the translation — Cause of delay in baptizing native ¦converts — General view ofthe ordinance — Bnptismof the king — Preparatory instructions — ^First baptism in Huahine-^Mode of applying the water — Introduction of Christian names— Baptism of intants— Views and feelings ofthe parents. Av intelligent observer may, during a transient visit to a foreign land, become acquainted to a certain extent with, the raental, moral, and spiritual necessities of its ¦inhabitants ; but it is only by a continued residence among them that these can be accurately known. Our daily intercourse with the people of Huahine strength ened the impression of their claims to our sympathy and exertions, which our earliest interviews had made. So long, however, as we remained unable to address them in their own tongue, we felt that exhibiting a good example was all that we could do ; but as soon as we had acquired a sufficient knowledge of the native lan guage to engage in public teaching, while we alternately performed the regular services at the settlement in Fa-re, we established branch stations in different parts of the island. Two were commenced on the west and southern coasts, viz. one in the fertile and formerly populous valley of Mahapu, and the other in the extensive dis trict of Parea. Schools were opened by approved na tive ma. ters at each of these places. In the former, three hundred scholars were instructed by Narii, a well- qualified teacher. The inhabitants also ereqted neat places of worship. Mr. Barff performed divine serwce A3 10 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. at each station alternately every other Sabbath ; where between three and four hundred attended. A similar branch station was commenced at Tamabua,. a populous and central .village in the district of Maeva, on the borders of a beautiful and extensive roto, or lake, of the sarae name, in the' northern part of the island. Here a school was opened by Tiori, an intelligent native,. and three hundred and eighty adults and children were taught. A commodious native ehapel was also built, and a cottage for the accommodation of the missionary who visited thera. As it was a considerable distance from our place of abode, I went on the Saturday afternoon, and spent the Sabbath at Maeva, where upwards of four hundred usu ally attended public worship. We continued our labours at these stations untU the summer of 1830, when the greater part of the residents were induced to remove to the settlement at Fa-re harbour. Sorae of the happiest seasons I have enjoyed in missionary occupations were in connexion with my occasional services at this place. The scenery of the adjacent country is remarkably fine, and though diflEerent in character, in no respect inferior to that which adbrns the borders of Windermere or Der- went-water. Tbe lake of Maeva is five miles in length, and of unequal breadth, thoijgh often two miles wide. Unagitated by the long rolling billows of the Pacific, and seldom ruffled by the northern and eastern breezes, from which it is sheltered by mountains, its surface was often smooth as a polished mirror, reflecting the groves around, and the heavens above. It abounds with fish. These not only supply the inhabitants of the shores of the lake with the means of subsistence,but, when viewed from the light canoe, as they sported in the depths be neath, or leaped above its surface, enlivened its solitude. On the eastem side a number of streams rose among the mountains, and, winding their way through the valleys, at length united with its waters. On this side, though the ascent from its margin to the distant moun tains was generaUy gradual, it was sometimes abrupt and bold : the rocky precipices, adorned with pendulous^ and creeping plants, rich in verdant foliage or clustering flowers, rose almost perpendicularly from the water; the hills were ornamented with clumps of the graceful cypress-shaped casuarina ; and in the narrow border aif lowland, that in many parts extended from the shores, LAKE OF MAEVA. 11 tothe foot of the mountains, the hibiscus tiliaceus, the be- tonica splendida, the inocarpus, and other trees of larger growth, reared their majestic forras, and spread their stately branches, clothed with dark and glossy foUage, while, round their gigantic stems, and spread from bough to bough, the beautiful and large bell-flowering convolvulus was often hung in wild luxuriant wreaths. The walk from Fa-re to the head of the lake was de^ lightful ; for more than a mile it was actually under what the natives call the maru uru, bread-fruit shade, large groves of this useful tree growing on each sideof the path. A number of small plantations give variety to the wild scenery — and many of the raatirjxs, or iijferior chiefs, have erected theix dwellings ijear the path. Hautia had,. when we first arrived, a noble house standing at the southern end of the lake. Along the eastern shore small villages were seen amid a grove of cocoanut and bread-fruit trees. A succession of agreeable sensations has arisen in my mind on a Saturday afternoon, when, passing along the lake in my cauoe, which was paddled by two native attendants, 1 have seen the columns of smoke curling up among the bread-fruit trees, where the inhabitants were dressing their food for the foUowing day. Sometimes I have received their salutations from the shore ; and, in contrast with their peaceful dwell ings and their present occupations, I have often been struck with the appearance of the villages, the dilapi dated family maraes, or- idol-tera,ples, mouldering in ruins on alraost every projecting point. The western side of this extensive lake is bordered by a low flat tract of land, in many places a mile wide, ex tending from south to, north. At the north^xn extremity of this beautiful piece of water there is a narrow chan nel, by which it communicates with the sea. The west ern side, though very different from the opposite shore, adds to the variety of the scenery ; it is thickly wooded, and, am,onf the trees that reach the highest perfection, the cocoanut, waving its crown of elegant leaves, and the no less elegant casuarina, whose boughs hang in arches over the water, are most conspicuous. The eastern side was doubtless originally the shore of the sea, and the lake filled by its waters, while the low bor der of land on the opposite side constituted the reef. After the reef reached the level of the sea at high-water, i,t ceased to ascend, but spread horizontally ; fragments 12 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Of cfc*al aM pieces of '^vood Wete throvWi apon its widfenei surface, tiU at lehgth it resis'ted the Shock of tile 'ocean, and the ¦waves rolled back without overflow ing it. Every year iiicreased the substance's acCuma' lated on its Surface ; vegetation at length commenceSi and the process of organization and decomposition, 'ac celerated hy the humidity t)T the atraosphere and thfe Warmth of the diwiate, formed the monild in which ttie trees at present covering it spread theii' roots ahd find iheir nourishment. The most conspicuous ahd picturesque object in ebh- nexi'oh with the lake scenery is moua tabu,, sacred ot devoted mountain, which rises on the eastern shore, near the northern end. It is a beautiful, and in one direction appears almost a regular, cone, partially cov ered with trees and bushes, even to its summit, while the shining basaltic or volcanic rocks, occasionally pro jecting through the cypress or pine-growing casuarina, add to the novel and agreeable diversity which its figure produces. The northern shore oS the roto, or lake, of Maeva was the favourite residence of many of the native kings. Here, also, the chief who governed the island after th6 last visit of Captain Cook resided, and erected a house fot Mai, or Omai, that he might be near him. The shores, and even the sraooth surface of the lake itself, have been the sccne of sorae of the most sangui nary battles that have been fought between rival parties on the island, or the people of Huahine and those of Rai atea and Borabora. Near its margin, on arising groundj one of the largest artificial fortifications in the group still reraains in a state of nearly entire preservation. But it is not so distinguished by any of these as by the vestiges of the ancient superstition of the island, which everywhere abound. Temples to the gods of the water were erected on every point of land, and family maraes in almost every grove, while the exten sive national temple of Tane stood near the northern extremity of th^e^ijlake, where the greater number of human sacri]^cj|fe^were offered, where the idols were usually kept, aiiid the national religious assemblies con vened. ' Every object around the lake, and every monument of art or labour, in the district of Maeva, bore marks of its connexion with their ancient religion. I have often visited •'the ruins of the large national teraple df DESIRE FOR BOOKS. 13 Tane, and the site of the house of Oro; and in my in tercourse with the people of Maeva, at the;Sneeting for inquiries, these were frequent topics of conversation, as well as those matters more immediately connected with the introduction of Christianity and the advance ment of education. The multiplication of schools soon increased the de^ mand for books ; and though a number printed in Eimeo had been distributed, they were soon found inadequate to the necessities of the people. The great desire of all classes for books hastened the completion of the spelling-book already in the press. I have often been amused with the ingenuity and per severance raanifested by the natives in their endeavours to obtain a substitute for books. The bark of the paper- mulberry was frequently beaten to a pulp, spread out on a board, and wrought and dried with great care, tiU it resembled a coarse sort of card. This was sometimes cut into pieces about the size of the leaves of a book ; and upon these, with a reed cut in the shape of a pen, and imrriersed in red or purple vegetable die, the alpha bet, syllabic, and reading lessons of the spelling-book, and the Scripture extracts usuaUy read in the school, have, been neatly and correctly copied. Sometimes the whole was accurately written on one broad sheet of paper like native cloth, and, after the manner of the ancients, carefully rolled up, except when used. This was often the only kind of book that the natives in re mote districts possessed ; and many families have, with out any other lessons, acquired a proficiency that has enabled them to read at once a printed copy of the Scriptures. It has also gratified us, as indicative of the estimatioi;! in which the people held every portion of the Word of God, and their desire to possess it, to behold them anxiously preserving even the smallest piece of paper, and writing on it texts of the Scripture which they had heard in the place of worship. These detached scraps of paper containing the sacred texts were not, like the phylacteries of the Jews, bound on the forehead or attached to the border of the gar ment, but carefully kept in a neat little basket. The possessor of such an envied treasure niight often be seen sitting on the grass, with his little basket beside him, reading to his companions around these portions of the Scripture. I have a number in the handwriting of the 14 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. natives, some of which they have brought to have them more fully explained, or to inquire what connexion they bore to parts with which they raight be better acquainted. Their use, however, was superseded by the printing of the Gospel of St. Matthew — an edition of upwards of two thousand copies of which was finished in less than eighteen raonths after our arrival in Huahine. The people were anxious to receive them, and multi tudes thronged the place where they were preparing, for some time before they were ready. The district of F^-re presented a scene strongly resembling that which Afareaitu had exhibited when the first portion of the sacred volume was printed there-; and many said they could not sleep, from the apprehension of not ob taining a copy. As it was not easy to distribute them to the greatest advantage, we determined to give a copy to none but such as could read ; but so importu nate were many, that we eauld not abide by our resolu tion. Sometimes those who were scholars induced their chiefs to apply for a. number of copies, guarantying their payment and their suitable appropriations. ¦ Frora this representation many were giVen to the different chiefs ; but we found it desirable afterward, in order to ensure the most advantageous distribution, to give only to those who we ourselves were satisfled could read. Several blind persons applied atthe different stations, earnestly soliciting books, stating that- though they could not read, they could hear, and remember as well as those who could see. To have dgnied to those suffer ing natural ' darkness the means o£ obtaining spiritual light, when we had every reason tp believe they were sincere iji their expression of desire for it, would have been cruel ; and we rejoice in having been honoured of God to comraunicate the gospel, as the servants of Him who — " from thick films shall purge the visua.1 ray. And on the sightless eyeball pour the day.." It is a pleasing fact, that in tbe South Sea islands, a number of blind persons have not only had their under- standings.j.eniightened by the perceptive parts of Scripr ture truth, but that to many it has proved " the light of Ufe," more valuahle than natural light, as the soul i$ CONVERSION OF HIRO. 15 move precious than the body, and eternity more import ant than time. Some have died, and we Jiave reason to believe have entered those realms of day where night and darkness are unknown. One remarkable instance occurred during the year in which 1 left the islands. The native name of the indi vidual to whom I allude was Hiro. He was the priest of one of the principal temples of Parea, in the lesser peninsula of the island, or Huahine iti. He was a priest of Hiro, the god of plunderers and thieves, and, in per fect accordance with the spirit of hia office, was the captain or leader of a band of robbers, who spread ter ror through the surrounding country. He was orie of the first and raost determined opposers of Christianity in Huahine; reproaching its adherents, defying the power, and disclaiming the authority, of its Author. But, like Saul of Tarsus, he found it hard to resist. He was in the prime and vigour of manhood, being at the time between thirty and forty years t)f age. When the nuraber of Christians increased in his neigh bourhood, and the Sabbath-day was first publicly ob served, in order to show his utter contempt of Chris tian institutions, he determined to profane that day "in defiance of Jehovah." He repaired for this purpose to some grounds in the neighbourhood of the temple, and engaged in erecting a fence ; but while thus employed, his career of impiety was suddenly arrested. The twig of a tree came in contact with his eyes ; almost instant blindness followed ; and, like Elymas, he was led home by his affrighted companions. Who considered it a visit ation from the Almighty. I had frequent interviews, with hira afterward, one in the precincts of bis own temple, which 1 visited in company with Messrs. Bennet, Tyerman, and Barff. His spirit was subdued : he subsequently became an humble, and, we trust, sincere disciple of that blessed Redeeraer whom he had persecuted. He died trusting in the merits of "Christ for acceptance with God the Father. The history of the conversion of the great apostle to the gentiles interested and affected him much ; and though the scales ori his bodily eyes were not re moved, but his blindness .continued untU his death, which occurred in 1824, such was the impression which analogy of circutnstances produced, that when he presented hinv-. self for baptism., he desired to be called Pavi.^ 16 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Other instances of .spiritual illumination equally pleasing now exist both in the Society and Sandwich Islands, in reference to individuals suffering one of the most distressing and hopeless privations to which hu manity is exposed. Some of our raost interesting con versations with the natives have been with such. " My eyes," said a -blind man one day to Mr. Williams, " be^ liold no attractive objects when I am engaged in prayer, or hearing the Word of God ; and yet my heart wanders, and my thoughts are often engaged on other subjects. My eyes see not another manjs property, &c. ; and yet, when I hear it spoken of, my heart covets il. The ob jects that tempt others to sin are unseen by me ; biit my imagination creates objects of sin, which often oc cupy my thoughts." The experience of Bartimeus Lai ana, a native of the Sandwich Islands, is also remarkably interesting and satisfactory. Blindness is not more common among the Polynesians than with the inhabitants of other countries ; yet there are numbers of aged persons who have lost their sight; andthe influence of that sympathy which this affliction always awakens in a Christian bosom, is now excited in the natives themselves, though formerly the blind were^ objects of neglect and ridicule. There is now connected with the missionary station at Buriaauia, or Burder's Point, a blind man, who could repeat correctly half the Gospel by John, very soon after it was printed. When we "have been distributing the Scriptures, two or three fine boys or girls have come, begging for copies, though they could not read — assuring us they were learning; and, when they have failed, they have en treated that we would write their names on the books, and reserve them till they were able to read. To our satisfaction, in this request they have often been joined by their parents, who have offered payment for the copies. We have usually complied with their wishes, and have witnessed the most entire confldence on their part, as it regafdediihe ultimate accomplishment of their wishes, when once their names have been written.- In Huahine it was necessary to select some public place for the distribution of the books ; the school-room was fixed upon, and, on the day appointed, the place was actually thronged untU the copies were expended. Ill their application at our own liouses, we found it im- TAHITIAN TRANSLATION. 17 possible to restrain the people ; they fiUed our yards and gardens, and thronged, every window, sometimes to such a degree that one of the missionaries, Mr. Bicknell, found it necessary to fasten the lower doors and win dows of his house, and retire to the chamber. The natives then procured long bamboo-canes, and, fastening their measure of oil, the price of the book, to one end, lifted it up to the window. Mr. Bicknell was so influ enced by the ingenuity and determination of the con trivance, that he distributed a number of copies, by fixing them in a slit or notch in the end of the cane presented at his window. ' When the edition issued from the press in Huahine, ' the proportion for Raiatea, Tahaa, and Borabora was sent to the missionaries residing in these places ; but the supply was too small, and numbers of the disap pointed individuals, supposing they should find a greater abundance at Huahine, came, when the wind was fair, twenty or thirty miles in their canoes, several ofwhich were such small and fragile barks as quite astonished us. I was. really surprised at the temerity of the indi viduals who had committed themselves to the mercy of the waves of the largest ocean in the world, in the hol lowed trunk of a tree, twelve or twenty feet long ; the sides of which, when the men Were in it, were not more than four or five inches above the surface of the water. It would be too much to suppose that they were all influenced by the highest motives, in the desire they thus manifested for the sacred volume ; but while some probably sought it only as an article of property in high and general esteem, others were undoubte,dly actuated by a conviction that it was able tp make them wise unto salvation, throiagh faith which is in Christ Jesus. The intensity of ardour manifested by many at first has, as might be expected, subsided : still the Scriptures are earnestly sought, and highly prized, by a great portion of the adult population. The whole of the New Testament has been trans lated and printed, not indeed in a uniform volume, but in detached portions, which many of the natives have bound up together. Separate portions of the Old Tes tament have also been translated, and some of the books are printed ; it is to be hoped that a uniform edition of the Bible will, at no very distant period, be circulated among the people. Whether ornot any of the apoclry- 18 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. phal books will ever assume a Polynesian dress, it is impossible to say, but at present it is improbable. ' The dialects spoken by the tribes inhabiting the dif ferent groups in the South Sea, beirig strictly analogous to each,other, it was hoped that the Tahitian translation of the Scriptures would have answered for the whole ; there is, however, reason to fear that distinct transla tions will be necessary, not only for the Sandwich Islands, the Marquesas, and Tongatabu, but also for the, Hervey Islands, which are not more than 600 or 700 miles distant from the Society Isles. So strong a re serablance, however, exists" between the dialects, that the Tahitian translation will require only slight varia tions, the idioms and structure of the language being, in all their distinguishing features, the same. . When the uncultivated nature of the language into which the Scriptures have been translated is considered, connected with the remembrance that it is only by the labpurs of the missionaries that it has been within the last few years reduced to a systera, and employed in a written form, it caimot be expected that these books, more than any other first translationa, should be alto gether faultless. The knowledge of the missionaries themselves in the language, notwithstanding thirty years' attention to it, is constantly increasing; and, compared with future translations . which their suc cessors or well-pducated natives may make, the present will, perhaps, appear imperfect. Nevertheless, from the qualifications of the translators, their unquestion able integrity, and united patient attention to the prepa ration of eyery work, 1 believe the only iraperfections that may be found will refer to minor points of style in idiom or language. ' Sorae of the missionaries excel in acquaintance with the original languages, others with the native dialect, and every copy is inspected by all, before going to the press. The year 1819 is also distinguished in the annals of the South Sea islanders, by the admimstration of the rite of baptism to the first Christian converts in the islands. Pomare and others made a profession of Chris tianity in 1813 ; names were written down ; the change became general during the same -year ; persecution raged with violence in 1814; the inhabitants of Tahiti and Eimeo embraced the gospel in 1815, and those of t|ip reniaining group in 1816 ; and it certainly appearg BAPTISM. 19 singular that none should have been baptized untU 1819. This delay, however, did not arise from any doubts in the minds of the missionaries as to the nature of the ordinance itself, fhe proper subjects of it, or the man ner in which it was to be administered ; on all these points they, were agreed. It arose from a variety of circumstances, pecuUar in their kind, local in their in fluence, and such as they could neither foresee nor control. At flrst, their continuance and their existence were very uncertain, in consequence of the efforts of the idolaters, and the war that followed ; afterward the conduct of the king, vvho, on his first profession, they would not have hesitated to baptize, was such as to induce them to fear that his baptism would injure the Christian cause among the people ; and subsequently, as they were on the point of separating and forming distinct stations, it was thought best to defer it till they should have entered upon the fields of their permanent labour, where they hoped to gather around them con- gregatipns of- converts, administer the rite of baptism, and form Christian churches. The missioriaries considered the proper subjects for the ordinance to be- those who professed their faith in Christ as the only Saviour, and the children of such individuals : but considerable difficulty was experienced in determining what the moral or religious qualifications of the adults ought to be, and the comiexion that should exist between their baptism and admission to the com munion. Although we read different authors on the subject, their views were seldom altogether adapted to our circumstances, and I believe we derived but little real assistance from any. We desired to bow only to the authority of Scripture, and to follow implicitly its directions. We considered our circumstances by no means dissimilar to those of the individuals for whose guidance the directions of Scripture were primarily given. Having the commission of our Lord to his disciples for our warrant;, and the conduct of his apostles in the execution of it for our model, we hope we have been enabled to proceed ac cording to the Divine v?iU, arid in such a manner as to secure the approbation of the Christian churches by which we had been sent to preach Christ among the gentiles. Our situation at thi.s time we regarded ?% so POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. most critical, and our procedure in this respeet sueli as, it was presumed, would haye an important bearing on future generations. , , Happily, however, for us, and for ali plaeeifl in similar circumstances, the terms ofthe commission are unequiv ocal and explicit ; and we could not but perceive, that by the sarae warrant, in virtue of which we preached j. the gospel, and, as the word is rendered in the Tahitiaio, proselytedr those among whom we laboured, we were also bound to baptize in the name of the Father, and the Son, and the Holy Ghost. The intimate connexion between the administration of this rite by the apostles, and the reception of the gospel on the part of those to whom they preached, also convinced us of the design of our Lord, that it should follow the belief in the tes timony concerning him, which We were commissioned to deliver. ' Hence, it was regarded as our duty to bap. tize those who desired to become the disciples of Christ, as well as to instruct thera concerning his will. We did not apprehend that there was any spiritual virtue or efficacy connected with, or contained in, bapr tism, nor did we consider aay spiritual blessings com municated by it, much less that most important df aU, the one thing needful — a regeneration of the heart. It appeared designed, by the great Head of the church, to occupy, in the dispensation of the New. Testament, that place which circumcision did in the Old. The acts of desiring and receiving baptism, on the part of the sub ject of it, were viewed as a public and solemn renun ciation of paganism, and a declaration of discipleship with Christ; andthe circumstance of baptism was re garded as constituting the grand, pubUc, and open line of demarkation between the idolatrous and .the thus- separated or Christian portions of the community. While we thus felt ourselves bound to baptize thos* who, like the Ethiopian eunuch, and those to whom Philip preached in Samaria, professed their behef in the Saviour, and the grand truths of the Christian system, we also felt that it was desirable to receive suitable^ evidence of the sincerity of such profession. As to the degree of evidence that should be re(|riired, there was a considerable difference of opinion. A few of our number supposed that no adults should receive this initiatory rite but such as there was every reason to believe were regenerated persons ; and that a general BAPTISM OF POMARE. 21 belief in the testimony that Christ was the Saviour of men, and a desire to receive further instruction, however sincere it raight be, should be accompanied with an ex perience of that change of heart which these truths, under the special influences of the Holy Spirit, are adapted to produce ; and, in short, that such only should be baptized as would be at once unhesitatingly admitted to the Lord's Supper. The majority, however, of the missionaries were of opinion that the ordinances were totally distinct, and that, though it was proper that every church-member should have been baptized, yet it did not follow that every one who had received such rite was thereby ad mitted to church-fellowship. Satisfaptory evidence of sincerity in belief that Jehovah was the true God, and Jesus Christ the only Saviour, was considered a suffi cient warrant for its administration to those who re quired it. No one, however, at any time desired to exercise undue influence over the opinions of his coadjutors ; and, although uniformity was desirable, we did not thiiik it important to sacrifice much for oneness of sentiment or practice in this respect. After repeated and prayer ful deliberation, recognising, and aiming to act upon, the broad and liberal principles upon which the institu tion under whose patronage we laboured was founded, it was mutuaUy agfeed that each missionary should, in his own station, pursue that course which appeared to him most in accordance with the declaraations of Scrip ture. In two of the stations, or perhaps three, the mission aries have baptized those only whom they had reason to believe had been baptized by the Holy Ghost, and were Christians inthe strictest sense of the term; the chil dren of such persons they also baptized. In the other stations, the missionaries have administered this rite to aU whora they had reason to beUeve sincere in profes sion of discipleship, without requiring evidence of their having experienced a decisive spiritual change. In this respect some sUght difference prevailed ; but on eveiy other point there has been perfect uniformity in their proceedings. 'The first pubUc baptism that occurred in the islands took place in the Royal Mission Chapel at Papaoa, in Tahiti, on the 16th of July, 1819, Pomare, the kingof 22 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the island, was the individual to whom, in the midst of what, but a few years before, had been a scqffing, igno rant, obstinate, cruel, and idolatrous nation, that rite was administeredi It was the Sabbath-day. The con gregation in the chapel, though less numerous than during the services of the previous week, amounted to between four and five thousand. The subject of dis course was appropriate. Matt, xxviii. 18-20. At the clOse of the sermons the 'missionaries gathered round the central pulpit ; the ceremony commenced with sing ing. Mr, Bicknell, one of the missionaries who had arrived in the Duff, implored the Divine blessing, and then, assisted by Mr. Henry, the only other senior mis sionary at Tahiti, poured the water on his head, bap tizing him -"in the name ofthe Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost." The venerable missionary then addressed the king, not without agitation, yet with firni- hess, " entreating him to walk worthy of his high pro fession in the conspicuous station he held before angels, men, and God himself." Mr. Henry addressed the people, and Mr. Wilson implored the Divine benedic tion, that what had been done on earth might be ratified in heaven. Although the subsequent conduct of Pomare was a matter of the deepest regret to his best friends, yet there was something in the ceremony unusually impo sing ; and the emotions associated with it must have been intense and interesting, especially to the two elder missionaries, whq had performed the rite. He had been identified with the chief events of their lives ; upwards of two-and-twenty years had roUed by since the provi dence of God first brought thera acquainted with him on the shores of Matavai ; and in comiexion with" that in terview, which memory would probably present in strong and vivid colours on this occasion, they pe?haps recoK lected the opinion formed-of him by the huriiane. cora mander of the Duff, that he appeared the last person likely to receive the gospel. Yet amid the thickest dark ness that had ever veiled their prospects, in him the first cheering ray of dawning light had ^broken upon them : he was their first convert ; in every difficulty, he had been their steady friend ; in every labour, a ready coadjutor; and had now publicly professed that hfe faith was grounded on that rock whereon their own was fixed, and his hopes, with theirs, derived from one com- PREPARATORY INSTRUCtlONS. 23 mon source. What intense and mingled hopes and fears must have pervaded their hearts ! what hallowed joy must they have felt in anticipation of his being with them an heir of immortality, chastened with appalling and not ungrounded fears, that after aU he might become a cast-away ! Numbers, both adults and children, were subsequently baptized in the windward islands ; but it was not until sorae months after that the ordinance wa,s dispensed to any. in the leeward or Society group. It was in Huahine that the first from among those who had renounced paganism in the leeward islands were thus initiated intp the outward church of Christ. Huahine was a new station, and fe# of the inhabitants, when we landed, knew much more of Christianity than its name. Fifteen months had elapsed since our arrival, and during that period, among a people who had every thing to learn, we had raade the doctrines and general precepts of the gospel the topics of our discourses. Many of them now came forward, declaring their desire to become the disciples of the Saviour, to make a public profession of faith in hira by baptism, and to seek in struction in all his wiU. We found that, had we been so disposed, we could no longer defer the rite, with regard at least to some who applied. Anxious that it should be on their part a reasonable act, and that, before being received, it should be under stood, we proposed to meet one afternoon every week with those who desired to be baptized^ At this meeting we endeavoured to instruct them in the origin, nature, design, and subjects of the ordinance, together with the duties of those who should receive it. There was no wish on our part to baptize by stratagem, as some of the popish missionaries have done, but we sought to make the people well acquainted with the matter in aU its bearings.^At the first weekly assemblies, between twenty and thirty of the most proraising of the converts attended ; afterward the nurabers exceeded four or five hundred. In the instructions given, the Scriptures, and the Scriptures only, were our guide ; and we endeavoured to inculcate the doctrine as we found it there, and as if it had never been controverted. Our warrant for its ad ministration we derived from our Lord's commission to the first raissionaries, which was also our own. In its ti POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. nature, we instructed them not to consider baptisra aa' possessing any saving efficacy, or conferring any spirit ual benefit, but heingon our part a duty connected wjlJiL our office, and on theirs a pubUc declaration of disciple ship or proselytism to the Christian faith ; designed )0 teach unto all their moral defilement in the sight of God, and their need of that washing of regeneratioa and spiritual purification which it figuratively signijied. The duties of those who desired it were also incvd- cated, and the necessity that existed not only for their renunciation of every .open'idolatrous practice, and at tention to instruction in the principles, but a deportment aocDrdant with the precepts of Christianity, in the con spicuous .situation in whioh this very act would placfi thera before those by whom, they were surrounded. We also informed thera that it appeared to us from the Scripture that the ordinance was designed for believers and their children, and therefoEe directed that, as they desired them, to be brought up in the Christian faith, they should dedicate them to Jehovah, the Father, Son, and Holy Spirit, by baptism. It was found necessary, at ,the same time, plajnlyto caution them against sup posing there was in baptism any thing meritorious, or on account of which they would ^receive any special blessing from God, other than that which would foUow general obedience to his Word. This was the more requisite, as there was reason to apprehend that, from the influence of a system in which strict observance trf rites and -ceremonies, without regard to motive or mo£al character, was all that was necessary, they might rest satisfied with having received the mere external declara tory rite. We also endeavoured carefuUy to avoid hold- . ing out any prospect of distinction or temporal advan tage, as an inducement to the people to apply for baptisms; but constantly and plainly represented its observance'as ; only an act of obedience to him whom they iprofess'ed < to desire for their Master and their ,Lord, and who gad promised that his people should be baptized with the Holy Ghost. "This weekly meeting was designed to answer another pturpose, that of affording us the mesras. of judging ofitiie sincerity of the candidates, as weU as of imparting tp them necessary instruction. After several months had been occupied iu devoting one afternoon in the week to MODE OF BAPTIZING. 25 theiir instruction, it was deeraed proper to baptize a number of the candidates, and two of their chUdren. It was now necessary to determine upon the mode : this had never appeared to us a very important part of the matter. We should not have objected to immerse any individuals who had themselves desired it. But as the Scriptures are not decisive on this point, and though it is stated that PhUip and the eunuch went down to the water, or into the water, yet it was not in this act, but in the application of water in the name of the Trinity, that we considered baptism to consist : in such applica tion, it is not stated that the eunuch was immersed. Hence we did not explain this, or other passages of similar import, as signifying immersion — and conse quently the converts did not desire it. But had one of our own number thought it proper to have administered this rite by immersion, I do not think we should have said he acted wrong in so doing. In this respect, how ever, there was no difference of opinion, and conse quently a perfect uniformity of practice prevailed. With regard to the other modes, we did not think it was very material whether we poured or sprinkled the element upon the individual. The 12th of September, 1819, was fixed for the bap tism of the first converts in Huahine. It was also the Sabbath. A suitable discourse was delivered in the morning to a numerous congregation who thronged the chapel. . Mr. Davies, being the senior missionary at the station, officiated, assisted by Mr. Barff and myself. The climate in the South Sea islands is remarkably fine, the weather warm, the streams abundant, and the waters clear as crystal ; and, had we been disposed to perforra the service in the open air, under the shade of a spreading grove, we had every facility for so doing. The converts raight have been led into the river, and, standing on the bank or in the stream ourselves, we might have applied its waters to their persons, using the words prescribed. On such occasions, the most de lightful scenes of which it is possible for imagination to conceive would have been presented ; scenes similar, perhaps, to those often witnessed in the days of the apostles ; and for the sake of effect, and the associations they would have awakened, 1 have sometiraes for a moment wished we had. But the wish has only been momentary ; for, whatever might have been the im- VoL. 111.— B 26 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. pression of such a scene, or the emotions enkindled, they would not have been attended with any valuable practical result. On the present, therefore, and every subsequent occasion, the rite was administered before the whole congregation in the place of worship. During the ordinary morning service, the approved candidates sat in front of the pijlpit. At its -close, they kept their places, and, after imploring the Divine bless ing upon the service, we proceeded to its performance. Their profession of faith in Christ, and desire to be in structed in his Word had been received at a preceding meeting ; and it was only necessary now, after a short address to the whole, to ask the name of each adult, and the parents the names of their chUdren. This Mr. Davies did, — beginning with Mahine, the principal he reditary chieftain 6f the island. Having received his reply, Mr. Davies immersed his hand in a vessel of water which Mr. Barff or myself held by his side, and then, holding his hand over the crown or forehead of the chief, whUe the water frora his hand flowed or fell upon Mahine's head, Mr. Davies pronounced aloud, with distinctness and solemnity, Mahine e tapape du vau ia oe i ie ioa o te Medica, e o te Tamaidi, e o te Yarua maitai : " Mahine, I apply water to you in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost." Re peating the same words, and applying the water in the same manner to every individual, he proceeded to bap tize the whole number, who kept their seats during the ceremony. Mahine was not baptized first because he was the king of the island, but because he was one of the earliest converts, and had been most diligent in his attention and consistent in deportment. We were careful to avoid giving any preference to rank and station simply as such ; and, on the present occasion, we beheld Hautia, the governor of the island, and others of high rank, sit ting by the side of the humblest peasants of the land. In reference to civil or political station, we always in culcated the requirements of the gospel, that all should render honour to whom honour is due, invariably pre senting a suitable example of the most respectful behaviour to individuals of rank or distinction. But in the Church of God, and in the participation of the "privileges of Christianity, we as invariably taught that all were brethren, that there was no precedence derived CHRISTIAN NAMES. 27 from worldly exaltation, that one only was our Lord and King, the Saviour himself. This principle we were happy to see recognised by themselves on this occasion, as some of the principal chiefs sat at the lowest end. The word lapape, used in the first instance, was that which appeared the most suitable, as we were anxious to divest the rite of every thing extraordinary or mys terious. The signification of the word is to apply water, without expressing the precise mode of applica tion. They have no word answering to the term baptize, as now understood in the English language, though they have distinct words for sprinkling, pouring, bathing, plunging, &c., but we considered the simple application of water to approach nearer to the original word baptisto, than either of these ; and it seemed so appropriate as to render it unnecessary to introduce any other. Sub sequently, however, our opinions changed, and we adopted the original word, which in Tahitian is written la-pa-ti-zo, and used only to signify this sacred rite. We have thus left it as we found it, leaving the Scrip ture to speak its own language, without limiting it to what we suppose its peculiar signification. The water was not sprinkled on the face with force ; the sign of the cross was not made, nor was water poured on the head from any vessel ; but, taking one handfrom the vessel containing the water, and holding it over the individual, we allowed so much water as was held in or attached to the hand, to fall upon the crown or forehead of the baptized, pronouncing, at the same time, the narae, and the words prescribed in the gospels. Sorae difficulty was experienced with regard to the naraes, as many of the natives, especially the chiefs, have a number ; some of office, others hereditary, and not a few intimately connected with their former idol atry, or its abominable institutions. It was not thought desirable that they should assume a new name on receiving baptism, or that it should interfere with any narae of office, station, or hereditary title that raight appertain unto them. But every blasphemous, idol atrous, or impure narae (and those of some of the Areois and priests were so to a most affecting degree), we recoraraended should be discontinued, that they should select those naraes by which, in future, they would wish to be designated. A few of the adults chose foreign, B2 28 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. and in general scriptural names, for themselves or their children. This produced a considerable change in their language. Formerly, all names were descriptive of some event or quality — as Fanauao, day-born, Fanaupo, night-born, Mataara, wakeful or bright-eyed, Matamoe, sleepful or heavy-eyed, Paari, wise, or Matauore, fearless, &c. A number of terms were now introduced, as Adamu Adam, Noa Noah, Davida David, leremia Jeremiah, Hezekia Hezekiah, lacoba James, loane John, Petero Peter, &c. with no other signification than being the names of the persons With regard to infants, we only baptized those whose parents, one or both, were themselves baptized, and who desired thus to dedicate their children to God, and engaged to train thera in the principles of Christianity ; and then we only baptized infants, unless the children of more advanced years understood the nature of the ordinance, and themselves desired to raake, by this act, a public profession of their discipleship to Christ, and their wishes to be instructed in his Word. Sometimes the infant was held in the arms of its parent, who stood up while the rite was administered ; at other times, and I believe invariably during subse quent years, we have taken the child in the left arm, and baptized it with the right hand. Whenever any of our own children have been baptized, we have brought them to the chapel, and have performed the ceremony at the same time and in the sarae way as with the natives,; that they might perceive that in this respect there was no difference between us. The baptism of infants has certainly been among our most interesting religious exercises. It was generally performed after morning service on the Sabbath. We usually addressed a short and affectionate exhortation to the parents, enforcing their responsibility and duty toiwards the dear children they were thug offering ; not indeed as an innocent child was formerly offered in sacrifice to senseless idols, or to a cruel imaginary deity, but to be trained up in the nurture and admonition of that Divine Parent who -has said, " I love them that love me, and those that seek me early shall find me." I have been sometimes almost overwhelraed on be holding the intensity of mingled feeling with Which* three or four smiling infants have been brought by theiir BAPTISM OF INFANTS. 29 respective parents to the rustic baptisraal font. I have fancied, in the strongly expressive countenances of the parents, the eraotions of gratitude, and the ray of hope and anticipated joy in the future progress of the child, when it should exhibit the effects of that inward change of which this was the outward sign. In strong and distressing contrast with sensations of this hallowed and delightful kind, I have supposed the memory of far different acts in which, as parents, many of them had been engaged, has remained ; I have sup posed that recollection has presented the winning look of conscious innocence, which some dear babe has cast upon them, or the plaintive cry which from its Usping tongue first broke upon their ears, but which was un heeded, and they monstrously committed cool, inhuman murder — when they should have cherished the tenderest and softest sensibilities of the human bosora : 1- believe this has not been in my iraagination only. The feeling depicted in the humane and Christian parent's coun tenance, suffused with tears, has often been an index of no common inward agitation. Subsequent conver sation has confirmed the fact ; and many have brought their children to present them unto God in baptism, who, while idolaters, had more than once or twice been guilty of the barbarous crime of infant murder. This practice is aboUshed ; and, instead of shameless murder, or pagan sacrifice, the parents now delight to bring their infants to the Christian sanctuary, and thus dedicate them to God. 1 have been often rather agreeably surprised at the anxiety of the parents to have their children baptized. Without inquiring into the origin of this solicitude, I believe it is not confined to the inhabitants of the South Sea islands, and is certainly not unpleasant to behold. I recoUect at one tirae the parents of three children carae with considerable earnestness, and requested rae to baptize their infants, rather earlier than I thought it should be done. It was not at Huahine, and the mis sionary under whose care the station was more par ticularly placed was absent; I therefore proposed to defer it till his arrival. They pressed me not to decline" ; and one of them stated as a reason, that her child had been ill, and she was afraid it would die before it had been baptized. " Suppose," I repUed, '• that it should, you know that the child will not lose thereby. No 30 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. persons will be admitted to heaven siraply because they have been baptized, nor will any be excluded therefrom merely because they have not." — " Yes," answered the mother, " 1 know that ; yet I do not feel satisfied now — ^but when it has been baptized, my mind will become easier." I could not reprove her; I endeavoured, how ever, to impress upon her mind the conviction, that the ordinance, though a duty, did not itself confer any spir itual benefit, and relieved her mind by informing her that I would baptize the chUd at the close of the evemng service. In the preceding detail, I have perhaps been more prolix and minute than the importance of the subject may appear to demand ; I have been influenced by a desire to give that information, relative to our proceed ings in this respect, to the friends of missions in general, and to the patrons of the South Sea mission in particular, to which, from the interest they have taken, and the support they have afforded, I have considered them justly entitled, and which 1 cannot but hope will be satisfactory. Although I have only given the proceedings of one station, 1 believe that, with tbe exception of some of the missionaries baptizing only such adults as they con sider to be true Christians, and religible for church- fellowship, the ministration has been uniform in all. With us, those were baptized who made a credible pro fession of belief in Christ, and a desire to become his disciples, without any immediate view to church-fellow ship, which we considered a subsequent measure. .A.n address on the nature of baptism, and the duties of those who had received it, was printed after the first administration, and widely circulated, apparently with good effect. The weekly meeting for instructing those who desired baptism was continued, and the first dis pensing of that ordinance produced an astonishing effect upon the people. Multitudes who had heretofore been indifferent now appeared in earnest about religion, and the number who attended our preparatory meeting soon amounted to four hundred. Those who had been bap tized, also, in general attended. A state of religious feeling, such as I never witnessed elsewhere, and equal to any accounts of revivals in America or other parts, of which I evei read, now pre vailed, not only in Huahine, but in the other missionary CAOTION OF THE MISSIONARIES. 3] stations. The schools and meetings were punctuaUy and regularly attended. The inhabitants of remote dis tricts came and took up their abode at the missionary settlement ; and nothing could repress the ardour of the people in what appeared to us their search after the means of obtaining the Divine favour. Often have we been aroused at break of day, by persons coraing to inquire what they must do to be saved — how they might obtain the forgiveness of their sins, and the favour of God ; expressing their desires to become the people of God, and to renounce every practice contrary to Chris tian consistency. Many were undoubtedly infiuenced by a desire of bap tism ; this had introduced a new distinction, which, not withstanding our endeavours to prevent it, they probably thought must confer some temporal or spiritual advan tage on those who received it. But with others it was not so, as the event has satisfactorily proved : many who at this time were awakened to an extraordinary religious concern have ever since remained steadfast in their principles, and uniform in the practice of every Christian virtue. We now felt raore than ever the responsibility of our situation, and were afraid lest we should discourage, and throw a sturabling-block in the way of those who were sincerely inquiring after God. Yet we felt no less apprehension lest we should be the means of encouraging desires, and cherishing the delu sive hopes of such as were either deceiving themselves or others, and, under cover of seeking the favour of God, were actually pursuing that which they imagined wouid improve their temporal condition, or add to their respectability in society. Some who had been baptized we found it necessary to admonish, lest they should rest satisfied with the attainraents already made, and neglect the more important considerations. In the interesting and critical duties now devolving upon us, we endeavoured to act with caution, taking the Word of God for our directory, and bearing in mind at the same time the pecuUar circumstances of the people ; avoiding precipitancy in our public measures : so that if we erred, it might be on the side of careful ness. The everlasting welfare of the people was our only object ; this we considered would not eventually suffer, whatever might be the effect of withholding bap tism from those who raight be proper subjects for it. But 32 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. by adrainistering this rite to those who sought it from improper motives, should it render them satisfied with the sign, instead of the Divine influence signified, we might become accessory to their fatal delusion. Under the influence of these impressions, we were, perhaps, led to defer the rite of baptism to those who applied for it longer than we ought to have done ; and I have known many who have been candidates upwards of one or two years. Their views of the doctrine have been in general correct, in their conduct there has been nothing unchristian or immoral, and they have uniformly expressed their desires to become the true disciples of Christ ; but during that period we have not baptized them, merely because we have apprehended they did not feel the necessity of that purification of heart of which baptism is only the external sign. When we first administered that ordinance, we had no idea of the natives thronging in such numbers to receive it, and consequently had not deliberated on the term of that probation which we afterward deemed it desirable to institute. CHAPTER II. Inlereating state ofthe people— Extensive prevalence of a severe epidemic— Former diseases in the islands comparatively, few and mild — Priests the general physicians — Native practice of physic — Its intimate connexion "with sorcery — Go.ds of the healing art — The tuabu, or broken back— Insanity^ Native warm-bath — Oculists — Surgery — Setting a brokep neck or back — The operation of trepan — Native remedies superseded by European medicine — Need of a more abundant supply — Former cruelty towards the sick — Par ricide — Present treatment of invalids — Death of Messrs. Tessier and Bick- nell — Dying charge to the people — Missionary responsibihty. The same interesting state of the people by which the close of 1819 had been distinguished marked the com mencement of 1820. Never were our direct missionary labours raore arduous and incessant ; and yet during no period of our residence there were they more delightful. We beheld indeed the isles waiting for the laws and in stitutions of Messiah, and felt that we had been sent to a people eraphatically prepared of the Lord, made willing m the day of his power. EPIDEMIC INFLUENZA. 33 The inhabitants of the remote districts which we had periodicaUy visited were many of thera no longer satis fied with an opportunity for conversation on religious subjects once a week, but came and buUt their houses in the neighbourhood of Fa-re. We recommended those who remained to do the same ; and soon after the annual meetings in May, they so far complied as to render it unnecessary for us to visit these stations. One spacious chapel was opened in the latter end of April, on which occasion 1 read a translation of the sixth chapter of the second book of Chronicles, and afterward preached from the sixth verse. Our mis sionary meeting was remarkably weU attended, and the subscriptions proportionahly liberal ; they amounted to between three and four thousand gallons of oil, besides cotton and other trifling articles. In the midst of this delightful state of things, the sta tions were visited with 'a distressing epidemic, which spread through the whole group of islands, and proved fatal to many of the people. It was a kind of influenza, affecting the lungs and throat ; many attacked with it lost their voice.- We suffered in coraraon with the peo ple, and I was obliged to relinquish all public duty for some weeks. This kind of calamity has been frequently experienced in the islands since they have been the resort of foreign shipping, though we are not aware that it prevaUed before. A kind of dysentery appeared after the visit of Vancouver's ship, which called at the islands in 1790 : this proved fatal to a vast portion of the popu lation. In the year 1800 the Britannia, a London vessel, anchored at Taiarabu. Two seamen absconded, and a disease followed, less fatal, but very distressing, and more extensive, as scarcely an individual escaped. These diseases have generally passed through the islands from the east to the west, in the direction of the trade-winds. After the above appeared araong the people, it was for some raoiiths confined to the wind ward islands ; and so general was its prevalence, that Pomare one day said to Mr. Nott, " If this had been a fatal or kiUing disease, like that from "V'ancouver's ship, no individual would have survived." As it began to subside, a canoe called Hareaino arrived from the leeward islands, and after remaining a week or two at Tahiti, returned to Huahine. Shortly after this the people who had been in the canoe were attacked, B3 34 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. and the disease ultimately spread as corapletely through this group as it had through that at which the foreign vessel touched. Within the last two years a disorder in many respects sirailar to that left by the crew of Vancouver's vessel has again swept through the islands, and carried off numbers of the people. The diseases formeriy prevailing among the South Sea islanders were comparatively few ; those frora which they now suffer are principally pulmonary, inter mittent, and cutaneous. The most fatal are; according to their account, of recent origin. While idolaters, they were accustomed to consider every bodily affliction as the result of the anger of their gods, and the priest was a more important parsonage in time of sickness than the physician. Native practitioners, who were almost invariably priests or sorcerers, were accustomed to ap ply such healing reraedies as the islands afforded ; and an invocation to some spirit or god attended the admin istration of every medicine. Tama, Taaroatuihono, Eteate, and Rearea were the principal gods of physic and surgery. The former, in particular, was invoked for the cure of fractures and bruises. From the gods the priests pretended to have received the knowledge of the healing art, and to thera a part of the physician's fee was considered to belong. No animal or mineral substances were adraitted into their pharmacopoeia ; vegetable productions alone were used, and these simply pulverized, infused, heated on the fire, or with red-.hot stones, and often fermented. Many of their applications, however, were powerful, especially a species of gourd, or wild cucumber. A preparation, in which milk from the pulp of the cocoanut formed a principal ingredient, was sometimes followed by almost instant death- Mr. Barff once took this preparation, at the earnest recommendation of the people ; but it nearly cost him his life, although he had not drunk more than half the quantity prepared. Frequently, when some medicines were about to be administered, the friends and relatives of the patient were sent for, that they might be at hand should the effect be unfavourable. They often expected it would either save or destroy the patient. Numerous ceremo nies were connected with every remedy applied ; and much greater dependence was placed on the efficacy of the prayers than on the effect of the medicine. PRACTICE OF PHYSIC. 35 When a person was taken iU, the priest or physician was sent for ; as soon as he arrived, a young plantain- tree, procured by some members of the family, was handed to him, as an offering to the god ; a present of cloth was also furnished, as his own fee. He began by calling upon the name of his god, beseeching him to abate his anger towards the sufferer, to say what would propitiate him, or what applications would afford relief. Sometimes remedies were applied at the same time, or the relatives sent to fetch certain herbs or roots, but the priest usually went himself to compound the raau, or medicine : a considerable degree of mystery was attached to this proceeding, and the physicians appeared unwilling that others should know of what their prepa rations consisted. They pretended to be instructed by their god, as to the herbs they should select, and the manner of combining them. Different raaus, or medi cines, were used for different diseases ; and although they kept the composition of their nostrums a secret, they were not unwilling that the report of their efficacy might spread, in order to their obtaining celebrity and extended practice. Hence, when a person was afflicted with any particular disease, and the inquiry made as to who should be sent for, it was not unusual to hear it said, " O ta mea te raau maitai no ia mai," — Such a one has a good medicine for this disease. The smaU-pox, measles, hooping-cough, and a variety of other diseases to which most European chUdren are subject, are unknown ; yet they have a disease called oniho, which in its progress, and the effects on the face, corresponds with the smaU-pox, excepting that it is milder, and the inequalities it leaves on the skin soon disappear. There is another disease, soraewhat analo gous to this, reserabUng the species of erysipelas called shingles, for the cure of which the natives apply a mix ture of bruised herbs and. pulverized charcoal. Infiam- matory tumors are prevalent, and the only remedy they apply is a mixture of herbs bruised with a stone. Asth matic and other pulmonary affections also occur, and, with persons about the age of twenty, generally prove fatal. Among the raost prevalent and obstinate diseases to which, as a nation, they are exposed, is one which ter minates in a permanent affection of the spine ; it usually appears in early life, commencing in the form of au 36 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. intermittent or remittent. The body is reduced almost to a skeleton ; and the disease terminates in death, or a large curvature of the spine, so as considerably to diminish the height of the individua], and cause a very unsightly protrusion of the spine between the shoulders, or a curvature inwards, causing the breast-bones to ap pear unusually prominent. Multitudes in every one of the Society Islands are to be seen deformed by this dis ease, which the natives. call tuapu, literally, projecting; or, as we should say, humped-back. After this curvature has occurred the patient usually recovers^and although greatly deformed, does not ap pear more predisposed to disease than others. Those individuals are often among the most active, intelligent, and ingenious of the people. Connected with this disease there are two remark able circumstances. I ara not prepared to say that itis hereditary, but the children of such persons are raore frequently the subjects of it than others. It is also sin gular that it should prevail principally among the lower classes of society-^the farmers and the mechanics. I know of no principal chief, and 1 cannot recoUect any one even of secondary rank, thus afflicted ; yet their rank and station are hereditary. This single fact ren ders more striking than it otherwise would be the differ ence in appearance between the chiefs and people, and it may certainly warrant the inference that the meager living of the latter exposes them to maladies from which more generous diet and corafortable modes of Ufe exerapt their superiors. Some say this singular complaint, which was unknown to their ancestors, has only prevailed since they have been visited by foreign shipping. It does not prevail among the inhabitants of the surrounding islands ; but whether it be of recent origin or not, in Tahiti it is very affecting to witness the numbers that have suffered ; and we cannot but hope that as industry and civihzation ad vance, and iheir mode of living improves, it will in an equal ratio disappear from among them. Blindness is frequently induced by the same disease that precedes the spinal curvature. The condition of the blind, when suffered to Uve, raust, under the reign of idolatry, have been truly lamentable; they were gen eraUy objects of derision and neglect, if not of wanton cruelty. MEDICINE AND SUROERY. 37 Insanity prevailed in a slight degree, but individuals under its influence met with a very different kind of treatment. They were supposed to be inspired or pos sessed by some god, who, the natives imagined, had en tered every one suffering under mental aberrations. On this account no control was exercised, but the high est respect was shown them. They were, however, generally avoided, and their actions were considered as the deeds of the god, rather than the raan. Under these circurastances, when the poor wretch became his own destroyer, it was not regarded as an event to be de plored. Deafness was sometimes experienced ; and there are a few persons in the islands who can neither speak nor hear distinctly. In their application to particular diseases, the priests manifested considerable acquaintance with the medicinal properties of the herbs, and their adaptation to the com plaint, to relieve which they were employed ; but their practice must have been very uncertain and ineffectual, though they were held in high esteem by all ranks. Convulsions being sometimes experienced, were con sidered to result from the direct power of the god. Sudden death was also attributed to the same cause — and an attack so terrainating was called rima atua, " hand of god." Those who died suddenly were also said to be haruhia e te atua, oxuumehia e te atua — " seized by the god, or strangled by the god." Indeed, the gods were supposed to send aU the diseases with which they were affiicted. Whatever mystery they might attach to the prepara tion and use of medicine, their practice of surgery and application of external remedies were more simple and straightforward. They did not apply friction in the sarae manner as the Sandwich islanders soraetimes do, viz. by placing the patient flat on the ground, and roUing a twelve or fourteen pound shot backwards and forwards along the back ; but, in a far more gentle manner, by rubbing with the hands the muscles of the limbs, and pressing them in the same way as the Indians practise shampooing. The natives had no method of using the warm-bath, but often seated their patients on a pUe of heated stones strewed over with green herbs or leaves, and kept them , covered With athick cloth till the most profuse perspi ration was induced ; soraething like that produced by 38 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the fashionable vapour-bath. In this state, to our great astonishment, at the ra'ost critical seasons of illness, the patient would leave the heap of stones and plunge into the sea, near which the oven was generaUy heated. Though the shock must have been very great, they appeared to sustain no injury from this transition. There were persons among them celebrated as ocu lists, but their skill principally consisted in removing foreign substances from the eye ; and when applied to for this purpose, they, as well as others, received the payment or fee before they commenced their opera tions ; but if the present did not please them, they, to satisfy their employers, sometimes took one splinter, &c. out of the eye, and left another in, that they might be sent for again. Their surgeons were remarkably dexterous in closing a cut or thrust, by drawing the edges carefully together, and applying the pungent juice of the ape, arum costatum, to the surface. This, acting like caustic, must have caused great pain. A fractured limb they set without much trouble — ap plying splinters of bamboo-cane to the sides, and keep ing it bound up till healed. A dislocation they usually succeeded in reducing; but theother parts of their sur gical practice were raarked by a rude promptness, temerity, and barbarism almost incredible. A man one day fell from a tree and dislocated some part ofhis neck. His companions, on perceiving it, instantly took him up: one of them placed his head between his own knees, and held it firmly ; while the others, taking hold of his body, twisted the joint into its proper place. On another occasion, a number of young men in the district of Fa-re were carrying large stones, suspended from each end of a pole across their shoulders, their usual mode of carrying a burden : one of them so injured the vertebrae as to be almost unable to move ; he had, as they expressed it, fati te tua, broken the back. His feUow-workmen laid him flat on his face on the grass ; one grasped and pulled his shoulders, and the other his legs, whUe a third actuaUy pressed with both knees his whole weight upon the back, where the bones appeared displaced. It was not far from Mr. Barff's house where the accident occurred, and observing the people assem bled, he went to inquire the cause, and saw them thus engaged. On his asking what they were doing, they oooUy repUed that they were only straightening the MEDICINE AND SURGERY. 39 man's back, whioh had been broken with carrying stones. The vertebrae appeared to be replaced ; they bound a long girdle repeatedly round his body, led him home, and without any other treatment he was in ¦^ short time able to resume his employment. The .operation of trepanning they soraetimes at tempted, and say they have practised it with success. It is reported that there are persons living in the island of Borabora on whom it has been performed, or at least an operation very much resembling it : the bones of the scull having-been fractured in battle, they have clo'ired away the skin and coverings, and, having removed the fractured piece of bone, have carefully fitted in a piece of cocoanut-shell, and replaced the covering and skin ; on the healing of whicli the man has recovered. I never saw any individual -who had undergone this oper ation, but from the concurrent testimony of the people, I have no doubt they have performed it. It is also related, although 1 confess I can scarcely believe it, that on some occasions, when the brain has been injured as well as the bone, they have opened the scull, taken out the injured portion of the brain, and having a pig ready, have killed it, taken out the pig's brauis, put them into the man's head, and covered them up. They persist in stating that this has been done ; but add, that the persons always became furious with madness, and died. They had no idea of phlebotomy as a remedy for disease, but were clever at lancing an abscess, which was generally effected with the thorn from a kind of bramble, or a shark's tooth. However great the influence of those persons who administered medicine, or practised surgery, might formerly have been, it has entirely ceased since the people have been acquainted with the raore certain and efficacious application of English remedies. Like the priests in their temples formerly, the minister of their religion,, at every station, is now sought in all cases of sickness as their physician ; and no sraall portion of our time was occupied in administering medicine, so far as our scanty means would admit. This is a task necessarily devolving upon the mis sionaries, as the only Europeans residing among thera either possessing medicine or knowing how to use it ; and it is a claim which we never desired to refuse. It is perfectly compatible with the higher duties of our 40 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Station — the cure of their spiritual maladies. We have only to regret that we have not possessed hotter quali fications and raore ample means for its efficient dis charge. So long as our family medicine has lasted, we have been ready to share it with those who were in need, and have often heen thankful (when affiicted ourselves and destitute) to receive the simple remedies they were able to supply. The Missionary Society has readily furnished us with medical books and instruments ; and for our own use a liberal supply of medicines : but it has generally been inadequate to the wants of the people. Medi cine is expensive, and perhaps it would not be consid ered a just appropriation of the society's funds to expend them in providing medicine for those among whom its agents labour ; yet it is one of the most affecting sights a missionary can witness, when visiting his people, to behold them enduring the most painful suffering, pining under the influence of disease, and perhaps sinking into a premature grave, and to know that,- if he had the means within his reach, he could at least relieve them. The occurrences are not unfrequent wherein an anxious mother brings a poor sickly child to his house, with which she is obliged to return unrelieved, not because the disease is reinedUess, but because the mis sionary has not, it may be, a cheap and simple remedy to bestow. The natives would cheerfully purchase so valuable an article as medicine, by bartering in the islands the produce of their labour ; but they have no means of so doing. If they send it to England, the return is distant and uncertain ; and mistakes, embar rassing to thera, are likely to occur. It is to be hoped, hg^ever, that as the raeans of intercoramunication be- coriie more frequent and regular, these difficulties will ^e removed. Several generous individuals have laid lie people of some of the islands under great obliga tions, of which they are duly sensible, by sending them outj gratuitously, a liberal supply of the most useful medicines. It may not be necessary for a missionary in a civil ized nation, where the healing art is cultivated, or going to a country where European colonies are settled, or commercial establishments are formed, to be ac quainted with the practice of physic. It is, however, FORMER CRUELTY TO THE SICK. 41 important, and ought to be borne in mind by those who are looking forward to missionary work, and by those who patronise them, that it would be of the highest advantage for one going to an uncivilized people to be acquainted with the qualities and use of medicine. A degree of proficiency that would qualify him to practise in his native country is not necessary. But so much knowledge as would enable hira to be exceed ingly serviceable to the people, to win their confidence and affection, and to confer on him an influence the most important and advantageous, in accomplishing the great objects of his mission, might be acquired prior to his departure frora England, without in an injurious degree diverting his attention frora other pur suits. 1 speak from painful experience of deficiency in the raeans for meeting the necessities of my own family, as well as those of the people among whom I have resided. I know they still exist, and therefore express rayself more -strongly than 1 should otherwise feel warranted to do. The introduction of Christianity has been followed by a greater alteration in the general circumstances of the people than even the medical treatraent of the sick. The change has been highly advantageous to the sufferers, who formerly experienced the greatest neg lect, and often the most brutal cruelty. As soon as an individual was affected with any disorder, he vvas con sidered as under the ban of the gods : by some crime, or the influence of sorae eneray, he was supposed to have becorae obnoxious to their anger, of which his malady was the result. These ideas, relative to the origin of diseases, had a powerful tendency to stifle every feeling of sympathy and corapassion, and to restrain all frora the exercise of those acts of kindness that are so grateful to the afflicted, and afford such alleviation to their sufferings. The attention of the relatives and friends was directed to the gods, and their greatest efforts were made to appease their anger by offerings, and to remove the continuance of its effects by prayers and incantations. The simple medicine administered was considered more as the vehicle or medium by which the god would act, than as possessing any power itself to arrest the progress of disease. If their prayers, offerings, and remedies were found un- 42 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. availing, the gods were considered iraplacable, and the diseased person was dooraed to perish. Some heinous crime was supposed to have been committed. When ever a chief of any distinction was afflicted, some neg lect or insult was supposed to have been shown to the gods or the priest, and the raost costly offerings were made to avert the effects of their wrath, and secure the recovery of the chieftain. Human victims were soraetiraes sacrificed, cereraonies perforraed, and prayers offered. These were not made to the national idol, but to the tutelar god of the family. They were aU, at tiraes, unavailing ; and when they imagined, in consequence of the rank or ancestry of the chief, that the deity ought to have been propitious, but they found he was not, and the sufferer did not recover, with a singular promptitude, in powerful con trast with fheir ordinary conduct towards their gods, they execrated the idol, and banished him from the teraple, choosing in his place some other deity that they hoped would be favourable. ^ ¦The interest manifested in the recovery of their chief would depend rauch upon his age. If advanced in years, comparatively little concern would be felt for his restoration. Old age was seldora treated with respect, often with contempt and cruelty. n seasons of iUness, especially if protracted, the common people and the aged received but little atten tion. If the malady was not soon relieved by the ' prayers of the priest, and the remedies he adrainistered, the sufferer was abandoned. Soraetiraes he was al lowed to remain in the house of those with whora he was connected. But in general a small temporary hut was erected with a few cocoanut-leaves, either near a stream, or at a short distance from the dweUing. Into this, as to the conderaned cell, the sick person was reraoved. For a time the children or friends would supply a scanty portion of food, but they often grew weary of sending this sraall aUeviation ; and it is be lieved that many have died as much from hunger as from disease. This process was sometimes too slow for those who were connected with the sick, and who desired to share any property they might possess. If they thought there was but little prospect of recovery, they would determine to destroy them a* once. Murder was at BURYING ALIVE. 43 times perpetrated, under these circurastances, with heartless and wanton barbarity. The spear or the club was employed to effect what disease had been too tardy in accompUshing. AU the persons in the house when these deeds of horror were performed were called out ; and the friends or companions of the suf ferer, armed with spears, prepared for their savage work. It was in vain the helpless man cried for mercy ; instead of attending to his cry, they " would amuse themselves in trying which could take best aim" with the spear they threw ; or, rushing upon hira with spear in hand, they would exclaim, Tui i vaho, pierce through — and thus transfix him to the couch on which he was lying. Sometimes they buried the sick alive. When this was designed, they dug a pit, and then, perhaps, pro posed to the invalid to bathe, offering to carry him to the v,rater, either in their arras, Or placed on a board ; but instead of conveying him to the place of bathing, they would carry him to the pit and throw hira in. Here, if any cries were raade, they threw down large stones in order to stifle his voice, filled up the grave with earth, and then returned to their dwellings. The natives once gave rae an account of an unhappy sufferer, whom they were conveying to the grave ; he perceived it at a short distance before they approached, and influenced by fear, sprang from the board, and en deavoured to escape. He was pursued and crippled by a large stone, and thus secured by the murderers. I was acquainted with two persons, who were sawyers, and resided some time in the island of Huahine, who had both been engaged in burying one pf their cora panions, merely because they felt the few attentions required a burden. One of them, whose name was Papehara, is dead ; the other is still living. It is unnecessary to add to these details. Every friend to huraanity will rejoice to know, that since the subversion of that systera under the sanction of which they were practised they have ceased ; and that now, from the influence of Christian principles, although the aged do not receive that veneration which is paid to gray hairs and length of years in sorae countries, they are treated with kindness. The sick are also nursed with attention by their relatives and children ; and so far from deeming it ai 44 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. burden to attend to them, in Eiraeo, Huahine, and I believe in sorae of the other islands, the natives have formed benevolent societies among themselves, for the purpose of building houses, supplying with food and clothing those who, in their old age and helpless state, have no friends or chUdren to take care of them. In these dweUings they are lodged, and clothed, and fed. Persons also visit thera for the purpose of reading the Scriptures, and praying with them; their present neces sities are supplied, the decline of life made easy, and their passage to the grave coraparatively tranquil and happy. It is only necessary to contrast this with the former treatment of individuals under sirailar circum stances, in order to strengthen our conviction of the incalculable diminution of misery which has resulted from their reception of the gospel, and the temporal blessings it has imparted. During the year 1820, the mission in the windward islands sustained a_ heavy bereaveraent in the decease of Messrs. Bicknell and Tessier. The latter, who was a raan of raodest and unobtrusive habits, but patient and unremitting industry in the iraportant work of edu cating the rising generation, died on the 23d of July. His Christian course had not been splendid or attract ive, but it had been undeviating and unsullied. His end was not only peaceful, but triumphant in faith, and glowing in anticipation of the holy and spiritual joys awaiting hira in the abodes of blessedness. Mr. Bicknell, whose health was not firm, followed the remains of his faithful coadjutor to the tomb ; and while standing on the edge of the closing grave, and addressing the sorrowing multitude around, felt indis posed frora the exposure. This was followed by fever, which terrainated his life fourteen days after the death of Mr. Tessier. Though his illness was short, his mind, towards the latter part of it, was tranquil, in reliance on thaf Saviour who alone can support in the prospect of dissolution. 1 have heard that he was the first individual who offered his services to the Missionary Society, and was araong the first who landed frora the Duff in 1796. He reraained in Tahiti tiU the civil war in 1808 drove him and his companions from the islands, at which time he visited New South Wales and England. When Pomare invited the missionaries to return, he was the first to MESSRS. BICKNELL AND TESSIER. 45 resume his station, which he never abandoned, till called by death from a field on which he had bestowed up wards of twenty years of patient persevering toil, and from which, though long barren and fruitless, he had ultimately been honoured to reap the first-fruits of a glorious harvest. In 1818 he reraoved to the populous district of Pa para, on the south-west side of Tahiti. This dislrict had, prior to the last war, been the strong-hold of idol atry, and was the head-quarters of the pagan army; and the inhabitants, until the death of their chieftain in the memorable battle of Bunaauia, obstinately opposed the progress of Christianity. Here, under the favour able auspices of Tati, Mr. BickneU coraraenced his la bours ; and while Mr. Tessier daily instructed numbers in the school, Mr. BickneU collected around him large and attentive congregations, baptized raany, and gath ered an interesting Christian church. His latest earthly concern regarded the steadfastness and welfare of his charge. On the evening of his life, and but a few hours before his departure, he addressed Mr. Crook (who had attended him during his illness, and who was then about to perform divine service among his people) on the subject. " TeU thera," said the dying missionary, " that my conviction of the truth of those doctrines I have taught is now stronger than ever. Tell them I am dying, but that these truths are now my support. Tell them to be steadfast." He left, not only a destitute church and afflicted congregation, but a sor rowing widow and five fatherless chUdren, to raourn his departure. Mrs. Bicknell was afterward united in mar riage with Mr. Davies, but she did not long survive, and the children are now orphans. Mr. Caw, who had been sent out to instruct the natives in ship-building and other arts, but who had been long incapacitated by iUness died about the same tirae. 46 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. CHAPTER 111. General view of a Christian church — Unifonnity of procedure in the differ ent stations — Instructions fi-om England — Preparatory teaching — Distinct nature of a Christian Church— Quali^cations and dutiesof communicants — The sacrament of the Lord's Supper — Formation of the first church of Christ in the. leeward islands — Administration of the ordinance — Substi tute for bread — Order of the service— Character, experience, and peculiar ities ofthe communicants — Buaiti — Manner ofidmilting church members- Regard to the declarations of Scripture — Instances of the power of con. science — Appointment of deacons — Improvement in parental discipline — Great attention to religion. * While the Lord of missions was thus thinning our ranks, he was showing us that the work in which we were engaged was not ours, but his ; that though the agent was removed, the agency under which he had acted was not thereby impeded. The pleasing change we had observed among our people every year increased during the present in an astonishing' raanner, and we had the high satisfaction of witnessing the forraation and organization of the first church of Christ in the leeward or Society Islands. It took place early in the month of May, and shortly after the opening of.the new chapel. Although we did not experience that difficulty which, frora the peculiar circumstances of the raission and the people, had attended the first administration of baptism, we regarded it as a matter requiring grave and prayerful deliberation. We felt that our proceedings would in fluence the views and conduct, not only of those by whom we were surrounded, but perhaps of future gen erations. A foundation was now to be laid, on which, so far as order and discipUne were concerned, the super structure of the Christian church in that island was to rise in every succeeding age, and by which it would cer tainly be affected in raany iraportant respects. Anxious therefore to begin aright, we sought, and trust we re ceived. Divine guidance, endeavouring to regulate our proceedings altogether by the directions of the sacred volume. It was, however, difficult to divest ourselves entirely of those views of the subject which we had irabibed frora the writings of men. INSTRUCTIONS FROM ENGLAND. 47 A Christian church we considered to be a society of faithful and holy men, voluntarily associated for the purposes of public worship, rautuEd edification, the par ticipation of the Lord's Supper, and the propagation of Christianity : the Lord Jesus Christ was regarded as its spiritual Head; and only such as had given theraselves unto the Redeemer, and were spiritually united to hira, members. These were our general views. In England we had belonged to different denominations, and, how ever adapted the peculiarities in discipline of those communions raight appear to the circumstances of British Christians, wc did not deem it expedient to take any one altogether for our model. It appeared to all raore desirable, in the existing state of the people, to divest the churches we might be honoured of God to plant araong the gentiles of every thing coraplicated or artificial, that they might be established in the purest siraplicity of forra, and, as far as possible, according to the directions of, revelation. Had any been pertina cious of their peculiarities, they had now the fairest opportunity of acting accordingly. General good, however, was our object ; and that line of procedure which, as a whole, we could unitedly pur sue, in closest accordance with Scripture, and at the sarae time with greatest advantage to the people, was more desired by every one, than any peouliar views on minor points. I believe it is from the paramount in fiuence of these feelings, more than from any other cause, that such uniformity exists. There was no agreeraent previously entered into araong the mission aries, but those of each station were left, with the people around who might be brought to a reception of the truth, to assume for themselves such forra of con stitution and discipline, as should in their views be most accordant with the Word of God; and yet I am not aware that in any raaterial point there is the smallest difference among them. As the subject had long been one of considerable anxiety, we had written to the directors of the society for their advice. They in general referred us to the New Testaraent. Several persons, however, interested in the progress of truth ainong the islands, wrote to the missionaries individually", and also coraraunicated their views to the public through the medium of the Evangel ical Magazine. Among others, the Rev. Mr. Greathead, 49 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. whose views of church government were rather pecu liar, wrote very fully. His plans were at first adopted by one or two of the missionaries ; yet the free admis sion, not only to baptism, but to the ordinance of the Lord's Supper, of such persons as sincerely desired to receive the same, without requiring evidence of their being true spiritual converts to Christ, threatened great irregularity and confusion; it was therefore discon tinued. In our pubUc instructions, we inculcated on those who, we had reason to believe, were under the decisive influence of the Spirit of Christ, the duty of comraera- orating his dying love by that ordinance which we had instituted, and by which his disciples were to show forth his death tUl he should corae. — Those who had been baptized now desired to be raore particularly informed how, and in what circurastances, they were to observe this injunction of the Lord. We therefore proposed to devote one afternoon every week to the instruction of such as, having been baptized, desired to be united in church-fellowship. Fifteen individuals attended the first meeting, and were afterward joined by others. We met them regularly, and endeavoured to instruct them as fully and familiarly as possible in the duty of par taking of the sacrament ; the nature, design, and scriptu ral constitution of ehurch-feUowship ; the discipUne to be maintained, the advantages to be anticipated, and the duties resulting therefrom. Next to the personal piety which in church-members is considered indispensable, it appeared most important to impress the minds of the people with the distinctness of a Christian church from any political, civil, or other merely human institution. In the system of false reli gion under which they had lived, and by which their habits of judgraent had been formed, the highest civil and sacerdotal offices had been united in one person. — The king was generaUy chief priest of the national tem ple ; and the high-priesthood of the principal idols was usually held by some meraber, or near relative, of the reigning faraily. On raany occasions of worship also, the king was the representative of the god. The chiefs and the gods appear always to have exercised a cora bined influence over the populace. The power ofthe gods often seemed only exercised to establish the au thority of the king, who was by the people regarded as NATURE OF A CHRiSTIAN CHURCH. 49 filling his high station by line&l descent frora them, while the measures of the government as often appeared to be pursued to inspire fear, and secure acknowledg ments for the gods. Hence, when human sacrifices were required, the priest applied to the king, and the king gave orders to provide the victim. Since the kings and chiefs, as well as the people, had embraced the gospel, and raany had takeii the lead in propagating it, and had uniforraly adorned it by their exaraple, the people some times said, that had their chiefs-been idolators or wicked rulers, it would have been improper for them to haVe interfered in matters connected with Christianity ; but that now they were truly pious, it accorded with their ideas of propriety, that in the Christian church they should, as Christian chiefs, be pre-eminent. We told them they had not imbibed these ideas in a Christian, but in a pagan school ; that the authority of their kings and chiefs was exerted over their persons, and regarded their outward conduct; that they held their high station under God, for the well-being of so ciety, and were, when influenced by uprightness and humanity, the greatest blessings to the communities Over which they presided. We also stated, that in this station every Christian was bound, no less by duty to God than to man, to render obedience to their laws, to respect and maintain their authority, and to pay them every due horaage. We also told them, that in the church of Jesus Christ, which was purely a reUgious association, so far as distinctions among raen, from dig nity of station, elevation of office, farae, or wealth, were concerned, all merabers were brethren ; and that Christ hiraself was the only spiritual chief or king ; that hie influence or reign was not teraporal, but, Uke his au thority, spiritual. The only distinction recognised in a Christian church, we informed them, regarded those who acted as officers, and that such distinctions only prevailed in what concerned them as a church, or vol untarily associated religious society, and did not reffer lo their usual intercourse with the community of which they were members, and in which they were governed by the ordinary regulations estabUshed in civUized so ciety. The exercise of any civil power in matters purely religious, we did not think would be advantageous to the latter ; and even if such had been our opinioa^ Vot. m.— G 50 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. we could find in the New Testaraent no example Oi* precept to authorize such procedure. The duties which those who united in church-fellow ship were required to perforra towards each other, towards those desirous of uniting with them, andto the careless or irreligious, were also fully and frequently brought under their notice, together with the paramount duty of every Christian to endeavour to propagate Christianity, that the Christian church raight become a kind of nursery, from which other churches might be planted in the extensive wilderness of paganism around. Next to this, the institution, nature, design, adminis tration, and uses of the Lord's Supper were famiUarly explained, that they raight understand, as far as possible, the engageraent into which they were desirous to enter, and the observances connected therewith. The Lord's Supper, or sacrament, we regarded as analogous to the passover, symbolical of the death of Christ as a propitiation or sacrifice, of which event it was comraemorative ; that it was designed to perpetu ate the remembrance of His death, even to the end of tirae, and was to be in faith participated by all who build their hopes of admission to the heavenly state on His atonement. Having been for some months engaged weekly in im parting this kind of instruction to those who had ex pressed their desire to receive the ordinance of the Lord's Supper, the month of May was selected for forming the church. Sixteen individuals, who in the judgraent of charity we had every reason to believe were sincere Christians, then met us, and after im ploring the blessing of the great Head of the church, offering a suitable address, and receiving their declara tion of faith in Christ, and desire to enjoy the privi leges of Christian fellowship, a voluntary association was formed, the right hand of feUowship was given, and they recognised each other as members of the first church of Christ in Huahine. We did not present any creed or articles of faith for their subscription on this occasion. Sensible of the insufficiency of all mere human writings, however ex ceUent, to restrain the raind, or control the opinions of men, we thought it best to dispense with them, lest the bare assent, or subscription to certain articles of faith, THE LORD'S SbPPERi 51 or doctrines of truth, should be substituted, as grounds of confidence, for an experience of the influeuce of those doctrines on the heart. Their names only were entered in a book kept by the missionaries for that purpose, and caUed the church-book. This little meet ing was held in the chapel at Fa-re, on Friday evening, the 5th of May, 1820 : and it is hoped that what was done on earth among the disciples of Christ below, though it raay be dissolved by death, will be realized in bis presence above, and endure through eternity. On the following Sabbath (May 7th) an unusual nura ber attended the large place of worship. Mr. Davies preached in the forenoon, frora Luke xxii. 19. In front of the pulpit, a neat table, covered with white native. cloth, was fixed, upon which the sacramental vessels were placed. These had been furnished from England. Wheaten bread was an article of diet that we did not very often obtain ourselves, and which the people seldora tasted : we should have preferred it for this ortUnance, yet, as we could not, from the irregularity and uncer tainty of our supplies at that period, expect always to have it, we deeraed it better to eraploy an article of food as nearly reserabUng it as possible, and which was at all times procurable. From these considerations, we felt no hesitation in using, on this occasion, the roasted or baked bread-fruit, pieces of whioh were placed on the proper vessel. Wine we were also thankful to possess for this pur pose ; and although we haVe sometimes been apprehen sive that we might be under the necessity of substituting the juice of the cocoanut for that of the grape, or dis continuing the observance of this ordinance (to which latter painful alternative some of our brethren have been reduced), we have been providentially favoured with a sufficiency. Over the elements placed on the table a beautiful white cloth had been spread, before the accustomed service began. When this was over, although it was intimated that any who wished might retire, no one left the chapel, Mr. Davies, the senior missionary or pastor of the church, took his station be hind the comraunion-table ; Mr. Barff sat at one end, and I took my seat at the other. When the communicants had seated theraselves in a Une in front, we sang a hymm The words of institn- C8 62 t*0LYNESIAN RESEARCHES. tion, viz. passages of Scripture containing the directions for the observance of this hallowed festival, &c., were read, a blessing implored, and the bread, which was then broken, handed to each individual. The wine was next poured into the cup, a blessing again sought, when the wine was handed to the coraraunicants. After this, another hymn was sung, a short prayer offei'ed, and the service closed. I have been thus particular in detaUing the order observed on this occasion, as affording not only a cor rect statement of our proceedings at this time, but also a brief general view of the raanner of administering this sacred ordinance in the different missionary stations throughout the islands. It would be impossible to give any thing Uke an ad,e- quate description of my own emotions, at this truly interesting service. The scene was worth coming from England to witness, and I trust the impression was as salutary as it was powerful and solemn. 1 ara also quite unable to conceive what the feelings of our senior colleague must at this tirae have been. He had been many years among the people before any change in favour of Christianity took place, and had often beheld thera, not only ignorant and wretched, sunk to the lowest state of debasing impurity, and accustomed to the perpetration of the most horrid cruelty, but altogether given to idolatry, and often mad after their idols. Our joys arose, in a great degree, from the delightful anticipations awakened in connexion with the adraission of the anxious raultitude, who were waiting to enter into, and, we hoped, prepared of God to participate in, all the blessings which this ordinance sigmfied, and in reference to the eternity we hoped to spend with them, when we should join the church triumphant above. His joys, however, in addition to those arising from these sources, must have been powerfully augmented by the recoUection of what those individuals once were, and the many hours of apparently cheerless and hope less toil he had bestowed upon them, now so amply, so astonishingly rewarded. A state of feeling, almost unearthly, seemed to per vade those who now, for the first time, united with their teachers in commemorating the dying love of Christ. RecoUection, perhaps, presented in strong DEVOTIONAL FEELINGS. 63 colours the picture of their fbrraer state. Their aborai- nations, their reckless cruelty, their infatuation in idola try, the frequent, impure, and sanguinary rites in which they had engaged— their darkened minds, and stiU darker prospects — arose, perhaps, in vivid and rapid succession. At the same time, in striking contrast with their former feelings, their present desire after moral purity, their occupation in the worship of Jeho vah, their hopes of pardon and acceptance with him, through the atoneraent made by the offering of his Son, the boundless and overwhelming effects of his love herein displayed, and the radiant light and hopes of everlasting blessedness and spiritual enjoyraent, which, by the event coraraeraorated, they were encouraged to anticipate, were all adapted to awaken, in rainds suscep tible as theirs, no comraon train of feelings. Often have we seen the intense eraotion of the heart, at these seasons, strongly depicted in the countenance, and the face suffused with tears. The hundreds who remained to witness the scene were not unconcerned spectators. Their deep interest in what was passing was indicated in their thoughtful and agitated countenances, and the subsequent conduct of many evinced the kind of irapression they received. The anxious concern which we had witnessed among the people since the preceding summer appeared to in crease, and demanded redoubled efforts for their spir itual advantage. Numbers came as candidates for baptisra, and regularly attended the meeting for the in struction of such. Others, from among those who had been baptized, desired to be adraitted to church-feUow- ship. Our liveliest affections were awakened on their be half; but while we had reason to believe many were sincere, we had also reason to fear that others were influenced by less comraendable motives. Anxious to afford encouragement or caution, as the circumstances or character of each required, it was not easy to satisfy our own minds as to the best manner of proceeding. We feared to discourage any who were sincerely seek ing a raore intiraate acquaintance with Christ, and who were desirous to be fully instructed in all things con cerning his wUl. On the other hand, we were equaUy fearful of encouraging the indulgence of iraproper views, or of admitting to the ordinances of the gospel any 64 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. who were uninfluenced by those motives which Clmst would approve. There was, however, no part of our, charge in whose welfare we now felt so deeply interested as the little flock of which the great Shepherd had made us the pastors. So far from considering our work done, with special reference to those whom we had instructed in the nature of a Christian church, and had admitted to this fold, we considered it as only the commencement of a new series of important and interesting duties, ari sing out of the new relation now subsisting between us. We experienced an attachraent binding our hearts to theirs, to which we had before been strangers, and we had reason to believe the feeUng was reciprocal. Their knowledge was but limited, notwithstanding all our efforts to instruct them; and as their duties in creased, their situation becarae more consjJKuous, and their temptations greater. Latent depravity stUl lurked in their hearts, and it niight be expected that their great spiritual adversary would not leave them unmolested. We were also fearful lest the privileges they were raised to enjoy might engender or nourish secret pride, or in duce a disposition to rest-satisfied with having obtained admission to the outward and visible church of Christ, and thus lead thera to neglect that constant seeking after God, and the cultivation of those Christian virtues by which alone they could sustain, with credit to Chris tianity, and benefit to their own minds, the situation to which they had been raised. They would naturally be come models of imitation to others, and would exert no ordinary influence on the community at large. It was therefore gratifying to behold them humble, prayerful, watchfhl, and diligent. The weekly meeting with the candidates for communion, whose number was greatly increased, we constantly attended, and recommended the church members not to absent themselves umieces- sarily. At these tiraes we endeavoured to explain the truths in which they were most interested, and, with regard to the raembers theraselves, leaving the first principles of the doctrines of Christ, we endeavoured graduaUy and gently to lead them on to a more extensive acquaintance with the grand and varied doctrines of the gospel, and the important relative and other duties resulting therefrom. These meetings were exceedingly interesting, from ADMISSION OF MEMBERS. 55 the simple yet unequivocal evidences often afforded of the operation of the Spirit of the Alraighty upon the hearts of the people. Our little church, frora tirae to time, received considerable accessions of such as we had reason to hope were also members of the church of the first-born, whose names are written in heaven. In the adraission of merabers, we- acted with what perhaps many would consider the extreme of caution. Individuals whose raoral character has been irreproach able, whose views of divine truth have been clear and scriptural, and whose motives, so far as we could judge, have been pure, have remained two, and sometiraes three years as candidates, although we could not prefer any allegation directly against them. The adraission of such has been declined, because we feared, that though their knowledge was coraraendable, and their conduct influenced by the precepts of the gospel, their hearts were not under its decisive infiuence ; in short, that they had not undergone that change Of mind which our Lord himself, in his conversation with Nicodemus, called being " born again," and without which he had declared no man can enter into the kingdom of heaven. In other instances, however, the testiraony relative to this change was so decisive and powerful, that we could not, dared not hesitate. The reason the natives have given of their Christian hope has often been not only satisfactory as it regarded the individual, but iraportant, and in a high degree inter esting, as an evidence of the universality of the depra vity of raan ; and also as showing the effects of Divine truth, under the influence of the Spirit of God, to be the same in every clime, producing corresponding effects upon men of every diversity in colour, language, and circumstance. Hence, one of the strongest modern evidences in fhe history of man, ofthe unequivocal ori gin of Christianity, has been afforded, and its perfect adaptation to the condition of the whole human race. The same latent enmity to the moral restraints Chris tianity imposes on the vicious propensities of men, the same unwillingness to admit its uncomproraising claims to the surrender of the heart, was experienced here, as in other parts. The same tendency to suppose the favour of God might be obtained by services which they could perform, and the sarae unbelief under convictions of sin, and unwilUngness to go to the Saviour without 56 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. a recommendation — ^that is so often met with in others — was felt by them. But while, in these respects, the experience of the converts in the South Sea islands resembled that of Christians in other parts of the world, there were points in which it has often appeared to us peculiar. We never raet with one who doubted the natural depravity, or innate tendency to evil, in the human heart. We never met with any who were inclined to suppose they could, without sorae procuring cause, be justified in the sight of God. This raay perhaps arise frora the circura stance of there being no individual araong them whose past life had not been polluted by deeds which even natural conscience told thera were wrong, and, conse quently, no arguments were necessary to convince any one that he was guilty before God, They raust have denied the existence of the Deity, and of all by which the living God is distinguished from their own senseless idols, before they could for a moment suppose their past lives appeared otherwise than criminal before Him, Their fearful state, and the consequences of guUt, they never disputed, but were always ready to acknowledge that they must not only appear criminal, but offensive to the Most High, on account of their vices. There were, however, in connexion with these truths, matters associated with the impression upon their minds that sometimes a little surprised us. Under declarations of the nature and dreadful conse quences of sin, aggravated as theirs had been, the de nunciation of the penalties of the law of God, and even under the awakenings of their own consciences to a con viction of sin, we seldora perceived that deep and acute distress of mind which in circumstances of a similar kind we should have expected. In connexion with this, when such individuals were enabled to exercise faith in the atonement of Christ, and to indulge a hope of ex emption frora all the fearful effects of sin and guilt, this apprehension has not in raany instances been attended by that sudden relief and that ecstatic joy which are often raanifested in other parts of the world by indi viduals in corresponding circurastances, "Y^et in many instances we have not doubted the sincerity of their declarations, or the genuineness of their faith in the Redeeraer. We have often tried to accouut for this apparent RELIGIOUS EXPERIENCE. 57 anomaly in their Christian character, but have not been altogether satisfied with the causes to which we have soraetimes assigned it. It does not appear, generally, that their emotions are so acute as ours, or that they are equally susceptible of joy and sorrow with persons trained in civilized society. Besides this, though their ideas of the nature and consequences of sin, the bless edness of forgiveness, and. the hope of future happiness were correct so far as they went, yet the varied repre sentations of the punishraent and sufferings of the wicked, and the corresponding views of heaven, as the state of the greatest blessedness, being to them partial and new, the irapressions were probably vague and in distinct ; while with us, from long familiarity, they are at once vivid and powerful. Without pausing to inquire into its cause, it seemed right to mention the fact: better reasons may perhaps be assigned. We have often also remarked that there are but few of what would be called sudden conversions. In gen eral, the process by which their views and feelings have been changed has been gradual, and almost impercepti ble, as to its precise manner of operation, though ulti mately most decisive in its nature, and unquestionable in its tendency. Though these gradual transformations are the general means by which, through the Holy Spirit, we hope many have been made partakers of the grace of eternal life, there have been exceptions. Some have been melted under the truth, others have been led to rejoice in the promises of the gospel, and raised to gladness and praise. These facts are adapted to show that the Spirit of God is not limited inthe mannerof his operations on the huraan mind to any one particular kind of order and rule. The accounts of their views of Divine truth, and their reasons for desiring to join with us, have often been de Ughtful and satisfactory, not only in the Society, but also in the northern isles of the Pacific. One from a native of the latter, although it has appeared in the Araerican Missionary Herald, has not been given to the British public ; ahd its character is so unequivocal that I cannot deny rayself the pleasure of inserting it. Buaiti, the individual to whora it refers, is between thirty and forty years of age. I believe I had the hon our of preaching the gospel in his native islands the first time he ever heard it. It, however, produced no C3 98 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. salutary effect then : nor, indeed, untU some time after. Since 1 left the islands, the preaching and instructions of Mr. Richards have been singularly useful to this indi vidual, as well as to others ; he has given every evi dence of their having, under the blessing of God, pro duced an entire and highly beneficial change in his sentiments, feeUngs, and conduct. The late queen of the Sandwich Islands, with her usual benevolence, had always treated him with kind ness ; and the recoUection of it is still retained. Buaiti was his native, name, but, when he was baptized, he wished to be called' Bartimeus ; and, in order to pre serve the sense ofhis loss in the death of the queen, he requested ihat Lalana, London, the place of her death, might be added to: his name. ' "When he. was admitted a meraber of the Christian church at Lahaina, he was asked by the raissionary, Why do you request to be received int(» the church % He replied — Because I love Jesus Christ, I love you, and I desire to dwell with, you in the fold of Christ, and to join with you in eating the holy bread, and "drinking the holy wine. What ia the holy bread 1 It is the body of Christ, which he gave to save sinners. Do we then eat the body of Christ ? No ; but we eat the bread which raeans his body : and, as we eat bread that our bodies raay not die, so our souls love Jesus Christ, and receive hira for their Saviour,, that they may not die. What is the holy wine ¦? r It is th.e blood of Christ, which he poured out on Calr vary, in Jerusalera in Judea, to save us sinners. Do we then drink the blood of Christ ? No ; but the wine signifies his blood, just as the holy bread signifies his body : and all those who go to Christ, and lean on him, will have their sins washed away by his blood, and their souls saved for ever in heaven. Why do you think it more suitable that you should . join the church than others 1 Perhaps it is not (hesitating). If it is not prope'r, you must tell me. But I do ^eatly desire to dwell with you in the, fold of Christ. Who do you think are the proper persons to be re ceived into the church ? Those who have repented of their sins, and have ohr tained new hearts. NATIVE TESTIMONY. 59 What is a new heart 1 It is one which loves God, and loves the Word of God, and does not love sin, or sinful ways. Do you think you have obtained a new heart \ At one time I think I have, and then again I think I have not. 1 do not know, — I hope I have a new heart. What makes you hope you have a new heart 1 This is the reason why 1 hope T have a new heart. The heart I have now is not Uke the heart I formerly had. The one I have now is very bad, it is unbelieving, and inclined to evil. But it is not Uke the one I for merly had. Yes ; I think I have a new heart. The satisfaction arising frora this simple yet decisive testiraony is increased from a knowledge of the fact stated by Mr. Richards; namely, that these questions and answers were not cominitted to memory, and merely recited on the occasion, but that they were the undis guised motives and feelings by which he was influenced. He had no knowledge of the questions that would be proposed until the time when they would be publicly asked, and consequently could not have previously framed the replies he gave. The above may be taken as a saraple of the kind of declarations raade by those who are united in church-fellowship; and though it relates to a native of the North Pacific isles, it resem bles in its principal characteristics many given by the natives of the southern group. Siraplicity is the dis tinguishing feature in all their religious intercourse of this kind. The raeeting of such as were desirous of uniting with us continued ; and frora among those who attended many were added to the church. Besides this meeting, we held one with the communicants only on the Friday evening preceding the Sabbath when the ordinance was administered, which was the first Sabbath in every month. At these times new members were proposed by the missionary, or by any meraber, to the whole body. Inquiry was made of those present as to their eligibility, and if any had objections to an individual, he was requested to state them there ; if not, one or two of the merabers were directed to call upon the parties at their habitations, to converse with thera, and report the same at the next raeeting, for the satisfaction of the church. It was regarded by us a duty to see these persons more than once during the intervening month. so , POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. At the next raeeting, these individuals were proposed by name, the recommendation of the persons who had visited them and of the raissionary given, and if the merabers present knew any reasons why they should not be united with them, they were requested to state the sarae ; if not, to signify assent by lifting up the right hand. When the members proposed had been thus in dividually approved, as they were usuaUy in attendance, they were brought to the chapel, and interrogated,sin- gly as to their reasons for desiring to unite with us. To these questions brief replies were usually rendered; and they were inforraed that the members of the church, considering them proper persons, were happy to receive thera^i The right hand of fellowship was then given by the raissionaries, and subsequently by the raembers, to those thus received ; and the meeting closed with devo tional exercises. We did not ^require any written confession of faith, nor invariably a verbal account of experience, frora the persons adraitted. In this latter respect our procedure was not uniform, but regulated by the peculiar circura stances of the individual. There is ' another pleasing trait in their Christian character, naraely, their undoubting reception of the Scriptures as a Divine revelation. We have plainly and uniforraly stated its truths, inculcating among them no opinions or sentiments, on matters of religion, but such as are found in the Bible ; declaring that what it taught was essential, and that aU the opinions of raen, however excellent, are in comparison unimportant. To the Bible we have always appealed, as the authority for what we have taught, stating that its declarations al lowed of no evasion. The injunctions of Scripture they have therefore been accustomed to receive implicitly as they are recorded; and while they exercise their own judgraents very freely in matters of human opinion, I never knew one, who professed himself a Christian, incUned to doubt the authority of the Bible. To this standard we have always referred their sentiraents and their conduct; and by the criterion it furnishes we always recoraraended their examining their own condi tion, rather than comparing themselves with others. Often, when we have recoraraended sorae measure of a religious or general nature, which we have supposed would be advantageous to them, they have inquired, FAITH IN THE SCRIPTURES. 61 " 'What says the Scripture % Is there any thing about it in the Word of God V If, as was sometiraes the case, we vvere under the necessity of stating that there was nothing in the Scripture directly referring to our re commendation, but that it was according tb the general tenor and spirit of the Scriptures, or corresponding with the practice of Christians in England, or that we thought it would prove beneficial, — they would sometimes an swer, " That may be very good, but, as it is only a matter of opinion with you, we will think about it." On the other hand, so far as those who were members of our churches, or had been baptized, were concerned, I cannot recollect any measure we ever proposed for which we could refer to the explicit declaration of Scripture as our authority that they did not at once un hesitatingly adopt. It was much more satisfactory to us that the conduct of their lives should be regulated by principles derived frora the Scripture than by the opinion of their teachers, however highly they might respect them ; and we had always rather that they should ask, " What says the Word of God V than " What say the missionaries?" The opinions of their teachers raay change, or teachers of different opinions raay succeed thera ; but the Word of God will endure unalterably the " sarae, being a raore sure word, whereunto they do well to take heed. What the experience of my predecessors in the field may have been, with regard to the manner in which the natives were disposed to admit the claims of the Scriptures to a divine origin, I am not prepared to state with confidence. I believe, however, it was not so much to the divine authority, as to the doctrines of th? sacred volurae, that they objected. So far as ray recol lection serves with regard to the island of Huahine, the inhabitants, though not idolaters, certainly were not Christians except in narae ; and in the Sandwich Islands, where, on my first arrival, the people were more op posed than inclined to all that is essential to Christian ity, I do not reraeraber to have met with an individual disposed to doubt the origin or dispute the authprity of revelation. It was to the injunctions and doctrineS of the Bible, that humbled their pride, and prohibited their vicious practices, &c., that they objectetl. It may be said, that while they believed in idolatry ^^ajvd revelations from the gods by drearas, or othsf 62 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. iatimations through the medium of the priests, were acknowledged — they raight suppose the truths of the Bible to be, a collection of revelations .similar in kind to these, only, as a priest on one occasion stated to me, better preserved, being "made fast upon the paper." But after they had renounced idolatry, and treated with conterapt the notions forraerly entertained respecting the power of the gods, and regarded all the pretended revelations of them as deceptions of the priests, the claims of the Bible reraained undisputed. The uniforra, acceptance of the declarations of Scrip ture as Divine coramunications to mankind was not the result of any arguments employed by us. We never attempted to establish by argument what they were not inclined to doubt. Our instructions were, therefore, generally delivered in the simplicity of assertion or testimony, accorapanied with suitable admonition and application to our hearers ; taking it as an adraitted principle that the Scriptures contained a declaration of the wiU of God. When asked, as we sometiraes were, " How do you know the Bible is the word of GodV we did not adduce an infallible church, by which it, had been determined what were the canonical books, and by whom they had been preserved ; nor did we refer them often to the testimony of history, to prove that the persons whose naraes were affixed to the different parts actuaUy wrote the hooks ascribed to thera ; but we referred thera to their intemal evidence, their .harmony -or accordance with the works of creation, and the dispensations of Providence, in their display of the divine character and perfections, their admirable adaptation to the end for which they were given, and the universality of their ap plication to mankind. Next to the agency of that blessed Spirit under whose influence those .Scriptures were first penned, and by which alone they become the means of spiritual illumination to any individual, the internal evidences of the Bible have operated upon the Iminds of the natives with the greatest force. When they have been asked why they believed the Scriptures to be the word of God, they have answered, " We be lieye they have a higher than human origin, because they reveal what man could never know^ not only in reference to God himself, but to, our own origin and destinies, and what, when revealed, appears to us true ;, POWER OF CONSCIENCE. 63 because its declarations accord with the testiraony of our own consciences as to the moral character of our actions ; and because, though written by persons who never saw us, or knew our thoughts, it describes so ac curately our inclinations, iraaginations, raotives, and passions. It must have been dictated by One who knew what man was better than we know each other, or it could not have displayed our actual state so correctly." These, or declarations to the same effect, if not given in precisely the same words, were the reasons they frequently assigned for believing the divine origin of the Scriptures. Several remarkable instances of the effect of the Word of God, and the power of conscience, occurred about the year 1819. One Sabbath morning, Mr. Nott had been preaching frora the words — " Let hira that stole steal no more." In his discourse, he had refuted the idea they had formerly held, that theft was no crime, but rather an act of merit, if committed- with dexterity; and had shown that the circurastance of detection or escape did not alter the moral quality of the act in the sight of God ; that every means eraployed unjustly to deprive another of his property was an act of theft, ami that restitution ought to be made for past robberies, as well as honesty practised for the future- The next morning, when he arose and opened- his door» he saw a number of natives sitting on the ground in the front of his dweUing. Their appearance was rather singular, and the unseasonable time of their assembling led him to inquire the cause, .. They answered, " We have not been able to sleep aU night ; we were in the chapel yes terday ; we thought, when we were pagans, that it was right to steal when we could do it without being found out. Hiro, the god of thieves, used to assist us. But we heard what you said yesterday from the Word of God, that Jehovah had commanded that we should not steal. We have stolen, and all these things that we have brought with us are stolen goods," One then lifted up an axe, a hatchet, or a chisel, and exclaimed, " I stole this frpm the carpenter of such a ship," naraing the vessel, &c. Others held up a uraeti, or a saw, or a knife ; and, indeed, almost every kind of moveable property was brought and exhibited, with confessions of its having been stolen. Mr, Nott said, rather smi-. Ungly, " What have you brought them to me for? I d% 64 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. not want them," (The sentiraent had often been cir culated, that the receiver of stolen goods was as bad as the thief). " You had better take them home, and, if you have stolen any frora your own countryraen, return thera ; and when the ships come again, frOm which any of the goods have been stolen, take thera back, together with a present to the captain or the carpenter, expressive of your desire to make restitution." They aU said, " Oh no, we cannot take them back ; we have had no peace ever since we heard it was displeasing to God, and vve shaU have no peace so Jong as they reraain in our dwellings ; we wish you to take thera, and give them back to the owjjers whenever they corae." Such was the power of conscience, that although they were even tools which the natives value raore highly than gold, and' although Mr, Nott requested thera to take them back, he could not persuade one of thera to do so ; they left them all with hira, to be returned to their owners. They went even further than this: sorae had stolen articles frpm one of the raissionaries at Eimeo. They fltted up a canoe, and with the first fair wind undertook a voyage upwards of seventy railes, for the purpose of carrying back what they had taken. In the island of Raiatea, a native, walking on one oc casion towards the raountain, discovered a hen's nest, with a nuraber of eggs in it, at the root of a tree. He eagerly seized the prize, put the eggs in the native cloth he wore, and proceeded with them to his house. On the way, he recollected the commandment— " Thou shalt not steal," and though he had found the nest far from any habitation, in the midst of the woods, and did not know that he had robbed any one except the hen, yet he knew the eggs were not his ; and so powerful was the impression of the impropriety of the action, that he returned tp the nest, and very carefuUy replaced the eggs. A similar course was pursued by a native with whom I was once travelling across the island, -with regard to a pocket-knife that he had picked up, but afterward threw down, near the sarae place, simply because it did not belong to him. These facts are most pleasing and decisive illustra tions of the ppwer pf Christian principles. Yet every individual is not influenced by thera, "These were Chris tian raen ; there are others who are such only in narae, and who are addicted to the practice of pilfering and ELECTION OF DEACONS. 65 theft, especially at those stations near the harbours which are the most frequent resorts of shipping, where the temptations are greatest, andthe influence of foreign intercourse most injurious. Nevertheless, when we consider that they were forraerly, as every navigator by whom they were visited has testified, almost a nation of thieves — that Hiro, the god of thieves and plunder ers, occupied a place in their mythology, and had a temple and priests — we cannot but admire the operation of Christian principles in producing, in such a nuraber of instances, a conscientious regard to justice and hon esty. It was, there is reason to believe with many, the result, not of an apprehension of detection, but of a strict regard to moral rectitude, and the declared will of Him who said, " Thou shalt not steal," Towards the close of the year 1820, Mr, Davies left Fa-re, to supply the station at Papara, in Tahiti, which had been destitute of a missionary since the decease of Messrs, Tessier and Bicknell, The raanageraent of the 'press, supplying the books for the whole of the leeward islands, the superintendence of the schools, promoting the civilization of the people, attending the religious meetings, together with our pastoral duties, now pressed so heavily upon us that we found some assistance re quisite. This we necessarily sought among the con verts, and were happy to find four persons, members of the church, suitable to act as assistants, whora we pro posed to the church to elect as deacons. Diaconi is the terra by which they are designated ; not, however, selected from any strong predilection to the terra, or any extraordinary importance attached to it, but because a scriptural term, and one more easily assimilated to the idiom of their language than some others. On the 15th of February, 1821, they were set apart in the church to this offl(;e, by an address from 1 Tim. iii. 10, and prayer for the blessing of God upon them. Auna, Taua, Pohuetea, and Matatore were the persona selected, and so long as I continued in the islands, we found them consistent Christians, and valuable coadju tors in managing the temporal concerns of the church, visiting the sick, attending the prayer-meetings, &c. ReUgion was now almost the sole business of the people at Fa-re and the adjacent districts,; and although the meetings were frequent, many continued to visit our dweUings, sometimes by daybreak; and often, after ws 66 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. had retired to rest at night, one or two would come knocking gently at our doors or windows, begging us to give thera directions, or to answer their inquiries as to the thoughts that distressed their minds. No time, no place appeared to them unappropriate ; and whether they sat in the house or walked by the way — skimmed the surface of the water in their light canoe, or laboured in the garden — religion was the topic of their conversa tion. Their motives were various, and probably often of a very mixed character. Some were influenced by a desire to be thought weU of by their neighbours ; many wished to be baptized without feeling the necessity of, or more earnestly seeking, that spiritual purification which it signified ; and others, perhaps, considering church-raembership as the highest Christian distinction they could gain, desired to be admitted to the commu nion, as an end of their profession, rather than a means of higher spiritual -attainraents. Such individuals, we deemed it, on all occasions, ne cessary to caution with the greatest distinctness and fidelity. But while these were the motives by which we have reason to believe many were influenced, there were others who certainly acted frora different feelings, who were unable to rest under a sense of guilt and its fearful consequences ; who desired to hear raore about God, his raercy to sinners, and the love of their Saviour, that their burden of sin rnight be reraoved ; whUe some, desirous of expressing their sense of the goodness of God, were anxious to be informed what they might do to promote his praise. I cannot look back upon this period of my missionary life with indifference ; nor can I contemplate the state of the people at this time with out believing that the Spirit of God was powerfuUy op erating upon the minds of many. Of this their subse quent lives have afforded satisfactory evidence. Insta bility is one of the prominent traits of Tahitian charac ter ; and did we not believe in a higher agency than their own purposes or principles, we should fear that many would abandon the profession they have made, and return to their former course of life. Although the advantages resulting from frequent meetings fpr reUgious conversation were too obvious to allow us to withhold every encouragement ; and though, under the present circumstances and feelings of tho people, they were peculiarly so ; yet, as many of the LAXITY OF PARENTAL AUTHORITY. 67 communicants, and several who were desirous of uniting with them, were females, there were many things in reference to which they needed advice, but which they did not deem suitable to introduce at a public meeting. Mrs. Barff and Mrs. Ellis, therefore, being able to con verse familiarly in the native language, proposed to raeet the feraale members of the church, and those of their own sex who were desirous of joining them, once a week, for general conversation, and mutual spiritual im proveraent. This was an interesting raeeting; itwas held alternately at our respective habitations, Mrs. Barff ahd Mrs. ElUs both attending. It coraraenced with singing a hyran ; a prayer was offered, and a portion of Scrip ture read. After this, the most unreserved conversa tion foUowed, on reUgious subjects, the training of their children, and other relative duties connected with the new order of things which Christianity had introduced. Parental discipline among the people, prior to their reception of Christianity, had been remarkably lax. The children were their own masters as soon as they could act for themselves, and the restraint which the mother could impose was trifling indeed. Such,'indeed, was the abundance of provision, that the raaintenance of a child was a raatter of no anxiety to any one. Hence, if a boy felt offended with his parents, he left them without ceremony, attached hiraself to another faraily in an adjacent or remote district, and remained for months without visiting his father's house. To re strain these fugitive habits, and train their children to regular industry, was one of the duties inCulcated on Christian parents ; yet the children could but iU brook any restraint.. I have seen a child, not more than six years old, strike or throw stones at his mother, and the father would oftentiraes be scarc^y raore regarded. And notwithstanding all the instructions they have re ceived, that iraportant duty, the proper raanageraent of children, is still very imperfectly understood and practised. The raothers appeared anxious to influence the minds of their children, and gain their respect by kindness. The father soraetimes had recourse to harsher mea sures. Hoibu had two sons, that were a source of great trouble to him. One of our nuraber went one day into his house, which was a native dwelling, with no other ceUing than the inside of the roof, the ridge-pole ex- 68 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. tending along the centre, about twenty feet from the floor. After talking sorae tirae with the man, the visiter heard soraething rustling in a long basket ofcocoa nut- leaves at the top of the house, and, looking up, saw the legs and arms of a boy protruding from the basket. On inquiring the cause of this, Hoibu said, the boy had been disobedient, and, in order to convince hira of his error, he had first talked to hira, and then put hira into the basket, and, passing a rope over the ridge-pole, had fast ened one end of it to the basket, and, pulling the other, had drawn hira up there, that he might think on his dis- obedience, and not be guilty of the same again. He was informed that it was rather a novel mode of pun ishment, and that it was hoped he would not keep' him there long. He said no, he should lower hira before the evening. A similar mode of punishment raay, I believe, have been used in some of our public schools, in which a kind of large bird-cage has been substituted for a bas ket; but of this Hoibu had never heard. The invention was his own, and it was scarcely possible to repress a smile at the ludicrous appearance of the suspended boy. Although the training of their children, and other dOr mestic duties, which the females were now called to discharge, were important matters of inquiry, there were others, more deeply interesting, frequently brought forward at their meetings. Some of these questions regarded the children who were born since the gospel had been introduced, and who they were most anxious should share all its blessings ; others frequently referred to such as they had murdered under the influence of idolatry. Sometimes a mother would, in enumerating the crimes of which she had been guilty, recount the number of her children she had destroyed, and with anguish relate hei; struggles of affection, or pangs of remorse, and the distress she now felt ; observing, that their images were ever present to her thoughts, and, as it were, constantly haunting her paths, so that she was afraid even to retire to the secret places of the bushes for private prayer, lest their ghosts should rise before her. Often such indiviouals would say, they feared there was no , hope of mercy for them, that they had repeatedly comraitted the preraeditated raurder of the innocent, and would perhaps repeat the Scripture decla ration, that no murderer hath eternal Ufe abiding in hira COMPUNCTIOUS RETRPSPECT. 69 and ask, " Ought I gp to Jesus Christ for pardon ? were any murderers of their own children ever forgiven ?" While some would ask such questions as these, or state thera as the exercises of their own rainds, there were others who would speak of the cruelties of which they had been guilty, with a want of feeling that has appeared to border on insensibSity to their enormity. Many, however, especially those who were most sen sible of the raercy of God through Christ, would on these occasions expatiate on the amazing forbearance of Jehovah, in sparing such merciless creatures as they had been. They would also express their astonish ment at the love of Christ in dying for thera ; and the abundance of his compassion, in continuing to send thera the intelligence of his salvation, and, after they had long disregarded it, not only forbearing, but making thera wilUiig in the day of his power; raelting their hearts, drawing them with cords of affection, and now causing them to rejoice in his love shed abroad in their hearts. Occasionally they would, in most affecting strains, allude to the anguish which the sight of their neigh bours' children produced, by recaUing to remembrance those whora they had destroyed. The contrast they often drew between their own childless and desolate condition through their former cruel practice of infant murder, and that of those happy parents who, under the reign of the Messiah, were surrounded by their children, was touching and painful. These were topics that could not be discussed without emotion, either by those who brought thera forward, or by those frora whom direction and advice were sought. There was another matter connected vvith this, of scarcely inferior interest, and that was the state of those infants after death. Are their spirits, they would say, in outer darkness, where there is weeping and gnashing of teeth — or are they happy? In reply to this, they were informed, that though they had not sinned, they had suffered death as the effect of Adara's transgression, yet that there was reason to hope and believe they were interested in the covenant of redemp tion, the condition of which the Lord Jesus had fulfiUed, and that therefore they were happy. I It is impossible to conceive the satisfaction of rnind which this opinion has inspired, in those who had been 70 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. guilty of the destruction of their offspring, though they were still sensible that the final condition of the mur dered infants did not dirainish the crirainality of the unnatural deedv In reference to this point, they would often ask whe ther they should in heaven know those they had been acquainted with on earth, and especiaUy if there they should recognise the children they had destroyed. In reply, they were inforraed, that from all that was said on the heavenly state in the Scriptures, there was rea son to believe that friends on earth would know each other there, and that it was probable Christian mothers would meet their children. These were not mere speculative inquiries, the par ties had a deep personal interest in thera ; and Mrs. Ellis has been greatly affected in witnessing the erao tions with which these discussions have been carried on. I can readily suppose it altogether irapossible to conceive of the rapturous expectation with which a Christian raother, childless and desolate from her own cruelties, would by faith anticipate meeting in a world of spirits the chUdren she'had murdered in her days of ignorance on earth, and joining vvith them to cele brate the praises of Him who had snatched them from the region of sin ere they had felt its bitter contamina tion, and by whom she had been brought to share redemption frora its curse. This opinion was not given siraply to afford allevia tion to the distressed feelings of such unhappy parents, but because it did not seem opposed to, but rather favour ed, by the Word of God, agreeable to the benevolent character of the Deity, and adapted to enlarge our views of His corapassion, without affecting his other attri butes. 'We could, therefore, adopt the language and sentiments of the poet, in the belief that — " The harp of heaven HaJ lack'd its least, but not its meanest string, Had children not been taught to play upon it. And sing, from feelings all their own, what men Nor angels can conceive of creiatures, bom Under the curse, yet from the curse redeem'd, And placed at once beyond the power to fall, Safely, which men nor angels ever knew. Till ranks of these, and all of those, had fallen." FEMALE CONVERSATIONAL MEETINGS. 71 The raeeting of the feraales was closed with prayer by one of the natives, who, if a mother, would give the child she had perhaps been nursing in her lap to some one sitting by. Their prayers were market! by deep spirituality and strong feeUng ; and I believe these meetings were among the seasons of most intense and painful, or joyous and hallowed emotion, ever expe rienced. The individual engaging in the devotional exercise has soraetiraes, frora the strength of feeling, been unable to proceed, and tears alone have afforded reUef. Early in the year 1821, in order to cultivate the most affectionate and profitable intercourse with our people, we proposed, in addition to visits in times of sickness, to pay to each family a pastoral visit, for part of an evening, once a month, or at least once in the course of two months. Mr, Barff and rayself, dividing the families between us, were enabled to accoraplish this, We were received with kindness by the parties, and it was our study to make these visits advantageous. The time was not spent in the useless recital of the passing reports of the day ; we addressed ourselves to each individual, when circurastances adraitted, directing and encouraging them in their adherence to the Saviour, or inviting them to Him, and concluded our visit by uniting in prayer for the blessing of God upon their household, &c. We trust these doraiciliary visits were beneficial ; they were often cheering to our own minds. Some of the many happy hours I have been privi leged to spend in raissionary occupations have been those passed in the native families on such occasions. Here we sometimes saw the household virtues, the en dearments of social and domestic comfort, cherished — shedding their benign, elevating; and purifying influence upon a family, the principal merabers, and sometimes the greater part, of which were enjoying that blessing which maketh rich, and addeth no sorrow, and were preparing to join the family of the redeeraed in the abodes of blessedness. Associated with these delightful duties, there were others equ,aUy needful, but less pleasing. Which vve were called to discharge, in connexion with the infant church we had been honoured to gather. These were acts of discipline, in the disraissal of those who, by their conduct, had disgraced the Christian profession. On 72 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. these occasions, we presented to their consideration the direction of the Scriptures, and the duty of the church resulting therefrom; and when it was neces sary to dismiss an individual from feUowship, it was always done with solemn prayer and raost affecting regret. We were not Called to this painful duty soon or oftem One or two instances occurred before I removed to the Sandwich Islands. They were, however, exceedingly distressing, especially the first, which preyed so con stantly upon the mind of the individual, that, though fuUy convinced of his fault, and the propriety of the proceeding, he never recovered the shock he received. It was exceedingly painful to those who could no longer, without dishonouring the Christian name, allow him to be identified with them, to separate him. He soon offered every evidence of deep ^nd sincere penitence, and was affectionately invited to return to the bosom of the church: but although he came again among them, a cloud ever after hung over him ; and a diseases aggravated by mental anxiety, attacked his frame, and soon brought him to the, grave. Christian churches were forraed upon the sarae or similar principles in the windward or Georgian islands, some months before this was established in Huahine. From the peculiar local circumstances of the people, the churches in Tahiti have been exposed to greater trials than that in Huahine has yet experienced, espe cially those forraed in stations adjacent to the anchor age of shipping; In the vicinity of these, thebaneful influence of foreign searaen is raost destructive of moral improveraent and Christian propriety ; and it is probable that there is more immorality among the inhabitants, and more disorder in the churches, at the stations which are the resort of shipping, than in all others throughout the islands. StiU the churches there have not been, and are not, without some indication of the Divine care and blessing. Subsequently churches were forraed in Raiatea, Tahaa, and Borabora, which have in general prospered. As their constitution and proceedings resemble those of Huahine, it is unnecessary to detail their origin or progress. I have selected that in Huahine, not because it is superior to others for its order, or faith, or the piety of its members, but because it was that of which FANATICAL VISIONARIES. 73 1 was, with my esteemed colleague, a pastor, till the providence of God called me to another field of mis sionary labour — and because it was planted in the sta tion at which I spent the greater part of the time I resided in the South Sea islands. I have also been rainute, perhaps too much so, in detaiUng its nature, order, and discipline. This has not arisen frora a desire to give it undue prorainency, but because it forms an important epoch in the history of the people, and is a matter of considerable interest with many who are concerned in the extension of the Christian faith throughout the world ; I also conceived the patrons of the South Sea mission entitled to the most ample inforraation on the subject. It has not been my object lo exhibit the plan and order of this, or the other churches in those islands, as models of perfection, nor to claira for thera any degree of excellence which others, formed and regulated differ ently in some minor respects, raight not possess ; but simply to narrate our own views, and consequent pro ceedings, in reference to measures which will be re garded with indifference by few, whatever may be their pecuUar opinions as to the plan we have pursued. From aU I would ask fervent prayer, that whatever has been contrary to the will of God may be amended, and that what has been agreeable thereto raay continue to receive his blessing. The church of Christ in Hua hine, as well as those in other islands, has had its trials. Sorae of its merabers, as might be expected, have de parted from the faith ^ and the purity of the gospel. And araong the professors of religion in this and the other islands, sorae, designating theraselves prophets, have declared that they have received special revela tion frora heaven. They have pretended that they were inspired by the spirit of John the Baptist, the woman of Samaria, or the apostle Paul, not to super sede the gospel, but to add. something to it. The de clarations of their visions and drearas have been the most absurd imaginable. Several of these visionaries, of both sexes, were persons of doubtful morals, and some have become profligate. The raissionaries are of opinion, that a desire to exempt theraselves frora the moral restraints of the gospel, has been the secret but principal motive by which they have been influenced. This appears confirraed by their declaring that when Vol, III.— D 74 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the raind was under the influence of the spirit by which they pretended to be inspired, they could not corarait sin, as whatever they did during those seasons was the act ofthe body alone, and was not a moral delinquency. Their injurious efforts were met in a becoming man ner by the great body of the people, and the greater part of those who were drawn away have manifested their penitence, and returned to a more sober way of thinking, and to a deportment strictly honourable and virtuous. The instances of this defection have not been nuraerous ; and I am gratified to know that the greatej: part of those united in feUowship are increas ing in knowledge of the Scripture, and stability of Christian character ; that a number of young persons, several from the Sunday-schools, have joined it ; and that, though formed by sixteen individuals in the spring of 1820, it contained in the autumn pf 1827 nearly five hundred members. CHAPTER IV. Government of the South Sea islands monarchical and arbitrary— Intimately connected "with idolatry — Different ranks in society — Slavery — The proprie tors of land — The regav-family — Sovereignty hereditary — Abdication of the father in favour of the son^Distinctions of royaUy— Modes of travelhng — Sacredness of the Idng's person— Homage of the people — Singular ceremo nies attending- the inauguration of the king— Language of the Tahitian cotixt — The royal residences — Dress, &c. — Sources of revenue — Tenure of land— Division of- the country— National councils— Forfeiture of pos sessions, I The government of the South Sea islands, like that in Hawaii, was an arbitrary monarchy. The supreme authority was vested in the king, and was hereditary iS his family. It differed materially from the systems ex isting among the Marquesians inthe east, and the New- Zealanders in the south-west. There is no supreme ruler in either of these groups df islands, but the dif ferent tribes or clans are governed by their respective chieftains, each of whom is, in general, independent of any other. Regarding the inhabitants of Tamti, and the adjacent islands, as an uncivUized people, ignorant of letters and the arts, their modes of governing were FPRM OF GOVERNMENT. 75 necessarily rude and irregular. In many respects, how ever, their institutions indicate great attention to the principles of government, an acquaintance with the means of controUing the conduct of man, and an ad vancement in- the organization of their civil polity, which, under corresponding circumstances, is but rarely attained, and could scarcely have been expected. Their government, in all its multiplied ramifications, in its abstract theory, and in its practical details, was closely interwoven with their false system of religion. The god and the kingwere generally supposed to share the authority over raankind. The latter sometimes personated the former, and received the homage and the requests presented by the votaries of the imaginary divinity, and at other times officiated as the head of his people, in rendering their acknowledgments to the gods. The offlce of high-priest was frequently sustained by the king — who thus united in his person the highest civil and sacerdotal station in the land. 'The genealogy of the reigning family was usually traced back to the first ages of their traditionary history ; and the kings, in sorae of the islands, were supposed to have descended from the gods. Their persons were always sacred, and their farailies constituted the highest rank recognised araong the people. The different grades in society were not so distinctly marked in Polynesia as among the inhabitants of India, where the institution of caste exists ; nor were they so strongly defined in Tahiti as among the Sandwich islanders, whose government was perhaps raore despotic than that which prevailed in the southern islands. The lines of separation were, nevertheless, sufficiently dis tinct ; the higher orders being remarkably tenacious of their dignity, and jealous of dts deterioration by contact with inferiors. Society among thera was divided into three distinct ranks : the hui arii, the royal family and nobility — ^the bue raatira, the landed proprietors, or gentry and farraers — and the manahune, or coraraon people. These three ranks were subdivided into a number of distinct classes ; the lowest class included the titi and the teuteu, the slaves and servants ; the former were'those who had lost their lib erty in battle, or who, in consequence of the defeat of the chieftains to whom they were attached, had become the property of the conqiierors. This kind of slavery appears D2 76 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. to have existed among thera from time immemorial. In« dividuals captured in actual combat, or who fled to the chief for protection when disarmed or disabled in the field, were considered the slaves of the captor or chief by whom they were protected. The women, children, and others who remained in the districts of the van quished were also regarded as belonging to them ; and the lands they occupied, together with their fields and plantations, were distributed araong the victors. We do not know that they ever carried on a traffic in slaves, or sold those whora they had conquered, though a chief might give a captive for a servant to a friend. This is the only kind of slavery that has ever obtained araong them, and it corresponds with that which has prevailed in most of the nations of the earth in their rude state, or during the earlier periods of their history. This state of slavery among them was in general mild, compared with the affecting cruelty by which it has been distinguished in modern times, among those who sup port the inhuraan system of trafficking in these unhappy beings. If peace continued, the captive frequently re gained his liberty after a limited setvitude, and was per mitted to return to his own land, or remain in voluntary service with his raaster. So long, however, as they continued slaves or captives, their lives were in jeopardy. Sometimes they were suddenly murdered, to satiate the latent revenge of their conquerors ; at others reserved as human victims, to be offered in sacrifice to their gods. Slavery, in every form, is perfectly consistent with paganism, and it was maintained among the islands as one means of con tributing to its support, This.kind obtains in most of the clusters, but is probably far more oppressive in New- Zealand than in the Society Islands. The slaves among the former are treated with the greatest cruelty, and often inhumanly raurdered and eaten. The manahune also included the teuteu, or servants of the chiefs ; aU who were destitute of any land, and ignorant of the rude arts of carpentering, buUding, &c,, which were respected araong them, and such as were reduced to a state of dependence upon those in higher stations. Although the manahune have always included a large number of the inhabitants, they have not in modern times been so numerous as some other ranks. Since the population has been so greatly dirainished, the RANKS IN SOCIETY. 77 means of subsistence so abundant, and such vast por tions of the country uncultivated, an industrious indi yidual has seldom experienced much difficulty in secur ing at least the occupancy of a piece of land. The fishermen and artisans (sometimes ranking with this class, but more frequently with that imraediately above it) may be said to have constituted the connecting link- between the two. The bv^ raatira, gentry and farmers, has ever been the most numerous and influential class, constituting at all times the great body of the people, and the strength of the nation. They were generaUy the proprietors and cultivators of the soil, and held their land, not from the gift of the king, but from their ancestors. The petty raatiras frequently possessed frora 20 to 100 acres, and generally had more than their necessities required. They resided on their own lands, and enclosed so much as was necessary fof their support. They were the raost industrious class of the community, working their own plantations, building their own houses, manufac turing their own cloth and mats, besides furnishing these - articles for the king. The higher class araong the raatiras -were those who possessed large tracts of land in one place, or a number of smaUer sections in different parts, Sorae of thera owned perhaps raany hundred acres, parts of which were cultivated by those who lived in a state of dependence upon them, or by those petty raatiras who occupied their plantations on condition of rendering mUitary service. to the proprietors, and a portion of the produce. These individuals were a valuable class in the community, and constituted the aristocracy of the country. They were in generEil more regular, temperate, and industrious in their habits than the higher ranks, and, in all the mea sures of government, iraposed a restraint upon the ex travagance or precipitancy of the king, who, without their co-operation, could carry but few of his measures. In their public national asserablies, the speakers often compared the nation to a ship, of which the king was the mast ; and whenever this figure was used, the raati ras were always termed the shrouds, or ropes, by which, the raast is kept upright. Possessing at aU tiraes the most ample stores of native provisions, the number of their dependants or retainers was -great. The destitute and thoughtless readily attached themselves to^ tjjeir 78 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES establishments, for the purpose of securing the means of subsistence without care or apprehension of want, Thebue raatira, or raiddle class in society, formed the most important body in times of peace, and the strraigth of their armies in periods of war. Warriors were some times found among the attendants on the king or chief; but the principal dependence was upon the raatiras. These, influenced by a noble spirit of independence, ac custoraed to habits of personal labour, and capable of ' enduring the fatigues of war, were, probably from interest in the soil, move^d by sentiraents of patriotisra raore pow erfuUy than any other portion of the people. The raa tiras were frequently the priests in their own family tera ples ; and the priests of the national raaraes, excepting those allied by blood to the reigning families, were usu aUy ranked With them. The hui arii, or highest class, included the king or reigning chieftain in each island, the members of his family, and all who were related to them. This class, though not numerous, was considered the most influen tial in the state. Being the highest in dignity and rank, its elevation in the estimation of the people was guarded •with extreme care ; and the individuals of whora it was composed were exceedingly pertinacious of their dis tinction, and jealous of the least degradation by the ad mission of inferiors to their dignity. Whenever a matrimonial connexion took place be tween any one of the hui arU with an intiividual of an inferior order, unless a variety of ceremonies was per formed at the temple, by which the inferiority was sup posed to be removed, and the parties raade equal in dignity, all the offspring of such a union was invaria bly destroyed, to preserve the distinction of -the reigning famiUes. The king was supreme, and next to hira the queen. The brothers of the king, and his parents, were nearest in rank, the other raerabers of the faraily taking prece dence according to their degrees of consanguinity. The regal office is hereditary, and descends frora the father to the eldest^ son : it is not, however, confined to the male sex ; these islands have often been governed by a queen. Oberea was the queen of Tahiti when it was discovered by WaUis ; and Aimata, the daughter of Po mare II. , now exercises the supreme authority in Tahiti SINGULAR ORDER OF PRECEDENCE. 79 and Eimeo : the daughter of the king of Raiatea is also the nominal sovereign of the island of Huahine. The most singular usage, however, connected with the [established law of primogeniture, which obtained in the islands, was the father's abdication of the throne on the birth of his son. This was an invariable, and it appears to have been an ancient, practice. If the rank of the mother was inferior to that of the father, the chUdren, whether male or feraale, were destroyed ; but if the mother originaUy belonged to the hui arii, or had been raised to that elevation on her marriage with the king, she was regarded as the queen of the nation. Whatever might be the age of the king, his influence in the state, or the political aspect of affairs in reference to other tribes, as soon as a son was born, the monarch became a subject— ^the infant was at once proclaimed the sovereign of the people — the royal name was con ferred upon him, and his father was the first to do him horaage, by saluting his feet, and declaring him king. The herald of the, nation was then despatched round the island with the flag of the infant king. The banner was unfurled, and the young sovereign's name pro claimed in every district. If respected, and aUowed to pass, it was considered an acknowledgment by the raa tiras and chiefs, of his succession to the government ; but if broken, it was regarded as an act of rebellion, or an open declaration of war. Numerous cereraonies were performed at the marae, a splendid establishment was forthwith forraed for the young king, and a large train of attendants accompanied hira to whatever place he was conveyed. Every affair, however, of importance to the internal welfare of the nation, or its foreign relations, continued to be transacted by the father, and those whom he had formerly associated with him as his counsellors ; but every edict was issued in the name and on the behalf of the young ruler ; and though the whole of the execu tive governraent might remain in the hands of the father, he only acted as regent for his son, and was regarded as such by the nation. The insignia of regal authority, and the homage which the father had been accustoraed to receive from the people, were at once transferred to his successor. The lands, and other sources of the king's support, were appropriated to the raaintenance of the household establishraent of the infant ruler; and 80 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the father rendered him those demonstrations of infe riority which he hiraself had heretofore required from. the people. This remarkable custora was not confined to the faraily of the sovereign, but prevailed among the hui arii and the raatiras. In both these classes, the eldest son immediately at his birth received the honours and titles which his father bad hitherto borne. , It is not easy to trace the origin or discover the de sign of a usage so singular, and apparently of such high antiquity, among a people to whom it is almost pecu liar. Its advantages are not very apparent, unless we suppose it was adopted by the father to secure to his son undisputed succession to his dignity and power. If this was the design, the plan was admirably adapted to its accomplishment ; for the son was usually firmly fixed m the government before the father's decease, who was sometimes caUed to act as regent for his ovm son, be fore, according to ordinary usage, he would himself have been invested with royal dignity. Considering the inhabitants of the Sout^ Sea islands as but slightly removed from barbarisra, we are almost surprised at the homage and respect tliey paid to their rulers. The difference between them and the common people was, in many respects, far greater than that which prevails between the rulers and the ruled in most civiUzed couhtries. AVhether, Uke the sovereigns of the Sandwich Islands, they were supposed to derive their origin by lineal descent from the gods, or not, their per sons were regarded as scarcely less sacred than the personifications of their deities. Every thing in the least degree connected with the king or queen — the cloth they wore, the houses in which they dwelt, the canoes in which they voyaged, the men by whom they were borne When' they journeyed by land, became sacred — and even the sounds in the lan guage, composing their names, could no longer be ap propriated to ordinary significations. Hence, the origi nal names of raost of the objects with which they were familiar have frora tirae to time undergone considerable alterations. The ground on which they even accident ally trod became sacred ; and the dweUing under which they might enter must for ever after be vacated hy ita proprietors, and could be appropriated only to the use of these sacred personages. No individual was aUowed ROYAL TRAVELLING. 81 to touch the body of the king or queen ; and every one who should stand ovejthem, or pass the hand over their heads, would be Uable to pay for the sacrilegious act with the forfeiture of his life. It was on account of this supposed sacredness of person that they could never enter any dweUings, excepting those that were specially dedicated to their use, and prohibited to all others ; nor might they tread on the ground in any part of the island but their own hereditary districts. The sovereign and liis consort always appeared in public on men's shoulders,* and travelled in this manner wherever they journeyed by land. They were seated on the neck or shoulders of their bearers, who were generaUy stout, athletic men. The persons of the raen, in consequence of their office, were regarded as sacred. The individuals thus elevated appeared to sit with ease and security, holding slightly by the head, while their feet hung down on the breast, and were clasped in the arras of the bearer. "When they traveUed, they pro ceeded at a tolerably rapid pace, frequently six raUes within the hour. A nuraber of attendants ran by the side of the bearers, or foUowed in their train ; and when the men who carried the royal personages grew weary, they were relieved by others. " The king and queen were always accompanied by several pair of sacred men, or bearers, and the transit from the shoulders of one to those of another, at the termination of an ordinary stage, was accorapanied with much greater despatch than the horses of a raail-coach are changed, or an equestrian could alight and remount. On these occasions, their majesties never suffered their feet to touch the grounds but when they wished to change what to them answered the purpose of horses, they caUed two of the men who were running by their side ; and while the man on whose neck they were sit ting made little more than a moraentary halt, the indi viduals who were to take them onward fixed their hands upon their thighs, and bent their heads slightly forward : when they had assumed this position, the royal riders, with apparently but Uttle effort, vaulted over the head of the raan on whose neck they had been sitting, and, alight ing on the shoulders of his successor in office, proceeded on their journey with the shortest possible detention. * As represented in the engraving inserted in the beginning of vol. ii. D3 83 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. This mode of conveyance was called amo or vaha'. It could not have been very corafortable, even to the riders, while to the bearers it raust have been exceed ingly laborious. The men selected for this duty, which was considered the most honourable post next to that of bearers of the gods, were generaUy exerapted from labour, and, as they seldom did anything else, were not perhaps much incommoded by their oflice ; and although the seat occupied by those they bore was not perhaps the most easy, yet as it was a mark of the highest dig nity in the nation, and as none but the king and queen, and occasionally their nearest relatives, were aUowed the distinction it exhibited,, they felt probably a corres ponding satisfaction and complacency in thus appearing before their subjects, whenever they left their hereditary district. The effect must have been somewhat imposing when, on public occasions, vast multitudes were assem bled, and their sovereign, thus elevated above every in dividual, appeared among thera. Of the dignity it con ferred the natives themselves appear to have formed no inferior idea. It is said that Pomare II, once re marked that he thought himself a greater man than King George, who only rode a horse, whUe he rode on a, raan. In our different journeys and voyages araong the islands, where there have- been but few means of cross ing a stream without fording it, or of landing frora a boat or canoe without wading sorae distance, in the water, we have often been glad to be carried, either across a, river, or frora the boat to the shore. On these occa sions they have requested us to raount in ancient regal style. Though we generaUy preferred riding on their backs, and throwing our arras round their necks, we have;" nevertheless, wben the river has been deep, seated ourselves upon their shoulders, and in this position have passed the stream, without any other inconvenience than that which has arisen frora the apprehension of losing our balance, and faUing headlong into the water. — The inhabitants of Rurutu have a singular and less pleasant method of conveying their friends from a boat, &c. to the shore. On the arrival of strangers, every man en deavours to obtain one as a friend, and carry him off to his own habitation, where he is treated with fhe great est kindness by the inhabitants of the district; they place hira on a high, seat, and feed hira with abundajuja HOMAGE TO CHIEFS. 83 of the finest food. After an arrival frora a strange island, when a man sees his neighbour carrying a friend or a nev.f-comer on his shoulders, he attacks hira — a fight ensues for the possession of the prize — ^if the raan who forraerly possessed it is victorious, he goes home with his raan on his shoulders, receives a hearty wel come, and i^ regarded by the whole district as a brave feUow ; whereas, if he loses the prize, he is looked upon by all his friends as a coward, I ara not aware that the highest rulers in the Society Islands received at any tirae the same kind of homage which the Hawaiians occasionally paid to those chiefs who were considered to have descended from the gods. When these walked out during the season of tabu, the people prostrated themselves, with their faces touching the ground, as they passed along. A raark of horaage, however, equally humihating to those who rendered it, and probably as flattering to the individuals by whom it was received, was in far more extensive and perpetual use araong the Tahitians. This was the stripping'down the upper garments, and uncovering the body as low as the waist, in the presence of the king. This homage was paid to the gods, and also to their temples. In passing these, every individual, either walking on the shore or sailing in a canoe, removed whatever article of dress he wore upon the shoulders and breast, and passed uncovered the depository of the deities, the site of their altars, or the temples of their worship. Whenever the king appeared abroad, or the people approaehed his presence, this mark of reverence was required from all ranks ; his own father and raother were not excepted, but were generaUy the first to un cover themselves. The people inhabiting the district through which he passed uncovered as he approached ; and those who sat in the houses by the road-side, as soon as they heard the cry of Te arii, te arii, " The king, the king," stripped off their upper garments, and did not venture to replace them till he had passed. If by any accident he came upon thera unexpectedly, the cloth they wore was instantly rent in pieces, and an atoneraent offered. Any individual whora he might pass on the. road, should he hesitate to remove this part of his dress, would be in danger of losing his life on the spot, or of being marked as a victim of sacrifice to the gods. 84 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. This distinguishingmarkof respect was not only ren dered at aU tiraes, and from every individual, to the person ofthe king, but even to his dwellings, wherever they raight be. These houses were considered sacred, and were the only habitations in any part of the island where the king could alight and take refreshraent and repose. The ground for a considerable space on both sides was in their estimation sacred. A tii, or carved image, fixed on a high pedestal and placed by the road side, at a short distance frora the dwelUng, raarked tlie boundary of the sacred soil. AU traveUers passing these houses, on approaching the first image, stripped off the upper part pf their dress, and, whether the king was residing there or not, walked uncovered to the image- at the ojiposite botmdary. After passing this they replaced their poncho, or kind of mantle, and pur sued their journey. To refuse this homage would have been considered not only as an indication of disaffection towards the king, but as rebeUion against the government and im piety towards the gods, exposing the individuals to the vengeance -of the supreme powers in the visible and invisible worlds. Such was the unapproachable eleva tion to which the superstitions of the people raised the rulers in the South Sea islands, and such the marked distinction that prevailed between the king and people from his birth until he was superseded in title and rank by his own son ! The ceremony of inauguration to the regal of&ce, which took place when the king assumed the govern ment, being one of considerable moment, was celebrated. with a rude magnificence, though, like every other ob servance, it was marked with disgusting abominations and horrid cruelty. There was no fixed period of Ufe at which -the youth were said to have arrived at years of manhood. Unaccustoraed. to keep even traditionary accounts of the time of their birth, there were but few whose age was known. The period, therefore, when the young king was formally invested with the regaUa,. and introduced to his high oflice, was regulated by his own character and disposition, the wiU of his father and guardians, or the exigences of the state : it generaUy took, place some years before he had reached the age Qf twenty-one. ¦ * As it was one of the most important events to the CEREMONY OF INAUGURATION. 85 nation, great preparation was made for its due celebra tion ; and whatever could give effect to the pageant was carefuUy provided. The gods indicated the interest they were supposed to take in the transaction by the miracu lous events that occurred at this tirae. Among those might be mentioned the sacred aoa, a tree resembling the banian of India, that spread overthe Faa-ape. This was said to have shot forth a new fibrous branch at his. birth, and this branch or tendril reached the ground when he was to be made king. Taneua, a bamboo used on the occasion, was said to draw its roots out of the ground at the approach of the ceremony, and to leap into the hand of the person who was sent for it. The inaliguration ceremony, answering to coronation among other nations, consisted in girding the king with the maro ura, or sacred girdle of red feathers ; which not only raised hira to the highest earthly station, but iden tified hira with their gods. The maro or girdle was made with the beaten fibres of.the aoa ; with these a nuraber of uru, red feathers, taken from the images of their deities were interwoven with feathers of other colours. The maro thus -became sacred, even as the person of the gods — the feathers being supposed to re tain aU the dreadful attributes of power and vengeance which the idols possessed, and with which it was designed to endow the king. The sacred girdle which was shown to Capt. Cook in the marae at Atehuru, and which was used by the sovereigns of Tahiti, was five yards long, and flfteen inches wide; It was covered with red and yellow feathers: one end was bordered with eight pieces, about the size and shape of a horse-shoe, and fringed with black feathers ; the other end was forked : the feathers were ranged in square figures. The pen dant which Capt. Wallis hoisted at Matavai was attached to this girdle. Every part of the proceeding was marked by its absurdity or its wickedness ; but the most affect ing circumstance' was the murderous cruelty attending even the preparation for its celebration. In order to render the gods propitious to the trans raission of this power, a human victim was sacrificed when they commenced the fatu raa, or manufacture of this girdle. This unhappy wretch was called the sacrifice for the mau raa titi, commencement or fasten ing on of the sacred maro. Sometimes a human victira was offered for every fresh piece added to the girdle ; 86 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. and when it was fimshed, another man, called " Sacri fice for the piu raa maro," was slain ; and the girdle was considered as consecrated by the blood of those victims. On the morning of what might be called the coronation day, when the king bathed prior to the cora menceraent of the cereraonies, another huraan victim was required in the narae of the gods. The pageant on this occasion proceeded by land and water. The parties who were to be engaged in the transactions of the day assembled in the marae of Oro, Certain ceremonies were here performed ; the image of Oro, stripped of the satjred cloth in which he usually reposed, and decorated with aU the emblems of his divinity, was conveyed, to the large court of the teraple ; the Papa rahi o ruea, or great bed of Oro, a large curiously forraed bench or sofa7cut out of a solid piece of tiraber, was brought out for the throne on which the king was to sit. When these prelirainaries were finished, they pro ceeded from the teraple in the foUow-ing order. Tairi- moa, one of the priests of the faraily of Tairi, carried the image of Oro. The king foUowed imraediately after the god. Behind him the large bed of Oro was "borne by four chiefs. The miro-tahua, or orders of priests, with the great drum from the temple, the trurapets, and other Instruments, foUowed. Each of the priests wore a tapaau on the arm, consisting of the braided leaflets of the cocoanut-tree. As soon as the image appeared without the temple, the multitude who were waiting to witness the pageant "retired to .a respectful distance on each side, leaving a wide clear space. The priests sounded their trumpets and beat the sacred drura, as they marched in procession from the teraple to the sea shore, where a fleet of canoes, previously prepared, was waiting for them. The sacred canoe, or state barge of Oro, was distinguished from the rest by the tapaau, or sacred wreaths of plaited cocoanut-leaves, by which it was surroimded, and which were worn by every indi vidual on board. As soon as the procession reached the beach, Oro was carried on board, and followed by the priests and instruments of rausic, while the king took his seat upon the sacred sleeping-place of Oro, which was flxed on the shore. The chiefs stood around the king, and the priests around the god, untU, upon a signal given, the ROYAL INAUGURATION. 87 king arose from his seat, advanced into the sea, and bathed his persoir. The priest of Oro then descended into the water, bearing in his hand a branch of the sa cred mero, plucked frora the tree which grew in the precincts of the temple. While the king was bathing, the priest struck him on the back with the sacred branch, and offered up the prescribed ubu, or invocation, to Taaroa, The design of this part of the ceremony was to purify the king from aU rnahuru huru, or defileraent and guilt, which he raight have contracted, according to their own expression, .by his having seized any land, banished any people, coramitted murder, &c. When these ablutions were completed, the king and the priest ascended the sacred canoe. Here, in the presence of Oro, he was invested with the raaro ura, or sacred girdle, interwoven -with the feathers from tho idol. The priest, while employed in girding the king with this erablera of dominion and majesty, pronounced a ubu, commencing with Faa atea ie arii i tai i motu tabu, " Extend or spread the influence of the king over the sea to the sacred island ;" describing also the nature of his girdle, and addressing the king at the close by saying, Medua leie a oe e te Arii — " Parent, this of you, O king ;" indicating that from the gods all his power was derived. As soon as the ubu was finished, the multitude on the beach and in the surrounding canoes lifted up the right liand, and greeted the new monarch with loud and uni- verssd acclaraations of Maeva arii! maeva arii! The steersman in the sacred canoe struck his padtUe against the side of the vessel, which was the signal to the row ers, who instantly started frora the shore towards the reef, having- the god and the king girded, as it were, with the deity, on board ; the priests beating their large drum, and sounding their trumpets, which were beauti ful large turbo, or trumpet-shells. The thronging spec tators foUowed in their canoes, raising their right hand in the air, and shouting Maeva arii ! Having proceeded in this manner for a considerable distance, to indicate the dominion of the king on the sea, and receive the homage of the powers of the deep, they returned towards the shore. During this excursion, Tuumao and Tahui, two deifled sharks, a sort of demigods of the sea, were influenced by Oro to come and congratulate the new king on his 88 POLYNESIAN EESEARCHES. assumption of government. If the monarch was a le gitimate ruler, and one elevated to the office with the sanction of the superior powers, these sharks, it was said, always came to pay their respects to him, either while he was bathing in the sea, or during the excursion in the sacred canoe. But it is probable that wheh they approached while his majesty was in the water, some ofhis attendants were stationed round, to prevent their coming too near, lest their salutations should have been more direct and personal than would have proved agree able. Yet it is said that the peirents of the present rnlers of some of the islands, at the time of their inau guration, actuaUy played with these sharks, without re ceiving any injury. The fleet reaching the shore, the parties landed, when the king was placed on the papa rahi o ruea, or sacred couch of Oro, as his throne ;ijut instead of a footstool,, the ordinary appendage to a throne, he reclined his head- on the urua Tafeu, the sacred pUlow of Tafeu, This. was also cut out of a solid piece of wood, and orna mented with carving. The procession was now forraed as before, and mov ing towards Tabutabuatea, the great national temple, Tairimoa, bearing the image of Oro, led the way. The king, reclining on his throne, or couch of royalty, fol lowed iramediately after. He was borne on the shoul ders of four principal nobles connected with the reign ing family. The chiefs and priests followed in his train, the latter sounding their trumpets, and beating the large sacred drum, while the spectators shouted Maeva arii ! as they proceeded- to the temple. The multitude fol lowed them into the court of the marae, where the king's couch or throne was flxed upon the elevated stone platform, in the midst of the unu, or carved ornaments of wood erected in honour ofthe departed chiefs whose bones had been deposited there. The principal idol Oro, and his son Hiro, were placed by the side of the king, and the gods and the king here received the homage and tribute of aUegiance frora the pepple. A veil raust be threwn over the vices, with which the cereraonies were cencluded. Although this cereraony was one of the least offensive festivities araong them, the murderous cruelty with which it comraenced, and the wickedness with which it terminated, were adapted to irapress the raind with COURTLY ADULATION. 89 acutest anguish and deepest commiseration. The abom inations continued until the blowing of the trumpet on board the canoes required every one to depart frora the temple. They now repaired to the banquet or feast provided for the occasion, and passed the remainder of the day in unrestrained indulgence and excess. The phraseology of the Tahitian court was in perfect accordance with the elevation and sacred connexion with their divinities which the binding on the red girdle was designed to recognise and ratify. The preposterous vanity and adulation in language, used in epithets be stowed upon the king of Tahiti ahd his estabUshment, fuUy equal those eraployed in the most gorgeous estab lishment of Eastern princes, Or the seraglios of Turkish sultans. It was not only declared that Oro was the father of the king, as was implied by the address of the priest when arraying hira in the sacred girdle, and the station occupied by his throne, when placed in the teraple by the side of the deities, but it pervaded the terms used in reference to his whole establishment. His houses were called the aorai, the clouds of heaven,; anuanua, the rainbow, was the name of the canoe in which he voyaged ; his voice was caUed thunder ; the glare of the torches in his dwelling was denominated lightning ; and when the people saw them in the evening, as they passed near his abode, instead of saying the torches were burning in the palace, they would observe that the lightning was flashing in the clouds of heaven. When he passed frora one district to another on the shoulders ofhis bearers, instead of speaking of his travelling from one place to another, they always used the word mahuta, which signifles to fly ; and hence described his journey by saying that the king was flying frora one district of the island to another. The establishment and habits of the king often exhib ited the raost striking contrast; at one tirae he was seen surrounded by the priests, and invested with the insignia of royalty, and divinity itself; or appeared in public on the shoulders of his bearers, while the people expressed every indication of superstitious reverence and fear. At other tiraes, he might be seen on terms of the greatest famiharity with his attendants and do mestics. He never wore a crown, or any badge of dignity, and 90 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. in general there was no tUfference between his dress and that of the chiefs by whom he was surrounded, ex cepting that the flne cloth and raatting,-caUed vane, with which he was often arrayed, were more rare and valu able than the dress worn by others. His raiment fre quently consisted of the ordinary pareu, or ahu pu, in quaUty often inferior to that worn by some of the chiefs in attendance upon him. In some of the islands lo the westward, at the cere monies of the teraple, the people, to show their horaage, wound folds of cloth repeatetUy round the body of the king till he was unable to raove, and appeared as if it ivas only a man's head resting on the immense bale of sloth in which he was enclosed. I do not know that the kings of Tahiti ever experienced such treatraent from their subjects. The kings of the former were left in this ludicrous and helpless situation, while thepeople travelled round the island, boxing and wrestUng in hon our of their sovereign throughout every district. The regal establishment was maintained by the pro- iuce of the hereditary districts of. the reigning family, md the requisitions madg upon the people. Although- ihe authority of the king was supreme, and his power mdisputed, yet he does not appear to have been con- iidered as the ahsolute proprietor of the land, nor do ;he occupants seem to have been mere tenants at will, IS was the fact in the Sandwich Islands. There were certain districts which constituted the matrimony of the royal family ; in theSe they could walk ibroad, as they were sacred lands. The other districts were regarded as belonging to their respective occu pants or proprietors, who were generaUy raatiras, and ivhose interest in the soil was distinct frora that of the dng, and often raore extensive. These lands they in- lerited frora their ancestors, and bequeathed thera to heir children, or whorasoever they chose to select as heir heirs. At their death, the parties to whom land lad been thus left entered into undisturbed possession, is of rightful property. TENURE OF THE LAND. 91 called together the members of the family, or confiden tial friends, and to thera gave directions for the disposal of their effects after their decease. This was consid ered a sacred charge, and was usually executed with fideUty. Every portion of land had its respective owner ; and even the distinct trees on the land had sometimes dif ferent proprietors, and a tree and the land on which it grew different owners. The divisions of land were ac curately marked by a natural boundary, as a ridge of raountains, or the course " of a river, or by artificial means ; and frequently a carved image, or tii, denoted the extent of their different possessions. Whether these tiis were designed to intimate that the spirits they represented guarded the borders of their property, or were used as ornaments, I could not learn ; but the re moval of the ancient landmarks was regarded as a heinous offence. The produce which the king received from his he reditary estates being seldom sufficient for the main tenance of his household, the deficiency was supplied from the different districts of the islands. The fre quency, however, with which the inferior chiefs were required to bring provisions was neither fixed nor regu lar, but was governed by the nuraber ofthe districts, or the necessities of the king's steward. Still there was a sort of tacit agreement between the king and chiefs as to the times when they should furnish his provision : and the usage among them in this respect was generaUy understood. The provision was ready dressed, though occasionaUy the vegetables and roots were brought uncooked, and the pigs led aUve to' the king's servants. The pigs, after being presented to the king, were sometimes taken back by the farmer, and fed till required for use. Cloth for the dress of the king's servants, houses for his abode, and canoes, not only for himself, but also for those of his household, were furnished by the inhabitants of the islands. Although the king's will was the supreme law, and the governraent in some respects despotic, it approxi mated more to a raixed administration, a union of mon archy and aristocracy. The king had usually one con fidential chief near his person, who was his adviser in every affair of importance, and was, in fact, his prirae 92 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. minister. Frequently there were twp pr three who possessed the confidence, and aided the counsels, of the king. These ministers were not responsible to any one for the advice they gave. So great, however, was the influence ofthe raatiras, that a measure of any import ance, such as the declaration of war, or the fitting out a fleet, was seldom undertaken without their being first consulted. This was effected by the friends of the king going among them, and proposing the affair in contem plation, or by convening a public council for its consid eration. Their public measures were not distinguished by promptness or decision, excepting when they wreaked vengeance upon the poor and helpless victims of their displeasure. After a meeting of the chiefs had been suramoned, it was a long tirae before aU carae together, and their meetings were often interrupted by adjourn ments. Their councils were usuaUy held in the open air, where the chiefs and others forraed a circle, in which the orators Of the different pariies topk their stations opposite to each other. "These orators were the prin cipal, but not the only, speakers. The king often ad dressed the asserably. The warriors and the raatiras also delivered their sentiraents with boldness and free dom. When a difference of opinion prevailed, and words ran high, the impetuosity of their passions broke through aU restraint, and sometiraes the council terrai nated in scenes of confusion and bloodshed ; or, if it ended without open hostiUty, the chieftains returned to their respective districts to assemble their tenantry, and prepare for war. POWER OF THE CHIEFS. 93 CHAPTER V. Power of the chiefs and proprietors of land — Banishment ond conliscation — The king's messenger— The niau, an emblem of authority — Ancient usages in reference to crime, &c. — Fatal effects of jealousy — Seizure of property — Punishment of theft — Public works — Supplies for the king— Despotic ra pacity — Extortion of the king's servants — Unorganized state of civil polity — Desire a code of Christian laws — Advice and conduct of the missionaries — Preparation of the laws — Public enactment by the king in a national assem bly at Tahiti— Capital punishments— Manner of conducting public trials — Establishment of laws in Raiatea— Preparation of those for Huahine. Every chief was the sovereign of his own district, though aU acknovvledged the supremacy of the king. Each island was divided into a nuraber of large portions, or districts, called Maataina, a terra also applied to the inhabitants of a district. These maataina had distinct names, and were under the government of a chieftain of rank or dignity belonging to the reigning family, or to the raatiras. This individual was the baron of the domain, or the lord of the manor, and was succeeded in his possessions and office by his son, or the nearest of his kindred, with a fresh appointment from the king. For treason, rebeUion, or withholding supplies, indi viduals were liable to banishment and confiscation of property. The king had the prerogative of norainating his successor, but could not appropriate the lands ofthe exile to, his own use. The reraoval of a chief of high rank, or' of extensive influence, was seldom attempted unless the raeasure was approved by the other chiefs. The sovereign was, therefore, raore desirous to con cUiate their esteem, and engage their co-operation, than to prejudice thera against his person or raeasures. As he had no permanent arraed force at his disposal, he could not on every occasion _accomplish his wishes; and at tiraes, when he has issued his mandate for the banishraent of a raatira, if the other raatiras deemed his expulsion unwarrantable, they have desired hira to keep possession of his lands, and then, remonstrating with the king, have declared their determination to maintain the cause of the injured party, even by force of arras. The extent of power possessed by the raatiras, in the num- 94 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. ber of their tenantry and dependants, was one of the greatest sources of embarrassraent to the government, whose measures were only regulated by the wiU of the ruler, or the exigencies of the state. In the division of their country the natives appear to have had a reraarkable predilection for the number eight. Almost every island, whatever its size, is divided into eight districts, and the inhabitants into an equal number of maataina, or divisions. In each district the power of the chief was supreme, and greater than that which the king exercised over the whole. This power extended to the persons and lives, as weU as the prop- esrty, of the people. ¦The inferior chiefs also exercised the same authority over their dependants. The father was raagistrate in his own family ; the chief in his own district ; and the king nominally dispensed law and justice to the whole. The final appeal, in aU matters of dispute, was made to the chief ruler ; and the parties who resorted to his decision usuaUy regarded it as binding. There was no regular police for the maintenance of public order. The chief of each district was accountable for the con duct of the people under his own jurisdiction. The chieftains who were in attendance on the king, with the servants of his establishment, were the agents usuaUy employed to carry his measures into effect. The ser vants of the raatiras performed the same duty in their respective localities, and the king often' sent his order to the district chief, who employed his own men in its execution. Notwithstanding the raany acts of homage paid to the head and other branches of the reigning family, and their imagined connexion with the gods, the actual in fluence of the king over the haughty and despotic dis trict chieftains was neither powerful nor permanent, and he could seldom confide in their fidelity in any pro ject which would not advance their interests as well as his own. Every measure was therefore planned with the most cautious deliberation, the approval and aid of a nuraber of these nobility of the country being essential to carry it into effect ; but when the interests of the reigning famUy and those of the chieftains were opposed, it produced no small embarrassment. These raatiras, who resembled the barons of the feudal system, kept the people under them in a state of the greatest subjec- THE LAW OF FORCE. 95 tion, and received from them not only railitary service, but a portion of the produce of their lands, and personal labour whenever required. Whenever a measure affecting the whole of the in habitants was adopted, the king's vea, or raessenger, was despatched with a bundle of niaus, or leaflets. On entering a district, he repaired to the habitation of the principal chiefs, and, presenting a cocoanut-leaf, deliv ered the orders of the king. The acceptance of the leaf was a declaration of their compliance with the re quisition, and to decline taking it was regarded as an intimation of hostility to the measure proposed. Hence the messenger or herald, when he had travelled round the island, reported to the king, who had received and who had refused the niau. When the chiefs approved of the message, they sent their own messengers to their respective tenants and dependants, with a cocoanut-leaf for each, and the orders ofthe king, The niau, or leaflet of the cocoanut-tree, was the emblera of authority throughout the whole of the Geor gian and Society Islands ; and requisitions for property or labour, preparations for war, or the convocation of a national asserably, were forraerly made by sending the cocoanut-leaf to those whose service or attendance was required. To return or refuse the niau was to offer an insult to the king, and to resist his authority. If \he king felt hiraself strong enough, he would in stantly banish such an individual, and send another to take possession of his lands, and occupy his station" as chief of th* district. Should the offender have been guilty of disobedience to the just demands of the king, though the laads might be his hereditary property, he must leave them, and becorae, as the people expressed it, a wanderer " tipon the road ;" but if the king's con duct was considered arbitrary, and the individual justi fied in his refusal bythe other chiefs, they would iapea, or detain hira, and protest to the king against his re raoval. The parties generally knew each other's strength and influence, and those who had little hopes of suc ceeding by an appeal to arms usually conceded what ever was required. Personal security and the rights of private property were unknown ; anf the admin istration of justice by the chiefs in the several dis tricts, and the king over the whole, was regulated 96 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. more by the relative power than by the merits of their cause. They had no regular code of laws, nor any public courts of justice, and excepting in offences against the ' king and chiefs, the rulers were seldom appealed to. The people in general avenged their own injuries. Death or banishment was the punishment usually inflicted by the chiefs, and frequently the objects of their displea sure were marked out as victims for sacrifice. Destitute, however, as they were of even oral laws or institutes, there were many acts which by general consent were considered crirainal,, and deserving pun ishraent. These were orure hau, rebellion, or shaking the govemment, withholding supplies, or even speaking contemptuously of the king or his administration. So heinous was this offence, that the criminal was not only liable to banishment, or the forfeiture of his life, but a human sacrifice must be offered, to atone for the guUt, and appease the displeasure of the gods against the people of the land in_ which it had been committed. Lewdness was not regarded as a crime, but adultery was sometimes punished with death. Those among the middle or higher ranks who practised polygamy allowed their wives other husbands. It is reported thaf brothers, or members of the same family, sometimes exchanged their wives, while the wife of every indi vidual was also the wife of his taio or friend. Their character in this respect presents a most un- nafural mixture of brutal degradation with infuriated and malignant jealousy ; for while their conduct with respect to the taio, &c, exhibits an insensibility to eveiy feeling essential to conjugal happiness, theleast famUi arity with the wife, unauthorized by the husband, even a word or a look from a stranger, if the husband was suspicious, or attributed it to improper motives, was followed by instant and deadly revenge. There is a raan now residing in Huahine, whose face and shoulders are frightfuUy raarked with deep scars, inflicted by blows with a carpenter's axe, on this ac count. A husband and wife were once sitting together, when another raan joined the party and sat down with thera. He wore a taupoo, or bonnet, of plaited cocoa nut-leaves : Ufting his hand, and taking hold of it by the part that shaded his brows, he waved his hand towards the inland part of the district, in removing his bomiet PUNISHMENT FOR THEFT. 97 from his head. The suspicious husband, observing the motion of his hand, considered it as an assignation, that the stranger was to meet his wife there ; and without a word, I beUeve, being spoken by either party, he rose up, took down his spear, which was suspended from the inside ofhis dwelUng, and ran the raan through the body, accusing him at the same time of the crime of which he supposed him guUty. Several of the raurders of the Europeans that have been committed in the islands of the Pacific have originated in this cause. Theft was practised, but less frequently among them selves than towards their foreign visiters. They sup posed it equally criminal, yet they do not in general appear to have attached any moral delinquency to the practice ; but they imagined they were more likely to avoid detection when stealing from strangers than when robbing their own countrymen. Stealing was always considered as a crime among thera, and every precau tion was taken to guard against it. On this account, their large bales of valuable cloth, and most articles of property not in constant use, were kept suspended from the ridge-pole or rafters of their dweUings ; their smaUer rolls of cloth were often laid by their pillows ; and their pigs were driven under their beds at night, to prevent their being stolen. This nefarious practice, strange as it may appear, was supported by their false system of religion, and sanc tioned by the patronage of the gods, especially by Hiro, a son of Oro, who was called the god of thieves. The aid of this god was invoked by those who went on ex peditions of plunder, and the priests probably received a portion of the spoils. Chiefs of considerable rank have sometiraes been detected in the act of stealing, or have been known to eraploy their doraestics to thieve, receiving the articles stolen, and afterward sheltering the plunderers. This, however, has generally been practised on the property of foreigners. Among themselves, if detected, the thief experienced no mercy, but was often raurdered on the spot. If de tected afterward, he was soraetimes dreadfuUy wounded or killed. Two very affecting instances of vengeance of this kind are recorded by the early missionaries. I have also heard that they sometimes bound the thief hand and foot, and, putting him into an old rotten canoe, Vol. 111.— E 98 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. towed hira out to sea, and there left hira adrift, to sink in the ocean, or becorae a prey to the sharks. The haru raa, or seizing all the property of delin quents, was the most, frequent retaUation, among the lower class, for this and other crimes. The servants of the chiefs, or injured party, went to the house of the offenders, and took by force whatever they found, car rying away every article worth possessing, and destroy ing the rest. If the inhabitants of the house received previous intimation of their purpose, they generaUy re moved or secreted their raost valuable property, but seldom attempted to resist the seizure, even though every article of food and clothing, and the mats on which they slept, should be taken away. - This mode of retaliation for theft, or other injury, was so generally recognised as just, that, although the party thus plundered might be raore powerful than those who plundered thera, they would not atterapt to prevent the seizure : had they done so, the population of the district would have assisted those who, according to established custora, were thus punishing the aggressors. Such was the usual raethod resorted to for punishing petty thefts committed among theraselves. They were generally satisfied with seizing whatever they could find in the houses, yards, or gardens of the offenders ; but when it was practised by order of the king or chiefs, the culprit was banished j'rom his house or lands, and reduced to a state of complete destitution. Great difficulty was often experienced in discovering the thief or the property stolen ; and on these occa sions they frequently resorted to divination, and em ployed the sorcerer to discover the offender. The thief, when detected; generally received summary pun ishraent. Mr. Bourne states, that in one of tbe Hervey Islands, a man found a little boy, about eight years of age, steaUng food ; the raan instantly seized the juvenile delinquent, and tying a heavy stone to his leg, threw him into the sea. The boy sank to the bottora, and would soon have paid for his crirae with his life, had not one of the native teachers plunged into the water, rescued him, and taken him to his own house, where he has ever since resided. The resources of the government consisted in the personal services of the people, and the produce of the soil. From these the revenue was derived. All public SUPPLIES FOR THE KING. 99 Works, sUch as the erection of national temples, fortifi cations, enclosures from the sea, dwellings for the king, &c.,were performed bythe whole population. In each district the king had a viceroy, or deputy, to whom his orders were sent with a cocoanut-leaf. The chiefs soraetiraes assembled together, and divided the work among theraselves. At other tiraes the king appointed to each his particular share. Every chief then issued orders to the raatiras under his authority, who prepared the raaterials and perforraed the work. Canoes for the king's use were furnished in the same way, and also cloth for himself and his household. Every district brought provisions at stated intervals for the king's use, or fbr the maintenance of his nu merous retinue. Besides what they regularly furnished orders were often issued for extraordinary supplies, for the entertainment of a distinguished guest, or the cele bration of a national festival. No regular system of taxation prevailed, but every kind of property was fur nished by the chiefs and people in great abundance, not only for the king, but for the purpose of enriching those who were the objects of his favour. However abundant the supplies raight be which the king received, he was in general more necessitous than many of the chiefs. Appfications frora the chiefs for food, for cloth, canoes, anjl every other valuable article furnished by the people, were so frequent and importu nate, that more than was ' barely sufficient for his own use seldom remained long in his possession. A present of food was usually accompanied with several hundred, yards of native cloth, and a number of fiiie large double ' canoes ; yet every article was often distributed araong the chiefs and favourites^ on the very day it arrived ; and so urgent were the applicants, that they did not wait till the articles were brought, but often extorted frora the king a promise that he would give thera the first bale of cloth, or double canoe, he raight receive. At tiraes they went beyond this ; and when a chief, who considered the king under obligations to hira, knew that the inhabitants of a district were preparing a present for their sovereign, which. would include any articles he wished to possess, he would go to the king, and lapao, mark or bespeak it, even before it was finished. A proraise given under these circurastances was usuaHy , E 2 100 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. regarded as binding, though it often involved the king in difficulties, and kept hira necessitous. In the estiraation of the people, generosity was among the greatest virtues of a king ; and illiberality was most unpopular. In describing a good chief, or governor, they always spoke of him as one who distributed among his chiefs whatever he received, and never refused any thing for which they asked. Notwithstanding this generosity on the part of the king, the conduct of the governraent was often raost rapacious and unjust. The stated and regular sup plies furnished by the inhabitants were inadequate to the raaintenance of the nurabers who, attaching themselves to the king's household, passed their time in itUeness, but were fed at his table. Whenever there was a deficiency of food for his followers or guests, a number of his servants went to the resi dence of a raatira, or farmer, and, sometimes without even asking, tied up the pigs that were fed near the dwelling, plundered the abode, ravaging, like a band of lawless robbers, the plantations or the gardens, and taking away every article of food the poor oppressed labourer possessed. Sometiraes they launched a fine canoe that raight be lying near, and, loading it with their plunder, left the industrious proprietor destitute even of the means of subsistence ; and, as they were the king's servants, he durst not complain. When the king travelled, he was usually attended by a company of .ireois, or a worthless train of idlers; and often when they entered a district that was perhaps well supplied with provisions for its inhabitants, if they remained any length of tirae, by their plundering and wanton destruction it was reduced to a state of desola tion. Sometiraes the king sent his servants to take what they wanted frora the fields or gardens of the peo pie ; but often, unauthorized by hira, they used his narae to corarait the most lawless and injurious outrage upon the property of the inhabitants, whose lives were en dangered if they offered the least resistance. Mahamene, a native of Raiatea, gave, at a public meeting in that island, the foUowing account of their behaviour. "These teuteu" (servants of the king), said he, " would enter a house, and comrait the greatest depredations. The master of the house would sit as a EXTORTION OF THE KINC's SERVANTS. 101 poor captive, and look on, without daring to say a word. They would seize his bundle of cloth, kiU his largest pigs, pluck the best bread-fruit, take the largest taro (arum roots), the finest sugar-cane, the ripest bananas, and even take the posts of his house for fuel to cook them with. Is there not a raan present who actuaUy buried his new canoe under the sand, to secure it from these desperate raen!" Nothing fostered tyranny and oppression in the rulers, and reduced the population to a state of wretchedness, so much as these unjust proceedings. Those who by habits of industry, or desire of comfort for theraselves and faraUies, -might be induced to cultivate raore land than others, were, frora this very circurastance, marked out for despoliation. They had no redress for these wrongs, and therefore, rather than expose themselves to the mortifying humiliation of seeing the fruits of their labour taken to feed a useless and insulting band that followed the movements of the king, they allowed their lands to remain untilled, and" chose to procure a scanty means of subsistence from day to day, rather than suffer the insults to which even their industry ex posed them. So far were these shameless extortions practised, that during the journey of a European through the country, he has been attended by a servant of the king, and when, in return for provisions furnished, or acts of kindness shown by the hospitabte inhabitants, he has made them a trifiing present, it has been instantly seized by the vassal of the chief, who has followed him for that purpose. The poor peojile were also allowed to dispose of their produce to the captains or merchants that might visit them for the purpose of barter, but the king or chief frequently requested the greater part or even the whole of what they might receive in return for it. That they should have improved in industry, or ad- vanced in civUization, under such a systera was irapos sible, and that they should under Such circumstances have tilled a sufficient quantity of ground to furnish supphes for the shipping is a matter of greater surprise than that they should not have cultivated more. The humUiating degradation to which it reduced the far mers, and the constant irritation of feelings to which this wretched system exposed thera, were not the only 102 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. evils that resulted from it. It naturally led the raatiras to regard their chiefs as enemies, and generated disaf fection to their administration. It also greatly dimin ished their resources, for under the discouragements resulting from constant liabiUty to plunder, the people were unable to furnish those supplies which they would otherwise have found it a satisfaction to render. _ This system of civil polity, disjointed and ill adapted as it was to answer any valuable purpose, was closely interwoven with their sanguinary idolatry, and sanc tioned by the authority of the gods. The king was not only raised to the head of this government, but h^ was considered as a sort of vicegerent to the supernatural powers presiding over the invisible world. Human sacrifices were offered at his inauguration ; and when ever any one, under the infiuence of the loss' he had sustained by plunder or other injury, spoke disrespect fuUy of his person and administration, not only Vas his life in danger, but huraan victims must be offered, to cleanse the land from the poUution it was supposed to have contracted. The intimate connexion between the government and their idolatiry occasioned the dissolution of the one with the abolition of the other ; and when the system of pagan worship was subverted, many of their ancient usages perished in its ruins. They remained for some years without any system or form of governraent, ex cepting the will of the king, to whora the inhabitants usually furnished liberal supplies of all that was neces sary for the maintenance of his household, and the accorapUshraent of his designs. The raatiras exercised tlie supreme authority in the divisions over which the king had placed them, But when circumstances occurred in which, under idolatry they would have acted according to their ancient cus tom, they felt erabarrassed. Many of the people, free in a great degree from exposure to seizure, and the more dreadful apprehension of being offered to the gods, evinced a disinclination to render the king the suppUes and support he needed. The sacrificing of human victims to the idols had been one of the most powerful engines in the hands of the governraent, the requisition fOr thera being always made by the ruler to whom the priests applied when it was pretended the gods required them : the king, there- UNORGANIZED POLITY. 103 fore, sent his herald to the petty chieftain, who selected the victims. An individual who had shown any raarked disaffection towards the government, or incurred the dis pleasure of the king and chiefs, was usuaUy chosen. The people knew this, and therefore rendered the most unhesitating obedience : but the subversion of idolatry having annihilated this feeling, raany, free frora the restraint it had imposed, seemed alraost to refuse lawful obedience, and to withhold rightful support. Their govemment continued in this unsettled state for four or five years ; during which the people brought provisions and supplies to the king, and furnished the accustomed articles for his establishraent, either accord ing to arrangements made among themselves, or in obedience to his requisitions. The superior and subor dinate rulers over the people endeavoured to preserve the peace of society, and promote the public welfare, by punishing offenders according to the nature of their crimes, but without any regular or uniform procedure. The only punishraent inflicted was banishment, and, in a few instances, seizure for theft. It was, however, evident that another systera raust be introducod, instead of that which, with the tabu and idolatry, had been abolished. It is a fact worthy of note, that although no people in the world could be raore vicious than they were prior to their renunciation of paganisra, yet such was the raoral influence of the precepts of Christianity on the community at large, and consequently on the con duct of raany who were Christians only by profession, that for some time crimes affecting the peace of society were but few. Theft, to which ever since their disco very they have been proverbially addicted, was rarely committed. It was not, however, to be expected that this state of things would be permanent; and after a few years, the force of example, aJ'd the restraining influence of the preceptive parts of Christian truth, began to dirainish on the minds of those over whora it had exerted no decisive ppwer, and who, in their altered behaviour, had rather foUowed popular sentiraent and practice than acted frora principle. When therefore this class of persons began to act raore according to their true character, the chiefs found it necessary to visit their delinquency with punishment ; and the wel fare of the nation required that measures should be 104 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. adppted for maintaining the order and peace of the comraunity. Having as a natipn erabraced Christianity; they were unanimous in desiring that their civil and judicial pro ceedings should be in perfect accordance with the spirit and principles of the Christian religion. Hence they were led to seek the advice of therr teachers, as to the means they should adopt for accomplishing this object. The missionaries invariably told thera that it was no part of their original design to attempt any change in their political and civU institutions, as such ; that these matters belonged to the chiefs and governors of the people, and not to the teachers of the reUgion of Jesus Christ. To this they generally replied, that under the forraer idolatrous systera they should have been pre pared to act in any emergency, but they were not fami liar with the application of the principles of Chris tianity, especially in reference to the punishment of crime. In compliance with these soUcitations, the mission aries illustrated the general principles of Scripture, that in all the public stations they sustained, they were to do unto others as they would that others should do unto them — that with regard to government, Christianity taught its disciples to fear God and honour the king — to render to Cesar the things whieh were Cesar's, as well as to God the things which were God's — that the power which existed was appointed of God — and that magistrates were for a terror to evil-doers, and a praise to them that do well. These general principles were presented and enforced as the grounds of proceeding in all affairs of a civil or political nature. The missionaries, though frequently appealed to by the people, generally left the determination of the raat ter to their own discretion, declining to identify thera selves with either party, in any of their differences. They promised, however, to the chiefs such assistance as they could render in the preparation of their code of laws, and constitution of government, but were ex ceedingly anxious that it should be the production of the king and chiefs; and not of themselves. They had hitherto avoided interfering with the government and politics of the people, and had never given even their advice, excepting when solicited by the chiefs. When the conduct of petty chiefs or others had affected their FIRST CODE OF LAWS. 105 own servants or persons in their employment, if they have taken any steps, it has been as raerabers of the coraraunity, and not as ministers of religion. After the introduction of Christianity, the chiefs were among the first to perceive that the sanguinary raodes of punishment to which they had been accustoraed were incorapatible with the spirit and precepts of the -gospel, and earnestly desired to substitute measures that should harmonize with the new order of things. The king applied for assistance in this matter, soon after the general change that took place in 1815. The mis sionaries advised him to call a general council of the chiefs, and consult with them on the plans most suitable to be adopted. Whether his recollection of the impro- pitious termination of former councils influenced him, or whether he was unwilUng to delegate any of that power to others with which heretofore he had been solely in vested, is uncertain ; but he objected to the assembling of the chiefs at that time, still requesting advice from the raissionaries. This they readily afforded, both as to the general principles of the British constitution, the decr larations of Scripture, and the practice of Christian na tions. Their own sentiraents, in reference to their duty at this tirae, will best appear from the foUowing extract of a public letter, bearing date July 2d, 1817. " During many years of our residence in these islands, we raost carefully avoided raeddling with their civil and political affairs, except in a few instances, where we endeavoured to proraote peace between contending par ties. At present, however, it appears almost irapossible for us, in every respect, to follow the sarae line of con duct. We have told the king and chiefs, that being strangers, and having come to their country as teachers of the word of the true God, and the way of salvation by Jesus Christ, we will have nothing further to do with their civil concerns than to give them good advice ; and with that view several letters have passed between us and the king. We have advised hira to call a^eneral raeeting of all the principal chiefs, and with their assist ance and approbation, adopt such laws and regulations as would tend to the good of the coraraunity, and the stability of his governraent ; and that in these things, if he desired it, we would give hira the best advice in our power, and inforra hira of what is contained in the Word E 3 106 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. of God, and also of the laws and customs of our own country, and other civilized nations." The first code of laws was that enacted in Tahiti in the year 1819 ; it was prepared by the king and a few of the chiefs, with the advice and direction ofthe mis sionaries, especiaUy Mr, Nott, whose prudence and caution cannot be too highly spoken of^ and by whom it was chiefly framed. The code was reraarkably sim ple and brief, including ijnly eighteen articles. It was not altogether such'- as the missionaries would have wished the nation to adopt, but it was perhaps better suited to the partial light the people at that time pos sessed, and to the pecuUar disposition of Pomare, He was exceedingly jealous of his rights and prerogatives, and unwilUng to admit the chiefs to a partic^atiou in his power. His will stUl continued to be law, in aU matters not included in their code ; and with regard to the revenue which the people were required to furnish for his use,, he would admit of no rule but his own ne cessities, and consequently continued to levy exactions as his ambition or commercial engagements might require. The missionaries would have regarded with higher satisfaction an improvement in the principles recog nised as the basis of the relation subsisting between the king, chiefs, and people, some division of the power of government — enactments proportioning the produce of the soU to be furnished for the king, and securing the reraainder to the cultivators. But having recom mended these points tp the consideration of the rulers, they did not think it their duty to express any dissatis faction with the ¦ code, imperfect as it was, and they uniformly avoided expressing any opinion which might weaken the pow^r' of the king, being desirous rather to afford him every faciUty in the settlement of the government of the country, than tp throw difflculties in his way. In the month of May, 1819, the king, and several thousands of the people from Tahiti and Eimeo, assem bled at Papaoa, for the purpose of attending the open ing of the;Royal Mission Chapel, and the promulgation of the new laws. The anniversary of the Tahitian Missionary Society being held at the same tirae, the missionaries from the several stations, in these two islands, were then at Papaoa. ENACTMENT OF LAWS. 107 The thirteenth day of the month was appointed for this solemn national transaction; and the spacious chapel which the king had recently erected was chosen as the edifice in which this important event should take place. It was thought no desecration of a building reared for public devotion, and soleranly appropriated to the worship of the Alraighty, and other purposes directly connected with the promotion of his praise, that the grave dni serious engagements by which the nation agreed to regulate their social intercourse should be ratified in a spot where they were led to expect a more than ordinary participation of the Divine benediction. During the forenoon, the chiefs and peo ple of Tahiti and Eimeo asserabled in the royal chapel, and about the raiddle of the day the kin^ and his attend ants entered. The raissionaries were also present — but, regarding it as a civil engagenjent, attended also as spectators. The king, however, requested Mr. Crook to solicit the Divine blessing on the object of the raeeting. He therefore read a suitable portion of the sacred volume, and implored the sanction of the King of kings upon the proceedings that were to fol low. Nothing could be more appropriate than thus ac knowledging the Power by whom kings reign, and seeking His blessing upon those engageraents by which their public conduct was to be regulated. The blessing of the Most High having been thus sought, the king, who had previously taken his station in the central pulpit, arose, and after viewing for a few moments the thousands of his subjects who were gathered round hira, coraraenced the interesting proceedings of the day, by addressing Tati, the brother and successor of the late Upufara, who was the leader of the idolatrous and rebel array defeated in Noveraber, 1815. " Tati," said the king, '-' what is your desire ? what can I do for you V Tati, who sat nearly opposite the pulpit, arose and said, " Those are what we want — the papers you hold in your hand— the laws ; give them to us, that we may have them in our hands, that vve may regard them, and do what is right." The king then addressed' hiraself to Utarai, the good chief of Te Oropaa, and in an affectionate manner said, " Utami, and what is your desire V He replied, " One thing only is desired by us all, that which Tati has expressed — the laws which you hold in your hand," The king then addressed 108 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Arahu, the chief of Eimeo, and Veve, the chief of Taiarabu, nearly in the same manner;! and they replied as the others had done. Pomare then proceeded to read and comraent upon the laws respecting murder, theft, trespass, stolen property, lost property, Sabbath- breaking, rebelUon, marriage, adultery, the judges, court-houses, &c., in eighteen articles. After reading and explaining the several particulars, he asked the chiefs if they approved of them. They repUed aloud, " We agree to them — we heartily agree to thera." The king then addressed the people, and desired thera, if they approved of the laws, to signify the same by hold ing up their right hands. This was unanimously done, with a remarkable rushing noise, owing to thousands of arms being lifted at once. When Pomare carae to the law on rebellion, stirring up war, &c., he seemed incUned to pass it over, but after a while proceeded. -At the conclusion of that article, Tati was not content with signifying his approbation in the usual way only, but, standing up, he caUed in a spirited manner to aU his people to lift up their hands again, even both hands, setting himself an example, which was universally foUowed. Thus all .the articles were passed and ap proved. The public business of the day was closed by Mr. Henry's offering a prayer unto Hira by whom princes decree judgment ; and the people retired to their re spective dwellings. - Pomare subsequently intimated his intention of ap' propriating Palmerstotfs Island as a place of banish ment for Tahitian convicts, and proposed to the rais sionaries to pubUsh his request that no vessel should reraove any who raight be thus exiled. The laws which the king read to the people were written by hiraself, and were the first written code that over existed in the islands ; he afterward wrote out in a fair, legible, and exceUent hand, a cppy for the press. Printed copies were distributed araong the people, but the ori ginal raanuscript, in the king's handwriting, signed by hiraself, is in the possession of the London Missionary Society. The laws were printed on a large sheet of paper, arid not only sent to every chief and raagistrate throughout both islands, but posted up in raost of the public places. The sentence tobe passed on individuals who should CAPITAL PUNISHMENTS. 109 be found guilty of many of the crimes prohibited by these laws was left to the discretion of the judge or magistrate ; but to several the penalty of death was annexed; and, only a few months after their enact ment, the sentence of capital punishment was passed on two individuals, whose names were Papahia and Horopae. They were inhabitants of the district of Atehuru, and were executed on the 25th of October, 1819, for atterapting to overturn the governraent. Pa pahia had been a distinguished warrior, and was in the very prime of life. He was a man of daring character and turbulent conduct. He came several tiraes lo ray house, during our residence at Eimeo ; and although in consequence of his restless and violent behaviour, I was not prepossessed in his favour, my personal ac quaintance raade rae feel additional interest in the melancholy fate of the first malefactor on whora the dreadful sentence of the law was inflicted. The lives of these unhappy men were not taken by thrusting a spear through the body, or beating out the brains with a club, or by decapitation, which were the former raodes of punishraent, but they were hanged on a cocoanut- tree, in a conspicuous part of the district. In the year 1821 a conspiracy was forraed to assassinate the king, and two raen, who were proceeding to the accoraplish ment of their murderous purpose, were apprehended, with others concerned in the plot. The names of the two leaders were Pori and Mariri. Sentence of death was passed upon thein, and they were hanged on a rude gaUows, formed by fastening a pole horizontally between two cocoanut-trees. These are the only exe cutions that have taken place in the islands. It is not probable that many will be thus punished. The mis sionaries interceded on behalf of the culprits, and secured a mitigation of punishment for the rest of the offenders. The judicial proceedings in the different districts of Tahiti were divested, a's much as possible, of all form ality ; and though some trifling irregularities, and slight embarrassments, as might be expected, were occasion ally experienced, among a people totally unaccustoraed to act in -these matters according to any prescribed form, yet, upon the whole, the administration of justice by the native magistrates was such as to give general 110 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. satisfaction. The following account by an eyewit ness* of their proceedings on one of these- occasions wiU not be uninteresting, " At the tirae appointed, a great raany people, of both sexes and all ages, assembled under some very fine trees near the queen's house, A smaU bench was brought for the two judges ; the rest either stood or sat upon the ground, forraing soraething less than a semi circle", "We were provided with low seats near the judges. The two prisoners were seated cross-legged upon the ground, under the shade of a small tree, about twenty paces in front of the judges. They were both ill-looking men, dressed in the graceful tiputa. When all was ready to begin, one of the judges arose, and addressed the prisoners at considerable length. He explained to them the accusation which brought them there, and read to them the law under which, if proved guilty, they would be punished. When he had finished, and called upon them to say whether it was true or not, one of them got up, and answered with great fluency, and good action. He maintained their innocence, and caUed a witness to confirra it. The witness very art fully turned his evidence to the account of the pris oners. Others also, in sorae way or other, favoured the accused, and the defendants were therefore dis charged frora want of evidence." On the 12th of May, 1820, a code of laws was unani raously and publicly adopted in Raiatea, and recognised as the basis of public justice by the chiefs and people of Tahaa, Borabora, and Maupiti. The substance of the Raiatean laws was copied frora those enacted by the government of Tahiti during the preceding year. They extended to twenty-five articles, irabodying several raost valuable enactments omitted by the Tahi tian code. The most iraportant of these was the insti tution of trial by jury. This was certainly the great est civil blessing the inhabitants of the Pacific had yet received ; and future generations' wiU cherish with grati tude the memory ot the raissionaries of Raiatea, at whose recommendation, and with whose advice, it was established by law in these islands, NaturaUy violent and raerciless under a sense of * Capt. G. C. Gambier, K. N, LAWS FOR HUAHINE. Ill injury, we often found them too severe towards offend ers ; and while we occasionally interceded en behalf of those whose punishmeut appeared greater than their crime, we lost no opportunity of conveying just and humane, as well as scriptural, ideas on matters of juris prudence, without, however, interfering with their pro ceedings, or countenancing the misdeeds of those we might recommend to mercy. The new laws had now been nearly three years estab lished in Tahiti and Eimeo. Those of Raiatea, Tahaa, and Borabora had also been for more than twelve raonths in operation among the inhabitants of these islands. The chiefs of Huahine had virtuaUy made the latter the basis of their adrainistration qf justice, but no code had yet been officially proraulgated. They had already applied to us for assistance in pre paring the laws for the islands under their dorainion. This we had cheerfully rendered to the best of our ability, at the same time recoraraending thera still to defer their public enactraents until they had delibe rately observed the effect of those already in force araong the inhabitants of the adjacent islands. It was also proper to obtain the sanction of the queen's sister, then residing at Tahiti, who is norainally the sovereign of Huahine, the governraent of the island having been forraerly presented to her by Mahine, the resident and hereditary chieftain. This grant, which transpired several years before any of the parties erabraced Chris tianity, has often occasioned inconvenience. The inter nal governraent of the island has always been main tained by the resident chiefs, but in all matters mate riaUy affecting the people, or their relation to the governments of other islands, it has been considered necessary, as a matter of etiquette, or courtesy at least, to consult Teriitaria ; and hence- it was thought desir able to submit the laws to her inspection, and receive her sanction. Though affecting only the resident chiefs and people, and maintained entirely by the authority of the former, they were to be promulgated in her narae, as weU as that of Mahine, and the other chiefs of the island. The introduction of new laws being a matter of importance to the nation, it was deemed suitable that a deputation frora the chiefs should pro ceed to Tahiti, for the purpose of receiving the queen's approval. It was also desirable that Mr, Barff or my^ ll'Z POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. self should accorapany this erabassage, that we might make inquiries of Mr. Nott, and others, relative to the adaptation of the laws in force there to the circurastances of the people, and might alter, if necessary, those pre pared for Huahine. CHAPTER VI. Pomare's proposed restrictions on barter rejected by the chiefs of the leevrard islands— Voyage to Eimeo — Departure for Tahiti— Danger during the night — Arrival at Border's Point — State of the settlement — Papeete — Mount Hope -Interview with the king — The laws revised — Approved by the queen — Arrival of the Hope from England — Influence of letters, &c. — Return to Eimeo— Embarkation for the leeward islands — A night at -sea— Appear ance of the heavens — Astronomy of ihe natives — Names ofthe stars — The Twins — Tradition of their origin — Arrival in Huahme. Early in 1821, the brig which had been purchased in New South Wales for Pomare arrived in Tahiti. Soon after this the king sent a messenger to the leeward islands, with a bundle of niaus, or emblems of royal authority, and a proposal to the chiefs that they should becorae joint proprietors, and furnish a required quantity of native produce, viz. pigs, arrow-root, and cocoanut oil, towards payraent for the vessel. The herald left his raessage and bundle of niaus at Huahine, in the narae of Teriitaria, and passed on to Raiatea. In a day or two afterward we learned that instructions had been sent down to the chiefs not to dispose of any of the above-mentioned articles, nor to allow the people to barter them to any ship, or even to the missionaries, but to reserve them for the vessel. We represented to the chiefs the injustice of not allowing every raan, pro vided he paid their just demands, to dispose of the fruits of his own industry ; arid they stated their intention that it should be so at Huahine, whatever restrictions might be imposed upon the people of Tahiti. The queen's sister, the norainal ruler of the island, residing at Tahiti, ' was influenced, they observed, by the advice and raea sures of Pomare, and often perplexed them by her directions. On the 14th of AprU, 1821, Pomare's messenger re turned from Raiatea, Tamatoa, the king of that island, VOYAGE TO EIMEO. 113 and the chiefs of those adjacent, had refused to receive the niaus, or to join Pomare in his commercial specula tions. They had at the sarae time agreed to unite and procure a vessel for theraselves, in which to trade from the islands to the colony of New South Wales, and had sent up a special raessenger, with a letter to the chiefs of Huahine, requesting thera to unite in the enterprise. A public meeting was convened, in which the proposi tions frora Pomare on the one hand, and of Tamatoa on the other, were freely discussed. The result was, that although all were more disposed to join the Raiatean than the Tahitian chiefs, they declined both for the present, and despatched the respective messengers to their superiors, with declarations to that effect. The wind, which had set in from the westward on the fourteenth, continued during the whole of the fifteenth, and, as it seemed tolerably steady, it was. proposed that our boat should be prepared for the voyage to Tahiti. It was also thought best that 1 should accompany Auna and Matapuupuu on their erabassy to the queen's sister. During the evening 1 waited on the chiefs, and took ray leave ; the native chieftains did the sarae ; and their final instructions were, to induce, if possible, Teriitaria to come and reside at Huahine ; but that, if she pre ferred reraaining at Tahiti, she should give up all inter ference with the government of the island, and delegate it to them, independently of all foreign control. The wind continuing to blow frora the westward through the night, early on the morning of the sixteenth we prepared for erabarkation. The boat was rather rude in appearance, being one I had frora necessity built, with the assistance of the natives, whUe residing in the island of Raiatea, in the early part of 1820. It was about thirty-six feet in length, and capable of carrying forty persons. The breeze increased in strength as the raorning began to dawn, and about daybreak we sailed from Fa-re harbour. - Auna, Matatore, and Matapuupuu were my companions, and our boat was raanned by about ten strong and active natives. As we were bound ing over the waves of the harbour, and entering upon the wide-spread bosora Of the Pacific, we lost the sprit of one of our raattiug-sails in the sea, and could only carry one sail. This circumstance, although it pre vented our proceeding so rapidly as we should otherwise have done, contributed perhaps to our safety, for the 114 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. wind was high and the sea rough. By noon we had entirely lost sight of Huahine, and about sunset we ob tained our first distant glance of the lofty peaks of Eimeo. The wind now blew what the natives caUed a strong toerau, or westerly gale, and the agitation of the sea was proportionahly increased. The inside of our open boat was, however, perfectly dry, and it appeared to shoot along, as the natives expressed it, upon the tops of the waves, until at length we heard, amid the stillness of the night, the welcome sound of the long heavy surf, rolling in solemn grandeur, and dashing in loud though distant roar upon the coral reefs. This, though adapted to inspire apprehension and terror in the minds of those unaccustoraed to navigate araong the islands, was a gladdening sourid to us, as it indicated our approach to land. We were several railes distant when we first heard the roaring of the surf; but, proceeding with rapidity, we soon came in sight of it. Sailing in a line parallel with the reef till we- carae to an opening, we entered Taloo or Opunohu harbour, and landed near the missionary settlement shortly after midnight, having sailed a distance of about one hundred miles in the space of twenty hours. The natives seldora evince much concern about their accommodations when voyaging or travelling. Fre quently, when landing for the night, they kindle a fire on the sea-beach, and, having cooked their bread-fruit or other provision, which they usually carry with thera, lie down in the boat, or on the sand by its side, and, spreading the sails as a tent, or wrapping theraselves in thera, substitute them for bed and bedding, and sleep corafortably tiU the raorning. Most of those, however, who were my fellow-voyagers on this occasion, had forraerly resided at this settleraent, on terras of friend ship with raany of the inhabitants. To the dwellings of these they repaired, while I pursued ray way up the vaUey to the residence of ray friend Mr. Piatt, whora I awoke frora his midnight repose, and, after receiving frora him a kind welcome and some refreshment, I retired to. rest till sunrise. During the forenoon of the 18th, our raen went tp the mountains, and cut down a new sprit for our sail, and prepared for the prosecution of the voyage. The favourable breeze had, however, been succeeded by a perfect calm, and the rays of the sun were exceedingly DANGER AT SEA. 115 oppressive. As it appeared probable that the men would have to row the whole of the way, we agreed to defer our departure till the evening. This sSforded rae an opportunity of attending public worship with the native Christians of the settlement, and addressing the con gregation assembled. The sun was approaching the western horizon when we took leave' of our friends, and erabarked to prosecute the reraaining parts of our voyage. We passed across the beautiful bay, which for. its size has justly been denorainated one of the finest in the world, and, con tinuing within the reefs to Maharepa, again sailed forth on the ocean, about eight o'clock in the evening. The exciteraent, watching, and fatigue of the pre ceding part of our voyage, having induced an exhaustion of strength and spirits, we had not advanced far upon the open sea before 1 becarae oppressed with a sensation of drowsiness, which I could not reraove.. During my voyages among the islands, I have passed many nights at sea with the natives in an open boat, and generally found them watchful and alert during the early hours of darkness, but wearied and sleepy towards morning ; and whenever I have felt rest necessary for myself, havQ usually taken it before midnight, that I might he raore vigilant when my companions should becorae drowsy. This was my purpose in the present instance. The wind had indeed ceased, but the surface of the sea was agitated with a quick and cross raotion ; the current was against us ; and it was uncertain how soon in the raorning we should reach Matavai, our port of destina tion in the island of Tahiti. I therefore gave Matapuu puu charge of the helra, which I had hitherto kept during the whole of the voyage, and, directing him to awake me in about an hour's time, wrapped myself in a cloak, and lay down upon the seat in the stern of the boat,' where, notwithstanding the motion of the sea, and the rattling and shaking occasioned by the movements of, the oars, I soon fell into a sound sleep. The refreshing and beneficial effects of my repose were, however, entirely neutralized by the sensations I experienced at its close. I cannot describe my emotions when I awoke and found it was broad daylight, and, turning to the helra, saw Matapuupuu fast asleep, with his hand still on the tiller ; and then looking forward along the boat, beheld every individual motioSess ; the 116 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. rowers leaning over their oars, the others stretched along the bottora of the boat, and every one in the most profound sleep. Before I attempted ttTawake any one I involuntarily looked for the island we had left: it was stiU in sight. I then looked on the opposite side, for that to which we were going : it was also in sight, but the lofty mountains rising at the head of Matavai were far to the north, and indicated that the port to which we were bound was many mfles behind us. In fact, we appeared to be about midway between Tahiti and Eiraeo, drifting to the southward, far away frora both, as fast as the current could bear us. FuUy sensible of our critical situation if the breeze which just began to ripple the surface of the water should increase, I instantly awoke my companions, and asked thera how they came aU to fall asleep together. They looked confused, on beholding the broad Ught of day, and replied that each had iraperceptibly faUen under the influence of sleep, without knowing that the others were in the same situation. Recollecting that I had in the first instance set them the exaraple, 1 could not much censure their conduct ; 1 therefore directed their attention to the mountains in the vicinity of Matavai and Papeete, or Wilks's Harbour, far in our rear, and, as Burder's Point was the nearest part of the coast, urged them to apply with vigour to their oars, that we might reach it before the wind becarae so strong as to arrest our progress. The raen, refreshed by their slumbers, which had been favoured by the undulating raotion of the boat on the water, broke a few cocoanuts, drank the railk, cheer fully grasped their oars, and puUed steadily towards the shore. After about flve hours' hard rowing, we reached the beach, and were cordially welcoraed by our friends Messrs. Darling and Bourne,, who resided at Burder's Point. In the afternoon, several of the natives, who had come with us to Tahiti, set out for Papara, to visit their friends, who had accompanied Mr. Davies from Huahine during the preceding year. 1 spent this and the following day at Burder's Point. The respect and affection manifested by the natives to wards their teachers was gratifying, and the general iraproveraent in the habits of the people, and the appear ance of the settleraent encouraging. Newly planted gardens and enclosures appeared in every direction: burder's POINT. 117 several good houses were finished ; some were plastered and thatched ; and others, though only in frarae, and presenting the appearance of raere skeletons of buildings, indicated a state of progressive improveraent. The public burying-ground, situated on the border of the settlement, was kept remarkably neat. The outline of the grave was defended by a curb, or border, of frag ments of coral planted in the ground, while the grave itself was covered with small pieces of white coral and shells, brought from the adjacent shore. The school was a good building ; and the chapel, erected near the ruins of the ancient marae, which I visited during my stay, was one of the most compact 1 had seen in the Georgian or Society Islands. The walls were fraraed and boarded ; the roof thatched witb fara, or palra-leaves. The floor was boarded, the pulpit and appendages reraarkably neat, and the whole area of the chapel filled with seats. It was also fitted up with a gallery, the first ever erected in the South Sea islands ; the gaUery, and other parts of the interior, having been finished under the direction and by the assistance of Mr. Darling, were neater, and more European in appearance, than any I had hitherto beheld. The advancement in civUization had not, however, been so striking or rapid at this station as at some others; but-the effects of its progress were such as to afford encourageraent, and to warrant the anticipation of its ultiraately extending throughout the entire popu lation of a district that had felt the ravages of war, and the deraoralization of paganisra, as rauch as any in the group. About ten in the raorning of the 21st we took leave of our friends at Burder's Point, and, after rowing about four hours between the reefs and the shore, reached Papeete, or Wilks's Harbour, where the queen and her sister were residing. On landing, the deputation from the Huahinean chiefs repaired to the abode of Teriitaria, and Matapuupuu deUvered their raessage. She replied, " that she was anxious to reraove to Huahine, and would return with them, if Pomare would allow her to leave Tahiti ; but said she would see thera again, and, before they returned, delivCT her final reply." On the brow of a hiU, forraing the comraenceraent of a range extending frora the vicinity of the shore to the lofty interior mountains, Mr. Crook formerly, at this 118 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. station, had erected his abode. Having waited on the queen, and other raembers of the royal faraily residing with her, I walked up this hill, which Mr. Crook had designated Mount Hope, and was happy to find himself and his family well. The situation he had selected for his abode, though inconvenient on account of its distance frora the settlement, and the fatigue induced by the ascent, has nevertheless pecuUar advantages ; the air is reraarkably pure, the temperature generally cooler than on the adjacent lovvlands, and the prospect delightful and extensive. With his agreeable faraily 1 passed the reraainder of this day and the following, which was the Sabbath. The congregation at the public religious services consisted of about five hundred hearers, who were in general attentive ; the singing was good, and the voices of the men better than I have heard elsewhere. The feraale voices are generally clear and distinct, and they sing well in most of the stations, but the voices of the raen are seldora raellow or sonorous. About ten o'clock on the following day I took leave of the friends at Mount Hope, and, accompanied by the chiefs from Huahine, proceeded to Matavai, where Pomare resided. It was near noon when we arrived, and, soon after landing, the raessengers waited upon the king, told him they had been sent by the chiefs of Hua hine, to request Teriitaria to return and reside there — and ejqpressed their conviction that he would approve of the same. He replied — Ua tia ia ia oti ra May e tai ai. " It is agreed — but let May be over, and then go ;" alluding to the annual raeetings held in the month of May. I took up ray abode with Mr. Nott, and spent the whole of the week in revising, with hira and one or two of the chiefs frora Huahine, the laws which had been prepared for that island. In this revision, we endeav oured to correct what was defective in those already pubUshed in Tahiti and Raiatea. This employraent oc cupied a nuraber of hours every day. It was a raatter of importance ; 1 was anxious that their laws should be fraraed with the utraost care, and felt desirous that we should avail ourselves of Mr. Nott's familiar acquaint ance with the character of the people, and his observa tion on the effect of the laws on the inhabitants of Tahiti and Eimeo. I wished also to consiUt with Mr. Davies ; LAWS APPROVED BY THE QUEEN. 119 but he was too far off. Mr. Nott stated that the great est defects he had observed arose from the power vested in the hands of the magistrate to punish according to his own discretion those who were convicted. In conse quence Of this, the sarae crirae was followed by differ ent punishments in different parts, or by different magis trates. In order to remedy this, the punishment to be inflicted was annexed to the prohibition of the offence. The laws, it was hoped, would by these means be less uncertain in their influence. Another subject of iraportance was the revenue of the governraent, and the raeans of support for the king and chiefs. On this subject, Poinare had refused to raake any regulations, preferring to deraand supplies frora the people as his necessities might require, rather than re ceive any regular proportion of the produce of the soil. Private property, therefore, was still insecure, and the industrious cultivator of the land was not sure of reap ing the fruits of his labour. This was remarkably raani fest at the present time, when the king of Tahiti, in his anxiety to pay for the vessel that had been purchased in his name, after making repeated applications to the chiefs for large nurabers of pigs, prohibited every indi vidual frora selling to a captain or other person any coraraodity he raight have for barter, but required them to bring all to him, in return for which he sometiraes gave thera articles of the raost trifling value. To rera edy this defect, several laws were added to those pre pared for the people of Huahine, and a cert'ain tax, soraewhat reserabUng a poll-tax, proposed, by which it was fixed what proportion of the produce of the island each individual should furnish for the use of the king, and also of the chief of the district in which he resided. The remainder was to be inviolably his own, for use or disposal. The treatraent of offenders between their apprehension and trial was also regulated. These were the principal additions raade to the Huahinean code. The trial by jury had been incorporated in the laws of Raiatea, The alterations were approved of by the chiefs who had corae frora Huahine, and were by thera shown to Teriitaria, who signified her entire satisfac tion in their being adopted as the laws of Huahine. At the same time she inforraed the chiefs that, after the approaching meetings, she intended to reraove to Hua hine ; but did not Wish thera on that account to defer 120 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the public enactraent of the laws whenever it should appear desirable. The most iraportant object of our visit being now ac- cpraplished, we retiirnedto Papeete, intending to pro ceed to Eimeo. About noon,, on the 28th, we embarked in our boat, hoisted our sails, and were on the point of leaving the shore, when a raessenger arrived with intel ligence that a vessel was approaching Matavai ; so that, instead of putting out to sea, our course was instantly directed thither. A brig of considerable size was ad vancing towards the harbour. W-ft-haUed her approach with joyful hopes that she would bring us , " News of human kind, Of friends and kindred, whom, perhaps, she held As visiters, that she might be the link- Connecting the fond fancy of far friendship." Meeting the vessel at the entrance of the bay, we found it was the Hope, of London, having Mr. and Mrs, Hayward, from England, and Mr, and Mrs, WUson, frora New South Wales, on board. As the vessel was under full sail, we could only greet their arrival by signal, and follow them to the harbour. They had, however, scarcely anchored, when we found ourselves alongside, and, ascending the deck, were happy to exchange our mutual congratulations. A nuraber of cattle, some be longing to the passengers, others sent as presents by Mr. Birnie to thte chiefs, having suffered much during the voyage, were speedily landed. After this, we ac companied -our friends to the shore, elated with the anticipated pleasure of intelUgence from home. In this respect we were not disappointed. A few letters which were at hand we received onboard, and the rest as soon as the boxes containing thera were opened. We broke the seals, skimraed the contents, and glanced at the signatures with no coramon feelings, reserving a raore careful perusal for a season of greater leisure. No opportunity equally favourable for receiving intel ligence frora England had occurred since" our arrival, Mr. Hayward had proceeded frora the islands to Eng land ; he had raet our friends and relatives there, and had been enabled to satisfy them in a variety of points, of which, though of confessedly minor iraportance, they were anxious to be informed. He had left them, and INFLUENCE OF LETTERS FROM HOME. 121 returned direct to us ; and the siraple fact that we were conversing with one who had traversed scenes long familiar, and vividly present to our recollections, and one who had mingled in the society of those dearest on earth to us, appeared to shorten the distance by which we were separated, and to remove the most formidable barriers to intercourse. We had a thousand questions to ask, and the evening was far too short for the answer of half our inquiries, or the perusal of our letters. Mingled and intense are the emotions with which a lonely sojourner in a distant and uncivilized part of the worid receives a packet from his native land. This is especially the case when the symbol of raourning ap pears on the exterior of any of his letters. The un folded sheet is soraetiraes put aside, as the eye, in its first glance over the lines, has been arrested by a sen tence conveying tidings of the departure of sorae dear and valued relative or friend. Notwithstanding the painful sensations occasioned by the knowledge of the fact that some dear object of the heart's attachment or esteem has been for some months consigned to the cheerless grave, the arrival of epistles from those we have left in our native land pro duces eraotions more powerful, and satisfactions raore elevated, than any other circurastance. Letters sent home by those in distant climes may convey all that undiminished affection prorapts, but they awaken no recollections connected with the locality, the corapan ions, and the circumstances of those by whom they are written. The scenes and society by which the writers are surrounded are foreign ; and, next to the feeling of curiosity, the greatest interest they excite arises from the connexion with those for whose welfare every concern is felt. Very different are the effects of a letter from horae to residents in a distant land. Every circurastance connected with it awakens emotion ; even the name ofthe place whence it is dated recalls a thou sand associations, of by-gone days. They seera to hear again the farailiar voice, and involuntarily raingle once more in iraagination and in feeUng with the circle which friendship and attachraent had often drawn round the domestic hearth ; and, while perusing letters frora horae, feel aU the force of the poet's exclaraation, "How fleet is a glance ofthe mind !" Vol. III.— F 122 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Next to the enjoyraent of the divine favour, letters frora friends are among the sources of sweetest solace^ and most cheering encouragement, to the sojourner in a foreign land. They excite a train of feeling which must be experienced to be understood. They cheer the spirits, often fainting under the effects pf an insa lubrious -cUme, the, sUerit prostration of- debiUtating sickness, or the opposition" and the trials of situation. They convey to his mind the gratifying conviction, that the individual to whom they are addressed is not for gotten by those in whose enjoyments and pursuits he once participated. This consideration not only revives his spirit, but im parts a fresh impetus to his raoveraents, and adds new energy to his efforts. Letters frora those abroad are gratifying to friends at horae ; and if they are so to those who participate the pleasures of sincere, enlight ened, and' glowing friendship, and who are encircled by a thousand sources of enjoyraent, how rauch more wel come raust they be to the distant and often lonely ab sentee, who, though surrounded by multitudes of huraan beings, is yet dooraed to perfect solitude, in respect to all rautual and reciprocal interchange of syrapathy in thought and feeling. Sure I ara that, did the friends of those who have gone to distant, barbarous, and often inhospitable lands know the alleviation of trials and the satisfaction of mind their epistles are adapted to produce, they would not be content with simply answering the letters they may receive, but would avail theraselves of every op portunity thus to exchange their syrapathies, and impart their pleasures to those who are cut off from the raany sources of enjoyment accessible to them. Did the friends of the exile abroad also know the painful reflections to which a disappointment in refer ence to expected intelligence gives birth, they would endeavour to spare him that distress. In his lonely, distant, and arduous labours, a missionary requires every solace, assistance, and support that his friends can im part. The coraraunications he receives frora his patrons are valuable, but they are frequently too rauch like let ters of business, or treat only "of general subjects. His coraraunications frora his relatives and friends are of a much more touching and interesting character. These, though they deeply affect, do not engross his soul ; he VALUE OF CORRESPONDENCE. 123 feels connected with and interested in the general ad vanceraent of the Redeeraer's kingdom, and the gigantic energies of those- institutions of Christian benevolence and enterprise which, under God, are Changing the world's raoral aspect. The reports, &c. of these insti tutions should be sent, and, in addition to these, a regu lar correspondence should be kept up with the auxiliary missionary societies with which he raay have been connected^ — the , Sabbath-schools in which he raay per- *iaps have been a teacher — but especially the Christian church of which he may have been a member. It should not be confined to a bare reply to letters, but should be regular and constant. Sometimes we have been six, nine, or twelve months on the island of Huahine, and during that, or a longer period, have seen no individual except our own two famUies and the natives. At length, the shout, E pahi ! epahi! "A ship! a ship !" has been heard from sorae of the lofty raountains near our dwelling. The inhab itants on the shore have caught the spirit-stirring sound, and " A ship ! a ship !" has heen echoed by stentorian or juvenile voices from one end of the valley to the other. Numbers flock to the projecting rocks, or the high promontories, others climb the cocoanut-tree, to obtain a glance of the desired object. On looking out over the wide-spread ocean to behold thc distant sail, our first attempt has been to discover how many masts she carried, -and then what colours she displayed ; and it is impossible to describe the sensations excited on such occasions, when the red British banner has waved in the breeze, as a tall vessel, under all her sweUing canvass, has moved towards our isolated abode. We have seldom reraained on shore till a vessel has entered the harbour, but have launched our boat, manned with native rowers, and, proceeding to meet the ship, have generally found ourselves alongside or on deck before she has reached the anchorage. " At the custom ary salutations, if we have learned that the vessel was (Urect from England, and, as was frequently the case, from London, our hopes have been proportionahly raised ; yet we have scarcely ventured to ask the captain if he has brought us anytidings, lest his reply in the negative should dispel the anticipations his arrival had awakened. If he has continued silent, we have inquired whether he had brought any supplies ; if he has answered F3 124 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. No, a pause has ensued ; after which we have inquired whether he had any letters ; and if to this the same reply has been returned, our disappointment has been as distressing as our former hopes had been exhUarating. We have reraarked that probably our friends in England did not know of his departure. This has been, we be lieve, the ordinary cause why so raany ships have arrived in the islands frora longland without bringing us any intelligence, except what we could gather frora two or three odd newspapers that have been lying abput the cabin. .Though it has been sorae alleviation to believe that, had our friends known of the conveyance, they would have written, yet the relief thus afforded is but trifling, corapared with the pain resulting from the ab sence of more satisfactory communications. Notwith standing the length of tirae we had often been without seeing an individual who spoke our native language, ex cepting in our own farailies, we would in general rather the vessel had not at that tirae arrived than that such arrival should have brought us no inteUigence. No disappointment, however, was experienced on the occasion in connexion with wbich these reraarks have been introduced. The Hope had brought a valuable supply of such articles as we needed; and Mr. and Mrs. Hayward, in addition to the letters of which they. were the bearers, afforded us much satisfaction by the accounts they gave of those of our friends whora they had seen. The coraraunications from England jrequired the united consideration of the missionaries ; and this, with other engageraents, detained us a week longer in Matavai.- On the 4th of May, we took our leave. Heavy rains detained us at Papeete until nearly dark, but the weather clearing soon after sunset, we again launched our boat, and, being favoured with a fair wind, arrived in Eiraeo before midnight. Anxious to reach Huahine by the Sabbath, the foUowing being the week in which the missionary anniversary occurred, which was on Saturday, we arose early the next morning, and prepared to de part : but the wind, being westerly, was contrary, and prevented us. About six in the morning, however, it changed to the north and eastward, and, continuing to blow steadily in that direction for an hour or two, we sailed from Eimeo about eight o'clock. The sea was agitated, and the swell continuing from the westward, after the breeze from that quarter had A NIGHT AT SEA. 125 subsided, was against us. The wind, though favour able, was but light, and our progress consequently slow. Our little bark, containing the portion of supplies from the Hope for the missionaries in the leeWard islands, was heavily laden These araounting to several tons, besides the nuraber of natives on board, not only kept the boat steady, but brought it considerably lower in -the water than 1 had seen it before. About midday we lost sight of Eimeo. -Continuing our course in a north westerly direction, soon after sunset, while the radiance of the departed luminary invested the horizon with splendour, we had the high satisfaction to behold the broken sumraits of whaf vve considered the Huahinean mountains, shown in beautiful though indistinct contrast with the brightness of the heavens and the sea. The duration of twilight within the tropics is always short ; hence the- rich sunset scene, which the peculiarity of our situation had rendered singular and imposing, was soon followed by the darkness of night, which in much less than an hour veiled surrounding objects. The glance, however, which we had obtained of the moun tains of Huahine was serviceable ahd cheering ; it con vinced us that the current had not swept us aside from our course, and it enabled us to fix satisfactorily the di rection in which to steer until morning. Although our rest had been but broken and short during the preceding night, our present situation repressed any desire for repose. Nothing can exceed the soleran stillness of a night at sea within the tropics, when the wind is light, and the water comparatively sraooth. Few periods and situa tions, amid the diversified circumstances of huraan life, are equally adapted to excite contemplation, or to im part more elevated conceptions, of the Divine .Being, and raore just irapressions of the insignificancy and de pendence of raan. In order to avoid the vertical rays of a tropical sun, and the painful effects of the reflec tion from the water, many of my voyages among the Georgian and Society Islands have been made during the night. At these periods 1 have often been involun tarily brought under the influence of a train of thought and feeUng pecuUar to the season and the situation, but never more powerfully so than on the present occasion. The night was moonless, but not dark. The stars in creased iu number and variety as the evening advanced, 126 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. until the whole firraaraent was overspread with lumina ries of every magnitude and brilUancy. The agitation of the sea had subsided, and the waters around us ap peared to unite with the indistinct though visible hori zon. In the heaven and the ocean, all powers of vision were lost, while the brUUant lights in the one being re flected from the surface of the other, gave a correspond ence to the appearance of both, and almost forced the iUusion on the mind that our Uttle bark was suspended ia the centre of two united hemispheres. The perfect quietude that surrounded us was equally irapressive. No objects were visible but the lamps of heaven, and the luminous appearances of the deep. The silence was only broken by the murmurs of the breeze passing through our matting sails, or the dashing of the spray from the bows of our boat, excepting at tiraes, when we heard, or fancied we heard, the blowing of a shoal of porpoises, or the raore alarraing sounds of a spouting whale. At a s.easori such-as this, when I have reflected on our actual situation, so far removed, in the event of any casualty, frora human observation and assistance, and preserved from certain death only by a few feet of thin board, which my own unskilful hands had nailed to gether, a sense of the wakeful care of the Almighty has alone afforded coraposure ; and when I have gazed on the raagnificent and boundless assejnblage of suns and worlds, whose rays have shed their lustre over the scene, and have reraerabered that they were formed, sustained, and controUed, in aU their complex and mighty movements, by Him on whose care I could alone rely, I have alraost involuntarily uttered the exclaraation of the Psalmist, " Lord, what is man, that thou art mindful of him !" , The contemplation of the heavenly bodies, although they exhibit the wisdom and majesty of- God, who "bringeth out their host by number, and calleth them all by naraes, by the greatness of his raight," impressed at the same time the conviction that I was far from home, and those scenes which in memory were asso ciated with a starlight evening in the land 1 had left. Many of the star^ which I had beheld in England were visible here : the consfelktions of the zodiac, the splen dours of Orion, and the raild twinkling' of the Pleiades, were seeii ; but the northern pple-star, the steady he^- THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE. 127 con of juvenile astronomical observation, the Great Bear, and rauch that was peculiar to a northern sky, were wanting. The effect of raental associations, con nected with the appearance of the heavens, is singular and impressive. During a voyage which I subsequently raade to the Sandwich Islands, raany a pleasant hour was spent in watching the rising of those luminaries of heaven which we had been accustoraed to behold in our native land, but which for many years had been invisi ble. — When the polar-star rose above the horizon, and Ursa Major, with.other famUiar constellations, appeared, we hailed thena as long absent friends ; and could not but feel that we were nearer England than when we left Tahiti, siraply from beholding the stars that had enlivened our evening excursions at home. But although in our present voyage none of these ap peared, and the southern hemisphere is less brUliant than that of the north, it exhibited much to attract at tention. The stars in the Fish, the Ship, and the Centaur, the nebulee or Magellanic clouds, and, above all others, Crux, or " Cross of the South," are all pecuUar to this part of the heavens. This latter constellation is one of the most reraarkable in the southern hemisphere. The two stars forming the longest part, having nearly the. sarae right ascension, it appears erect when in the zenith, and thus furnishes a nightly index to the flight of time, and a raeraento to the raost subUme feelings of grateful devotion- " With my fellow-voyagers I could enter iuto nothing like reciprocally interesting conversation on these sub jects. Their legends of the nature and origin of the stars were absurd and fabulous;' and my atterapts to explain the raagnitude, distances, or raovernents of the heavenly bodies appeared to thera uninteUigible — Their " souls proud science never taught to stray Far as the solar walk or Milky-way." ' The natives of the islands were, however, accus toraed in some degree to notice the appearance and position of the stars, especiaUy at sea. These were their only guides in' steering their fragile barks across the deep. When setting out ona voyage, some particu lar star or constellation was selected as their guide in the night. This they called their aveia, and-by this 128 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. name they now designate the compass, because it answers the sarae purpose. The Pleiades were a fa vourite aveia with their sailors, and by them, in the present voyage, we steered during, the night. We had, indeed, a lantern and a compass in the boat, but, being a light ship's compass, it was of little service. Althougji the Polynesians were destitute of all correct knowledge of the sciences, the first principles of which have been recently taught-iri the academy more regu larly than they had heretofore been, they had what might, be called a rude system of astronomy. They possessed more than one raethod of cemputing time ; and their extensive use of numbers is astonishing, when we consider that their computations were purely efforts of raind, unassisted by books or figures. Their ideas, as might naturaU;^ be expected, were fabulous in the' extrerae. They imagined that the sea which surrounded their islands was a level plane, and that- at the visible horizon, or some distance beyond it, the sky, or rai, joined the ocean, enclosing as with an arch, or hoUow cone, the islands in tbe immediate vicinity^ They were acquainted with other islands, as Nuuhiva, or the Marquesas, Vaihi, or the. Sandwich Isl ands, Tongatabu, or. the Friendly Islands. The naraes of these occurred in their traditions or songs.- Sub sequently, too, they had heard of Beritani, or Britain, Paniola, or Spain, &c. ; but they imagined that each of tKese had a distinct atmosphere, and was enclosed in the sarae manner as they thought the heavens sur rounded their own islands. Hence they spoke of for eigners as those who came from behind the sky, or from the other side of what they considered the sky of their part of the world. What their opinions were as to the material of the heaven to which they gave such definite 'boundaries I could never learn ; but, according to their mythology, there was a series of celestial strata, or tua, ten in num ber, each stratum, being the abode of spirits or gods, whose elevation was regulated by their rank or powers ; the tenth, or last heaven, which was perfect darkness, being caUed te rai haamamaQf tane, and being the abode of the first class only. ^ We often experienced a degree of confusion in our ideas connected with their use of the terra ^o, "night or darkness, and its various compounds. They usually, ASTRONOMY OF THE NATIVES. 129 but not invariably, spoke of the region of night as i raro, or below. In this instance, in describing the highest heaven, the purest region, they spoke of it also as the po. After describing the nine" heavens, or stratura of clouds or light, inhabited by the different orders of in ferior deities, they represent the tenth, or most reraote from the earth, and the abode of the principal gods, as te rai haamama no tane, &e.- — the opening or unfolding to the po, or perpetual darkness. From this raode of rep resentation, it appears that the islanders imagined the universe to- be' cHaotic, and that in its vast imraensity their islands and ocean, with the sky arching over thera, were enclosed, and that below the foundation of the earth, on which they stood, and above the firmament over their heads, this po, or darkness, prevailed. WitU respect to the origin of the sun, which they formerly called Vi?, and more recently mahana, sorae of their traditions State that it was the offspring of the gods, and was itself an animated being ; others, that it was made by Taaroa. The latter supposed it to be a substance resembling fire. The people imagined that it sank every evening into the sea, and passed, during the night, by some submarine passage, from west to east, where it rose again from the sea in the raorning; In sorae of the islands, the expression for the setting of the sun is, the falling of the sun into the sea. On one occasion, when some of the natives were asked whither the sun went, they said, into the sea. On being asked, further, what prevented its extinction, they said they did not know. It was then inquired, " How do you know that it falls into the sea at aU'! Did you ever see it V They said, no, but sorae people of Borabora, or Maupiti, the most western islands, had once heard the hissing occasioned by its plunging into the ocean. One of the raost _singular of their traditions respect. ing the sun deserves attention, from the slight analogy it bears to a fact recorded in Jewish history. It is re lated that Maui, an ancient priest or chief, was building a marae, or temple, which it was necessary to finish before the close of the day ; but, perceiving the sun was declining, and that it was likely to sink before thework was finished, he seized the sun by his rays, bound them with a cord to the marae, or an adjacent tree, and then prosecuted his work till the marae was corapleted, the sun remaining stationary during the whole period. I F3 130 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. refrain frora all coraraent on this singular traditioji, which was almost universally received in the islands. Their ideas of the raoon, which they called avae, or marama, were as fabulous as those they entertamed of the sun. Some supposed the moon was the wife of the sun; others, that, it was a beautiful country, in which the aoa grew. I am not aware that they rendered divine horaage either to the sun or moon — theirs was a farless rational and innocent system than the worship of the host of heaven: they, however, supposed' the moon to be subject to tjie influence of the spiritual beings with whom their mythplogy 'taught thera to people the visible creation ; and to" the anger of those spirits they were -accustoraed to attribute an eclipse. During an eclipse, the mpon is said to be natua, bitten or pinched, as well as swallowed. The stars, which they call /e*ia Or/eto, were by sorae considered as .the children of the sun and raoon; by others, the progeny of a principal star. They are how ever generaUy suppose.d'to be irihabited by spirits of the departed, or to be the spirits of human beings, sev eral principal stars being designated bythe names of distinguished raen. The phenomenon called a shooting star they supposed to be the. ffight of a spirit, and an oraen of the birth of a great prince. Many of the con stellations, and more of the single stars, have distinct names. Mars they call fetia ura, red star. The morn- - ing star they call fetia ap, star of day ; or horo poipoi, forerunner of morning, and the evening star Taurua o hiti ite a hiahi, twUight-rising Taurua. The Pleiades they call matarn, small eyes. The tiebulae near the southern pole, caUed the Magellanic clouds, are denorai nated mafm, mist or vapour, and are distinguished by the terras upper and under, one being above, the other below. The bright line of light occasioned by-innumer-' able nurabers of reraote stars, and -called the_ via lactea, or Milky-way, they denominated the long blue cloud- eating shark. But one of the most remarkable facts is, that the consteUation which in Europe is called the Twins is so.named by them ; only, instead of denorai- nating the two, stars Castor and Pollux, they caU them Pipiri and ^ehua, or na ainanu, the two ainanus ; -and to distinguish the one from the other, ainanu above, and ainanu below^ The foUowing, which is the native legend of their THE EARTH SUPPOSED STATIONARY. 131 origin, is amusing. The father went by torch-light to fish for the raarara or flying-fish, and having succeeded, returned tp his house. His two children,Pipiri and Re- hua, were in their beds, but not asleep. The raother said, 1 wiU go and awake the children (that they may partake). Let thera not be awaked tiU morning, said the father ; are children awakened at night"'! By-and-by they will be desiring their fopd, even now perhaps they know of it.. Cups were filled with salt-water for each of the children. When the fish was dressed, the parents sat down to eat (not .in thfi house, but in the open air, or under a distinct roof close by). The children, who over-heard what was passing, thought, when they are satisfied, perhaps they will bring ours. As their parents sat, the mother said, I will carry this, behold it is cooked. The father objected. The children broke through the back part of the house, and came and stood on a stone (since called the stone whence the ainanu* fled). The parents went into the house, and looked anxiously for the children, but they were not. I said 1 would go and awake the children, exclaimed the mother, and behold they are not here, but are gone. The parents saw the children,'and pursued to seize them ; but the children, the boy first and his sister after him, flew up to the skies. The end of their giiyies being towards the earth, the parents took hold of them, and all were carried to the sky, and becarae stars.' Like raost uninforraed .persons, they supposed the earth was stationary, being borne on the shoulders of a god, fixed upon a rock, which they called the rock of foundation supported by piUars, and that the sun, moon, and stars moved frora one side Of the arChed heavens to the other. When we at first endeavoured to impart to them more correct ideas of astronoray, and exhibited a terrestrial globe, 'explanatory of the shape of our earth, and iUustrative of that of the raoon, of the planets, and other heavenly bodies, they were greatly surprised ; but when we called their attention to a celestial globe, and represented to them the relative position of the heavenly bodies, and explained the motion of the planets of our systera round the sun, they were at first invariably skeptical. It could not possibly be, they said, that the earth went round, as all things reraained stationary * Aiuatiu signifies to desire or long for any particular kind of food. 132 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. during the twenty-four hours' ; which would hot be the fact if the earth on which they stood moved, Fre- quently they have said. If such was the fact, when our beds were turned downwards w,e sho'uld aU faU off, and all our vessels of food, &c, would be upset or lost. Finding, however, that we persevered in the expression of our sentiments to the contrary, they would sometimes remark, " We believe it, because you say so, but we cannot understand it," These observations were made only when the subject was first brought under their notice. The intelligent amon^- them now entertain more consistent views. , Araong the Hervey Islands, they worshipped a god of thunder ; but he does not appear to have been an object of great terror to any of thera. The thunder was sup posed to be produced by the clapping of his wings. The ignis fatuus they considered as one of their most power ful gods, proceeding, in his tutelary visitations, frora one marae to another. But it is now high time to return frora this apparently long digression, wjiich, though soraewhat diffuse, has an iraraediate bearing on the astronoraical knowledge and the nautical acquirements of these islanders, and bring our voyage to its termination. The wind being light but fair tlirough the night, and the sea pleasantly smooth, we kept on our course till the dawn of morning began to appear, and when the day broke had the satisfaction of beholding the island of Huahine at no very great distance, and imraediately before us. We approached on the eastern side, but the wind being unfavourable for sailing to the -settleraent, we stood towards the shore. When we found ourselves within half a mile of the reef, we lowered our sailsj and mamung the oars, rowed round the northern point of the island. ^ By eight o'clock on the 5th of May, we entered Fa-ire harbour, and, on our landing, had the hap piness to find our families and friends weU. It was the Sabbath, and we repaired with gratitude fo the house of God, to render our acknowledgments for pre servation. PROMULGATION OF THE LAWS. 133 CHAPTER VII. Promulgation of the new code of laws in Huahine — Literal translation of tbe lawe on murder — Theft— Trespass — Stolen property — Lost properly — Bar ter — Sabbath-breakitlg— Rebellion — Bigamy, &6.— Divorce, &c.— Marriage — False accusation — Drunkenness — Dogs — Pigs — Conspiracy — Confessions — Revenue for the king and chiefs— ^Tattooing — Voyaging— Judges and ma gistrates — Regulations for judges, and trial by jury — Messengers or peace- olllcers — Manner of conducting public trials — Character of tile Huahinean code— Reasons for dissuading from capital punishments — Omission of oaths — Remarks on the dififerent enactments^Subsequent amendments and en actments relative to the fisheries — Landmatks-^Land rendered freehold property — First Tahitian p,arliament — Regulations.relating to seamen desert ing their vessels — Publicity of trials — Beneficial eflects of the laws. The laws and regulations which had received the sanction of Teriitaria at Tahiti were approved by the chiefs of Huahine, at a public national assembly held in the raonth of May, 1822. Maraae, a leading raatira, re questing that the laws might be- enacted, his request was acceded to, and, after sorae sUght. modifications, they were promulgated in Huahine, and Sir Charles Sanders's Island, under the authority of the queen, gov ernors, and chiefs. They were subsequently printed, and circulated in every part of the islands. In a letter which Mr. Barff transmitted with a printed copy, speaking of the laws, he remarks, " You -will find them, in every material point, the same as when you left the islands." I insert a literal translation of this code, not because it vvas the last promulgated, nor that I consider it superior in every respect to those by which it 'was preceded, but because it was adopted bythe pepple with whom I was raost intiraately connected, and received a greater degree of the attention of my colleague and myself than any of the others. It might, perhaps, have been abridged, or a mere enuraeration of the laws might have furnished all the information that is interesting ; yet the first code of laws adopted, written, and printed among a people who, but a few years before, were ignorant heathen, and la\vless savages, is a docuraent so iraportant in the history Of the people, as to justify its entire insertion: The title is II Ture na Huahine : 134 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. " A Law,* or Code of Laws, for Huahine, caused to grow in the govemraent or reign of Teriitaria, Hautia, and Mahine, subordinate (rulers)" and the imprint is — " Huahine, printed at the Mission Press, 1823." The following is the Introduction iraraediately after the names of the queen and two principal chiefs — "From the favour of God, we have our govemment. Peace to you (People) of Huahine. Literal Translation of the Laws of Huahine and Sir Charles Sanders's Island. I. CONC-ERNING MdEDER. If parents murder their infants, or children unborn, if not the parents but the relatives, if not them, a stranger, or any person who shall wantonly commit murder, shall be punished — shall be transported to a distant land, uninhabited by men — such (a land) as Palmerston's Island. There shall (such crlmuials) be left until they die, and shall never be brought back. . IL Concernino Theft. If a man steal one pig, four shall he bring as a recompense ; fbr the owner of the pig two, for the king two. If he have iio pigs, two single canoes, for the owner of the pig one, for the king one. If (he have) no canoes, bales or bundles of native cloth, two of them, if the tusks of the pig were growing up out of its mouth.f Each bale shall contain one hundred fathoms (200 yards) of cloth, four yards wide. If a half-grown pig, five fathoms. If a small pig, twenty fathoms in the bale. For the owner of the pig one half, and for the king the other. If he. have no cloth, arrow-root. If the pig stolen was a large one, forty measures.^: For a half-grown pig twenty measures, and for a smkllope ten. , For the- owner of the pig one part, forthe king the other. Let the arrow-root of the king, and the owner of the pig he equal. If not arrow-loot, some other property. Thus let every thing stolen be paid for. Let fourfold be re turned as a recompense, double for the king, and double for the ownei:. If he (the thief) have no property, let him be set to work on the lands of the person he' has robbed. If he refuse, his land shall be the king's', and he' shall wander on the road^ for an unlimited period. If the king restore him, he shall return * There is no word in their language for law. The Hebrew-word has been introduced, as according wilh the genius and idiom of Tahitian better than any other. f A full-grown hog, ofthe largest size, is thus denominated, i A measure contains five or six pounds weight. ^ The figurative term for banishinent. NEW CODE OF LAWS. 133 to hia land, if not (thus) restored he shall not return. The iiiagi.strates or judges shall award the punishment annexed to this crime in the hiws, and that only. The judge Shall not demand the value of the property from the relatives of the thief." To this law, in the revision of the laws which took place in 1826, two or three particulars were added ; one increasing the punishment with the repetition of the crirae, and another expressly referring to those depreda tions in which burglary was coraraitted and a chest or box broken open. Ill, Relating to Figs. If a pig enters a garden, and destroys the produce, let no recompense be required, because of the badness of the fence he entered. If stones are thrown at a pig, and it be bruised, maimed, or killed, the man thus injuring it shall take it, and fumish one equal in size," which he shall take to the owner of the pig killed or injured. If he has no pig, he shall take some other property as a compensation. For a large pig, twenty measures of arrow root, and for a smaller one ten. If pot arrow-root, cocoanut oil, as many bamboo canes full as measures of arrow-root would have been required. If not (this) personal labour, for a large pig he shall make twenty fathoms of fencing, for a small one five, for the owner of the pig killed. If it be a good fence, and is broken (through the hunger or obstinacy of the pig), and the produce is destroyed, the pig shall not be killed, but tied up, and the raagistrate shall appoint the recompense the proprietor of the garden shall receive. The owner also shall mend the brokea fence. IV, CoNCEENING StOLEN GoODS OK PrOPERTV. If a man attempting to steal property obtains it, and sells it to another, and the purchaser. knew it to be stolen property which he bought — if he does not raake if known, but keeps it a secret, he also is ,a thief ; and as is thethief's, such shall be his pun ishment. Every person concealing property stolen by another, knowing it to be stolen, is also a thief; and as is the thief's, such shall be his punishment.' V. Concerning Lost Property. When an article that has been lost is discovered hy any one, and thfe owner is known to the iinder, the property shall be taken to the person to whom it belongs. But if such property be concealed, when the iinder knew to whom it belonged, Etnd yet hid it, he also is a thief; and that his punishment be eqoEtl tp that of a thief is right. 136 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. VI. Concerning Bdting and Selling, or Barter. When a man buys or exchanges goods, let the agreement be deliberately and fairly madei. When the bargain is finally and satisfactorily made, if one retains his (the article received)^ and the other taies away his (the article given), but after a short season returns it, the other (person) shall hot take it agajn, un less he desires to do so ; if agreeable to him to take it, it Is with - himself. If it he an article the damage.or defects of which were not perceived at the time of exchanging, but after he had taken it to his house were dispovered, itis right that it be returned ; but if the defects were known at the time of bartering, and when taken to the house were reconsidered, and then returned, it shall not be received. VII. Concerning the Disregard of the Sabbath. For a man to work on the Sabbath is a great crime before God, .Work that cannot be deferred, such as dressing food when a sick person desires warm or fresh food, this it is right to do; but not such work as erecting houses,' building canoes, cultivating land, catching fish, and .every other employment" that can be deferred; Let none travel about to a long distance on the Sabbath. For those who desire to hear a preacher, on the day of food (the preceding day) it is proper to travel. If incon venient to journey on the preceding day, it is proper to travel on the Sabbath (to attend, pubhc worship) ; but not to wander about to a great distance (to different villages) on the Sabbath, The individual who shall persist in following these prohibited occupations shall be warned by the magistrates not to do so ; but if he vvill not regard, he shall be set td work, such as making a piece of road fifty fathoms long,- ajid two fathoms-wide. If, after this, he work again on the Sabbath, let it be one furlong, VIII, Concerning Rebellion, ok Stirring up War, The man who shall cause war tc grow, shall setretly circulate false reports, shall seci-etly alienate the affections of the people from their lawful sovereign, or employ any other means for ac tually promoting rebellion, the inan who acts thus shall be brought to trial ; and if convicted of stirring up rebellion, he shall be sent to his o'wn district or island, and if he there again stir up rebeUion, his sentence shall be a furlong of road. If he repeat the offence, he shall be banished to some distant island, such as Palmerston's, and shall return only at the will or pleas ure of the king. IX, Reqarding' Bigamy. It is not proper that one husband should have two wives, nor that one wife should have two husbands. In reference to tha NEW CODE OF LAWS. 137 man who may have had two wives from a state of heathenisul, let nothing be said, but let it remain ; but if one of his wives die and the other remain, he shall not have two again. When a man obstinately persists in taking another wife, the magistr.ite shall cause his second wife to be separated from him ; and shall adjudge to bQth labour as a punishment. The man shall make a piece of road forty fathoms long, and two fathoms wide : and the woman shall make two floor-mats ; if not these, four wearing mats ; half for the king, and half for the governor (of the dis trict), X. Concerning a Wife formerly fojisaken. The man, who, in a state of heathenism, fqrsook his wife and married another woman, shall not return to his, former wife, neither shall the wife (having married another husband) return to the husband she forsook when in a state of heathenism. — The man or the vvoman that shall persist fo return shall be punished ; .the punishment adjudged shall be similar to that which is annexed to the breach of.the IXth l5,w. XI, Concerning Married Women and Married Men. This law respects the crime of adultery* [It is unnecessary to give the details of its enactments ; . it requires compensation in property for the offended party, , and prohibits the offenders from marrying during the life of the injured individuals.] ^ XII. Concerning (Divorce) Potting away Husbands, and Putting away Wives. That a man should put away his wife, who has not been un faithful td him, is wrong. The magistrates shall admonish such a one that he receive his wife again. If he will not regard the admonition, let him be punished with labour till the day that he will return to his wife. If he is obstinate, and will not return, then they sh^U both remain till one of them die ; the husband shall not marry another wife. The woman, also, who shall for sake, or put away her husband without cause, the above is the regulation with regard to such. But if a man put away his wife on account of her ^eat anger (violent temper), and for her bad behaviour, such man put (her) away, the magistrates shall admonish the wife aud the husband that they live together ; but if they are perverse, they shall remain ; the wife shall not take another husband, andthe husband shall not take another wife. They shall also be adjudged to labour till theyUve together again. The husband's work shall be on the road or the plantation. The wife shall perform such work as weaving mats or beating cloth. For the king one part, and for the govemor the other part, of the work they shall do. 138 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. XIII. Concerning the Not Making Provision for the Support of thb Wife, If a man does not provide food for his own wife, butafflicts her with hunger, the magistrate shall admonish such a husband that he behave not thus ; but if he will not hear thsir counsel, and his wife, on account of this evil treatment, (she) leave, let him be sentenced to labour (if not a weak and sickly man) until the day that he will behave kindly to his w;ife. The work shall be such as making a road, or erecting a fence for the king and the governor. Xlv, Concerning Marriage. Marriage is an agreement between two persons, one ifaaii and one woman, that they will be united in marriage. It must not be with a brother or a sistei, but with a distant relation or a stranger, that a persori may properly (lawfully) marry. The marriage ceremony shall be performed by a missionary, or magistrate. Those purposing to marry shall mqke the same known unto a missionary, or-to a magistrate ; and the mission ary (or magistrate) shall cause it to be intimated to the people, that the propriety (of it) may be known; Perhaps there may be some cause that would- render it improper for them to marry ; if not, then thfey may marry ,^ This is the evil (that would render it unlawful): perhaps the man may have for saken' his wife in some island or country, and may have travelled to another land, deceitfully to marry. So also it maybe with the wife, and is also the regulation. Therefore shall the missionary request the people, if they know of evil con duct in any other land, that would render it unlawful, to make it knowu to him ; then shall the marriage not take place. But if there be no evil (that would render it unlawful) then they may marry. On the day of assembling' for- worship, -the missionary shall publish this word — he shall then say unto all the people, " Such a one and such a one desire or propose to be united in marriage." The people will then seek, or inquire, if there be any just cause why they should not live together. When the day arrives for the celebration of marriage, let per sons also come as witnesses. The missionary shall then direct ithe man to take the right hand of the woman, when he shall say unto him, " Will (or do) you take this woman to be your lawful wife, will you faithfully regard her alone (as your wife) until death?" Then shall the man answer, "Yes." The mis sionary shall now direct the woman to take the man by the right hand, and shall ask her, "Will (or do) you take this man to be your lawful husband, wilt you be obedient unto him, will you faithfully regard him alone (as your husband until death) 1" Then shall the woman answer, " Yes." .After this, the missionary shall declare unto all the people, NEW CODE OF LAWS. 139 " These two persons have become truly (or lawfully) man and wife, in the presence of God and man." The register of the marriage shall be written by the missionary in the marriage book, and signed by himself, the parties, and the witnesses. Thus shall marriage be solemnized. Let none become raan and wife secretly ; it is a crime. XV. Concerning False Accusation. The man who shall falsely accuse another before a magis trate, with intent to have the accused person brought to trial, or the man who shall falsely come as a witness, it being his inten tion or purpose in giving false -evidence that the accused may be convicted or punished : if his. accusation or evidence is proved to be false, the penalty that would have been adjudged to .the accused (had he, been found guilty) shall be transferred to such false-accuser. , XVI. Unnatcrail Crime. This law refers to a crime for the prohibition of which per petual banishment, or incessant hard labour for seven years, is annex'd as the punishment of those who shall be guilty of its perpetratii'-i. The XVIIlh regards Seduction — the XVIIIth Rape— and the XlXth Fornication, ; the punishment annexed to the com mission of these crimes is, hard labour for a specified period. XX. Concerning Drunkenness. If a man drinks spirits till he becomes intoxicated (the literal rendering would be poisoned), and is then troublesome or mis chievous, the magistrates shall cause him to be bound or con fined ; and when the effects of the drink have subsided, shall admonish him not to offend again. But if he be obstinate in drinking spirits, and when intoxicated becomes mischievous, let him be brought before the magistrate, and sentenced to labour, such as road-making, five fathoms in.length, and two in breadth. If not with this, with a plantation fence, fifty fathoms long. If it be a woman that is guilty of this crime, she shall plait two large mats, one for the king, and the other for the governor of the district ; or make four hibiscus mats, two for the king, and two for the governor ; or fortj fathoms of native cloth, twenty for the king, and twenty for the .governor, ' XXI. Damage done by Dogs or Hogs. Concerning dogs accustomed to steal or bite, and pigs which bite or rend whatever may come in their way. When a dog steals food secretly, and is jiddicted to the practice of devouring young pigs, kids, or goats, fowls, or any other small kinds of 140 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. property, the owner of the dog shall make restitution. If ^ pig has been devoured, a pig shall he retumi as a recompense ; or a fowl, a fowl shall be returned. That which is returned shall he equal to that which has been destroyed. He shall also kill such dog. But if the owner persists in keeping such dog, fourfold shall he return as a remunefation for, all it destroys; twofold (half) for the king, and twofold (half) for the owner of the property destroyed. A dOg also addicted to the habit of biting children shall be killed. The man who knows that he has a savage or biting dog, and refuses to kill it (after having been by tlie magistrate requested to do so), if a child be bitten by such dog, the dog shall be killed, and its owner punished with labour, for persisting in keeping such a mischievous dog. The punishment specified in the XXth law shall be adjudged to him. Hogs also accu-stomed to devour young or sucking pigs, kids, or fowls, and accustomed to bite or attack children, shall be re raoved to ajiothei place, or killed. If the owner be obstinate; and will neither remove nor kill the pig, after having been ad^ monished by the magistrates, they shall kill the hog, and punish the owner with labour, for obstinately keeping such a da-ngerous hog. His punishment' shall b^ such as that specified in the XXth law. XXIL Concerning Wild or Stray Pigs. There are no pigs withoiit owners. . No one shall hunt pigs on the mountains, or in the valleys, under the pretext that they are without owners. The wild pigs in the woods (or ravines) whose owners are not known belong to the people of the vajf ley. When the original proprietor, is known, though the pigs may have become wiljl, they are still his. If one of such pigs be destroyed (or eaten), it shall be paid for; the parties who took it shall make restitution with a pig equal in size to that which has been destroyed. The man who is obstinate in hunt ing pigs on the mountains or in the vaUeys, .on the pretext that they are pigs without owners, he is the same as a thief; and as is the thief's such also (shall be) his punishment — that (which is) written in the lid law. XXIII. Concerning Conspiracy. When one man knows that another man is planning or pur posing to murder the king, or is devising to kill any other per son, or is planning to st|eal property, or is purposing to commit any other crime ; if he keep such counsel or deed planned in his own heart, and does not reveal it, or, when he is questioned, he conceals, and does not fully declare what he knows, he is like such men, aud his punishment shall be equal td that adjudged to those who have engaged in such conspiracy, [or criminal design). NEW CODE OF LAWS. 141 XXIV. Concerning the Man who makes known. If a number of persons shall form their plans — if two in their plan, then two ; if three, then three ; if ten, then ten — if, when they have devised the commission of any crime, one of their number shall ga to the magistrate, and shall fully disclose unto him the purpose and plan formed (if he be not the foundation of that combination, if, he be not the person who [first] devised it), that man shall not be punished. But those who do not con fess shall receive judgment, XXV. Concerning the unauthorized Climbing for Food. Climb not, unauthorized, another person's tree for food ; the man who does this is criminal. To beg, to ask explicitly the owner of the laiid (is right). The man who steals food in a garden, or by the side of the house, takes that which is not given bythe owner bf the land. If the proprietor of the land desire that he may be tried, he shall be tried, and punished with labour. For food stolen from a garden — for the owner of the enclosure he shall perform labour, such as erecting a fence, the length being regulated by the valu« of the food stolen. But if it was food growing wild, or unenclosed, ' he shall make forty fathoms of road, or four fathoms of stone-work. ,' XXVI. Concerning Revenue foe the King and Governors. Every land that has received tbe Word of God, and those that have not whose institutions are good,- agree that it is right to fur nish property for their own king, who holds the government, and for thc governors of the districts. It is also a thing frequently ex hibited in the Word of God, and taught by Jesus, our Lord, when he said " Render unto Cesar the things that are Cesar's." There fore it is right that we do the same. Let every individual contri bute towards the revenue of the king. The man of great prop erty must furnish more than the man of less property. Such as governors of districts shall give two hogs yearly. If not hogs, arrow-root ten measures ; if not this, cocoanut oil ten bamboos full ; they raust be good-sized bamboos. , The raatiras, farmers, or small landed proprietors shall each give one hog annually. If not a hog, arrow-root five measures ; if not this, oil five bamboos. Those also who do'not possess land, but belong to this country — or belonging to another land, but residing here — this shall be their contribution, one pig for one year (smaller than that furnished by the farmers) ; if not a pig, arrow-root three measures; or oil three biuuboos. This is another property that the farmers shall prepare for the king that holds the govemment : Each district shall prepare every year two mats, ten, fathoms long, and two fathoms wide ; 14% POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. if not large mats, fine hibiscus mats, one from each (family) ; if not this, three fathoms of native cloth each, : This is the property for the governors, which the farmers of their own districts shall furnish for a year : One pig each ; if not a pig, arrow-root five measures, or oil five bamboos, good bamboos. And as for the king, two mats shall the inhabitants of the district furnish for their own governor, (the mats) shall resemble in length and breaiith those -for the king. If not large mats, hibiscus mats one each, of cloth three fathoms each. This is the revenue which the. districts shall furnish for their governors £ach year, the inhabitants of each district for their own governor ; and' this is the property which the governors and people shall provide for the king. The man, who on ac countof illness is unable to furnish the property here specified in the'year shall meet with compassion from the king and gov ernors. But if it be from indolence, or any other cause, that he does not, he shall be banished, he shall not -be detained by any one. Let the farmers act generously towards their kmg and governors in furnishing provisions, it is -right. Of such as bread-fruit, arum, plantains, yams, and such kinds of food, let a portion be taken to the king and governors ; let it be takeii undressed. Not like the great feedings, they shall be entirely abolished ; bDt observing the week or the month, it may be brought. There shall be no pigs, but fish if desired. Thus shall we do well. XXVII. Concerning Marking with TATTOd, No ^person shall mark with tattoo, it shall be entirely discon tinued. It belongs* to ancient evil customs. The man or wo man that shall mark with tattoo, if it be cleariy proved, shall be tried and- punished. The punishment of the man shall be this — he shall make apiece of road ten fathoms long for the first marking, twenty (fathoms) for the second ; or, stone-work, four fathoms" long and two wide ; if not this, he shall do some other work for the king. This shall be the woman's punishment — she shall make two large mats, one for the king, and one for the governor ; or four small mats, for the king two, and for the governor two. If not this, native cloth, twenty fathoms long, and two wide ; ten fathoms for the king, and ten for the gover nor. The man and woman that persist in tattooing themselves successively for four or five times, the figures or ornaments marked shall be destroyed by blacking them over, and the indi- vidjials shall be punished as abpve written, XXVIII. Concerning Voyaging in Large Companies. When a member of the reigning family, or a govemor, or other man of rank or influence, shall project a voyage to another land — such as those from Raiatea, or Tahiti, visiting Huahme — NEW CODE OF LAWS. 143 it is right that he select steady men, such as are of the chureb, or have been baptized, not immoral and mischievous men, that cease not from crime ; such should remain in their (own) land. But if these voyagers continue to bring troublesome persons, when they land upon the shore, the magistrates shall admonish them not to disturb the peace of the place, nor wander about at night. If they do not regard, such disturbers shall be bound with ropes until their masters depart, when they shall be liber rated. XXIX. Concerning the Magistrates or Judges, When a man is accused of a crime, such a man may perhaps take enticing property (a bribe) to the magistrate or judge, that his sentence may be diminished ; but the magistrate or judge shall on no account receive such bribe, or property. The ma gistrate or judge who shall receive the property (ox. present) taken by such individual is criminal. His office shall be discon tinued, or taken away ; neither shall he ever be eUgible to be a magistrate or judge again. XXX. Concerning New Laws. If any crime comparatively small should arise, and which is not specified in these laws, it is right that this code be altered. Annually the laws shall -be revised or amended. Then shall the prohibition of such crimes as raay have been omitted be inserted, together with the punishment annexed to their coihmission ; that the usages in this land may be straight, or correct. Regulations far the Judges, the Jury, and the Messengers {or Peace-ojfficers). Concerning the principal Judges. 1, The king,- or supreme governors, shall select the chief judges ; and when a judge dies, or is interdicted that he may not j.udge, or when a judge removes, to another land, the king and supreme chiefs shall nominate another to perform the duties thus discontinued. 2. The duties of the chief-judges. This is their duty. — When a man is tried, and his guilt fully established, the judge, shall pronounce the sentence on his crime. The punishment written in the law, and annexed to his crime (shall be adjudged), and no other sentence, 3, Concerning recording the transactions, or proceedings, — The judge shall write the name of the prisoner', with his crime, the names of the parties by whom he was accused, the punish- inent adjudged for his crime, in a book, for the inspection of the kmg and the people, 4. Conceriiing the emolument. — The property or salary ofthe 144 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. chief judges shall be given yearly by the king. All fines or con fiscations shall belong to the king, or the parties specified in the laws. Concerning the (subordinate) Judges oh Magistrates. 1. The king or supreme chiefs shall select or appoint the ma gistrates for all the districts, 2, Their duties. — ^A person accused of any crime, if the prin cipal judge is not at the place, shall be brought before the magis trates of the district, who shall try such individual (in their respective districts) ; at other seasons of puMic trial they shall also assist. 3. When a crime is committed, such as theft, or other similar offence, the person whose property has been stolen shall go toa magistrate, and -give information of the same. The raagistrate shall write the names of the accused and the accuser. If the person whose property has been stolen, or who has been injured, desires that the offender should be prosecuted, he shall be tried ; but if not, he shall not at once be brought to trial. 4. The magistrates shall endeavour to extinguish every kind of evil that may appear, especially quarreUing, family broils, ob stinate contentions, and fighting, that peace may be preserved. Let not the people treat them with disire^ect. 5. When sentence has been pronounced, let the magistrate inspect its execution, and direct the messengers or officers that it be fully attended to. 6, It is with (or"it is the duty of) the king to furnish the remu neration for all the magistrates; such remuneration shall be yearly given, for their vigilance in making straight that which was crooked. _ • Concek'Ning the Jury, 1. No man shall be tried for any great crime' without a Jury. There shall always be a jiiry, excepting in minor offences, quarrels, ,&c. 2, When a man is tried for any crime, the judge shall select six men to be,a jury, men of integrity shall he select ; they shall mark or hear attentively the untwisting or investigation (of the matter). When the evidence and examination are ended, the jury shall confer privately on the statements and evidence they have heard during the trial, the words of the accusers, and the words oif the accused, with the evidence or testimony of the wit nesses. If they .unitedly think the person tried is really guilty, that he committed the crime (there having been the evidence of two credible witnesses), and if they agree that he is guilty, orie of their number shall address the judge, saying. This man is really guilty. Then shall the judge pronounce the sentence upon the criminal ; the sentence written in the law shall he pronounce. NEW CODE OF LAWS. 145 But if the whole of the jury think the man accused is not guilty, then one of their number shall say. There is no guilt; If it be one of the king's family, that is tried, then the jury shall be members of the reigning family (or individuals also of equal rank) : if a landed proprietor or farmer that is tried, of landed proprietors or farmers only shall the jury be composed. 3, If during the trial the jury desire to put any question to the prisoner, or to the witnesses, it is right they should do so, 4, If the accused person observes any one on the jury whom he knows to be a cruel or evil-minded man, or a man of whom his heart does not approve, it will be right for him to say to the judge " pemove that raan, let him not be on the jury." Then shall the judge seek another man in the place ofone so removed, and shall proceed in the.trial of the. accused. If it be twq or three on the jury of whom the prisoner does not ill his heart . approve, they shall be removed ; but in reference to four, or the whole jury, it will be improper. When two are removed,- two others the judge must seek; when three, then must the judge seek to fill the place of those removed, and then judge the person accused. Concerning the Messengers of the Magistrates. Their duties. — This is the duty of the messenger (or peace- officer). Whe'n a man is accused to a magistrate, the magis trate shall send a messenger to lhe- accused person, to brjug hiin before the face of the magistrate, and guard or take the cus tody of him during the trial. When the trial has terminated, the messenger shall superintend the execution of the sentence pro nounced by the magistrate or judge, andj in subordination to the magistrate, shall vigilantly inspect the cc)nvicts till the sentence be accomplished. 2. Concerning their remuneration. — The king shall give annu ally to the messengers such property as raay be appropriated to them for their vigilance in preserving the order (and peace) of the land. ' , Directions for the Judges and the JOry. 1. The judges and the jury shall not regard the appearance (circumstances) of men. If a man of infiuence (be brought before them) let him be a man of influence'; if a neighbour, let him be a neighbour ; if a relative, let him be a relative ; or a friend, let him be a friend ; this they shall not regard. That which is written in the laws, and that alone, shall they regard, 2, When an offence is committed, such as theft or adultery, if the injured, person desires that the offender should be tried, he shall go himself to the. ihagist;tate, and give information, Tha magistrate shall write his name, and the name of the person ac cused, that it may be regular in trial. But offences which affect Vol. Ul.— G 146 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the whole island, sueh as murder, rebellion, conspiracy, working on the Sabbath, U shall be competent for any .person to give in^ formation to the magistrate ; and the magistrate shall write his name, and the name of the person accused. The magistrate shall not regard or bring to trial on vague reports. It is proper that some individual should go and lodge the information, 3. When a, person is brought to trial, and when the magis trates are assembled— the accused, and the accuser, and the wit nesses being also present — the raagistrate or judge shall publicly declare the crime of which the offender is accused, and shall then ask hira if it is a true word or accusation. If the prisoner replies, " 'Ves, it is a true word," th'ejudge shall pronounce the sentence. But if the person -accused replies, "It is not, I did not commit the offence," then shall the judge request the person on whose information he was apprehended to state his accusa tion. If there be two witnesses, iet there be two ; if three, (let there be) three. It is proper that witnesses should have the clearest, strongest evidence. Then shall the judge request the prisoner to declare what h? has to say. If there be a person there that knows the accused to be innocent, he shall give his evidence ; and if there be two, let there be two ; if three, let there be three ; they shall deliver all their word or evidence. If the person accused wishes tb ask his accuser any questions, it is right for hira to do-so. He shall inquire of the judge, and the judge shall repeat the question to the accuser, 4, No man shall be confined without cause. When a jSig breaks into a garden, the awner of the pig shall not' be bound, but information shall be given to the magistrate, and he shall send his messenger to bring' the owner of the pig, that he may be tried according to Law III. The same course shall be adopted in all petty offences : but for murder, theft, rebeUion, &c., and all great crimes, it is proper to secure (the offender). Let not the confinement, be long before theperson is brought to trial. One, two, or three days vvill be sufficient. Let it not be longer. 5. When petty offences are committed, the district magistrates shall fry the offenders ; but in all great criines, the judges and the jury shall-assemble in one place for the trial. 6, When a man is tried by a district magistrate, and sen tenced by him, if the person sentenced think that the judge has been irritated with him, and has increased his punishment ; if (from these considerations) he shall say, " I will go to the chief judge and the jury to be tried, it is right that he do so. They shall both go before the supreme judge and a jury to be tried. 7. When a man is tried, convicted, and sentenced by the jury and judge, he shall not be maltreated, as by beating with a stick, piercing with a spear, or enduring any- other, savage practice. It shall uot be practised. The punishment appropriate shall be .adjudged. OMISSION OF CAPITAL PUNISHMENT. 147 8, "Wlien a man is convicted of any glfeat crime by the judge and the jury, and they unanimously think that he deserves pun ishment ; then the judge shall write on a paper his crime, and his own and the jury's decision on which he has been sentenced. This shall be taken to the king, and, if the king approves of their decision, he shall write upon a paper brought by the judge, " It is fully approved," and write his own name underneath ; then shall the punishment be infiicted on such offender. If the king desire to mitigate the sentemje, h^ may do so, but cannot in crease jt. The names of the judges, magistrates, and messen gers, or police-officers, for Huahine and Sir Charles Sanders's Island, follow this last regulation, and close the first official document issued by the government of these islands — and, next to the sacred writings, the most beneficial ever promulgated among the people, I have endeavoured to give a correct and even servile translation of this Important publication. The idiom and peculiar phraseology of the original I have almost invariably retained, rather than sacrifice fidelity to im provement of style. In sorae respects I have wished that several enactments had been otherwise than they are ; these parts, however, have not been omitted ; and notwithstanding their imperfeptions, considering the circumstances of the parties by whom they were framed, regarding them also as the first effort of their legislation as a Christian people, and the basis of their future civil institutiotis, they imbody all the great principles of na tional security, personal liberty, general order, public morals, and good government. .And if no Solon or Ly curgus should appear among them, it is not too much to hope that, ahiid the variety of character daily unfoldedj and the means of improvement which the introduction of letters imparts, that political econoray will not be neglected, but that legislators vvill arise, whose genius shall model and prepare such improvements in their system of jurisprudence as shall render it in every respect conducive to general prosperity and individual happiness. In the Tahitian and Raiatean codes, when first pro mulgated, the punishment of death was annexed to the crime of murder, and rebellion, or treason. But by the la.ws of Huahine and its dependency capital punishment was not inflicted for any crime. In the first law, pro hibiting murder and every species of infanticide, the G2 148 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. penalty annexed to its commission, instead -of being death, is banishment for life to Palmerston's, or some other uninhabited island. This was in consequence of our particular recommendation. We were convinced, that if under any, circumstances raan is justified in the infliction of death, it is for murder alone : but an eicam- ination of those parts of the Bible which are generally supposed to authorize this punishment did not fix on us the impression that the Almighty had delegated to man the right of deliberately destroying a human being, even for this crime. - ^ In our views of those parts of-the sacred writings we may perhaps have been mistaken ; hut, in reference to the great principles on which pilblic justice is adminis tered, the plan recommended appeared in every respect preferable. Death is not inflicted, even on the mur derer, from motives of retaliation or revenge ; and if it be considered that his life is forfeited, and is taken to expiate his crime, the satisfaction which the injured party derives from such expiation must- be of a very equivocal kind. At the same time, the very execution of the sentence imparts to the executioner somewh'at ofthe character of an avenger, or excites the apprehen sion that it is done under the influence of irritated and vindictive feelings. The great design of capital, and even other punish ments, is the security of society, and the prevention of crime. The death of the criminal preserves society from any future injury by his means ; and the fatal pun ishment inflicted, it is presuraed, will deter others from the commission of similar offences.. The, security of the community from all future violation or outrage is certainly obtained by the death of the criminal ; but experience and observation abundantly demonstrate the inadequacy of public executions to restrain from the most appalling deeds^ Every repetition of the awful spectacle appears to diminish its horrific character, until those habituated to felony become familiar with its heaviest punishment. The principal «nd of public executions is thus defeated, the genial tone of public feeling lowered, and that whieh was designed to be the most effectual moral barrier -is at length converted into an occasion, or sought for as an opportunity, for the commission of crime. By recommending the omission of capital punish- REASONS AGAINST CAPITAL PUNISHMENT. 149 ments we avoided this evil, and,- regarding tlie peculiar circumstances of the nation, were in hopes thereby indi rectly to elevate the tone of moral feeling, ahd improve the sensibilities of a people emerging from a state of barbaristn, in which murder and retaliated-murder had not only been farailiar, but committed with brutal satis faction. The existence of a number of islands uninhabited, but capable of cultivation, and, from the cocoanut-trees growing on their' borders, and the fish to be found near their shores, capable of furnishing the means of subsist ence, and yet too remote to allow of the convicts re turning or proceeding to another island in any vessel they could construct, appeared toi afford the means of answering every end of public justice. The community would be' as safe from future injury as if the offender had been executed ; and we had a firm conviction that a life of perpetual solitude and necessary labour would be regarded by many as more intolerable and appalling than speedy death. We have always regarded it as less difficult to render laws once established more sanguinary than lenient afterward. Another consideration by which we were also influenced was the season to exercise repentance, or supplication for mercy, which it would afford the criminal before he was called to the bar of the Almighty. To the offender this was nipst important; and, as it could be bestowed "without danger to the donors, we were always desiroiis that it should be granted. No opportunity for pbserving the practical effects of this law has yet occurred ; no murder having been committed in any of the islands since its enactment. Within two years after the promulgation of the Tahitian code, four executions for conspiracy and treason took place. The influence of these appeared by no means salutary ; and, in the revision of the laws of Tahiti in 1836, banishment for life was substituted as the penalty for those crimes to which death had before been annexed. One indi vidual was sentenced tq perpetual solitude, and was to have been furnished with a few tools, together with such seeds and roots as, it was presumed, would, when cultivated, afford the means of subsistence ; but before he was actually transported circumstances occurred which induced the king to mitigate his sentence. It has never been intended to send any number of felons 150 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. to the same island : hence, distinct and distant islands have been appropriated to the residence of traitors and , murderers. The observations on this article may appear to have been unnecessarily extended ; but the important char acter of the law itself, and the difference in its penalty from that ordinarily inflicted, have induced more length ened remarks than 1 should otherwise have offered. Since the first publication of this work I have been led carefully to review the opinions here exhibited, and the result is a stronger conviction that capital punishment, certainly for every crime excepting murder, is not less opposed to sound policy, or a due regard to the welfare of society, than repugnant to every humane feeling and Christian sentiment. Another distinguishing and important feature in their judicial proceedings is the omission of oaths in appoint ing the jury or examining witnesses. No oath is ad ministered on any occasion: deliberate assertion is re ceived as evidence, and false evidence is regarded as equally criminal with false accusation ; and is, 1 believe, punished accordingly. The second law is one of those regulations peculiar to particular and local communities. Their swine and their gardens are among their principal sources of maintenance and wealth. The animals are not kept in - sties or other enclosures, but range the district at lib erty ; a great proportion of their food being derived from the cocoanuts, bread-fruit, plums, chestnuts, and other fruits that fall frora the trees. During the season of fruit these are abundant, and the pigs feed and sleep in quietness under the shades but during the other seasons of the year they are very troublesome. Their materials for fences are not good,- and a large, strong, and hungry hog will easily force a way into the garden with his tusks or his teeth, and often do great mischief in a Very short time. In 1826 this law was revised, and rendered more simple. The sixth enactment, relating to barter, was required, not only for the exchanges or trade carried on among the natives themselves, but for the prevention of mis understandings between them and those foreigners by •whom they might be visited for .purposes of traffic. They are naturally fickle, and were formerly accustomed to return articles which they exchanged merely because SABBATH REBELLION POLYGAMY. 151 they desired to repossess whatever they might have given for it : this practice led to frequent altercations ; and, when trading with foreigners, to serious quarrels. The law which prohibits labour on the Sabbath-day is, perhaps, enforced by a penalty disproportioned "to the offence. It ought, however, to be observed, that, as a nation, they were accustoraed to pay the strictest regard to this day from religious considerations before the legal enactment was made, which was principally designed to prevent annoyance to those who were de sirous to devote the day to religious services. The road which the offenders were to make was not much more than a footpath, with a small trench dug on each side, and raised in the centre from the sand or earth taken from its borders. The eighth law, referring to rebellion, is translated from the amended code of 1826 simply because this article was rauch shorter than that of 1823, It contains the substance of the former enactment, which had been copied verbatim from the Tahitian code, and was drawn up by Poraare : it fixes the punishment for the third offence to perpetual banishment, instead of leaving it optional with the judges to banish, or sentence to public labour for seven years or for life. The ninth regulation can only be of temporary appli cation, and the necessity for its introduction arose from the peculiar circumstances of the people while passing, as it were, from paganism to Christianity, Prior to the subversion of heathenism, polygamy prevailed more or less in all the South Sea islands : some of the chief women had also a plurality of husbands. This regula tion did not require those who had entered into these relations in a heathen state to dissolve thera on becom ing Christiai^s, and was only designed to prevent any one from making these engagements after they had be come such : it is a circumstance which merits notice that there were very few who did not of their own ac cord, and by agreement among themselves, disannul this relationship excepting with one individual. They knew that with more than one person it was inconsist ent with the precepts of the Bible ; and this considera tion induced the discontinuance of their former practice. If their previous habits of life, and the notorious licen tiousness of their character be regarded, their conduct in this respect is a striking illustration of the power 153 POLYNESIAN RESE „.;,„, of Divine truth upon their minds, and of the attention they considered its injunctions to require. This article was amended in 1826, and it was enacted, in the event of a man marrying a second ¦wife, without her knowing that he was already a married man, that he should not only be sentenced to public work, but should furnjsh compensation to the female he had thus injured. The twelfth enactment, which regards the dissolutiori of the marriage contract, is rather a singular article. The influence of former institutions appears to require it; or, at least, something of the kind. Formerly, with whatever ceremonies the engagement iiad been made, nothing could be more brittle than the bond which held together those united in matrimony, The engagement was not regarded as binding any longer than tlie caprice or inclination of the parties dictated. Accustomed thus to relieve themselves for any unpleasantness in temper, &c., it was tb be feared that the separations resulting from thera would lead to the arranging of new contracts. To avoid the confusion and inconvenience of this, the present regulation was introduced : and although it was not supposed that hard labour would revive affection in the bosoms of those who, notwithstanding they had solemnly agreed to dwell together for life, had yet be come estranged from each other ; yet it was presumed that the adraonition from the raagistrate,. and the con sequence of obstinate alienation, might induQe the par ties to impose a little restiraint upon -their tempers, and to make an effort to live together in peace, if not in kindness and in love. The degradation of the female sex is an invariable accompaniment of paganism ; and, in addition to the humiliation and slavery to which those in the South Sea islands were reduced while the community were heathens, they were often exposed, to the sufferings of hunger and want, from the neglect or unkindness of their savage and iraperious husbands. The thirteenth enactment, requiring provision to be made for them, may be regarded as an indication of the light in which the nation at this time viewed their forraer treatment of the females, or an expression of their determination toprevent its recurrence. The law concerning marriagfe is a most important enactment, and may be justly regarded as the basis of all their regulations for doraestic comfort, and the spring PRODUCE OF TREES. 153 of every household virtue. It was thought that the season of assembling for public lecture during the week, ¦which was on Wednesday evening, would be preferable to the Sabbath for giving the notice — or what is termed with us publishing the bans — but the marriage was not to take place till the following week. Though the law only prescribes the terms in which the contract shall be made, the people usually expect a short address and prayer for the Divine blessing : and on that account, in general, prefer applying to the missionaries to perform the ceremony. No fees are received by either party for solemnizing the marriage, or entering the record. In the revision of the code in 1826 this law was consid erably improved by annexing to the public announce ment of the intention of the parties the reason why such public declaration was made : viz. that any who knew of just cause why the marriage should not take place might declare the same. Dogs are numerous in the islands, though not now reared as formerly for food. They are generally indo lent, unsightly, and ill-bred, and "are a great nuisance in most of the settlements. Disputes are not frequent; among theiiatives, but they arise as often on account of the depredations of their dogs and hungry pigs as from any other cause. Neither their dogs nor swine are confined, but they prowl about, destroying fowls, kids, and young pigs. Several instances have occurred, in which children have been attacked and injured by savage and hungry swine. Under such circumstances, formerly, redress would have been sought, or vengeance taken, with the club or the '^spear. To diminish the number of useless animals, .and to secure greater care over others, the twenty-first regulation was made, which rendered the owners in some degree responsible for any mischief they might occasion. Such, was the population of the islands formerly that every bread-fruit and cocoanut-tree had ifs owner ; and a single tree,"it is said; had sometimes two proprietors. Subsequently, ' however, extensive clusters or groves of trees were to be met with, having no other owner than the chief of the district in which they grew. The fruit of these it was formerly their practice to gather in its season without asking tbe consent of any one. The proprietor of the land could appropriate to his own use any number of the trees by a:^xing such inarks as were G3 154 POLYNESIAN REi indications that they were rahuaia, or prohibited. Thia practice, being connected with certain idolatrous cere monies, was discontinued with the abolition of the sys tem. As the population increased, the people became more careful of their trees, and the practice of gathering promiscuously the fruit fVoni those trees not enclosed, appeared generally undesirable. There are, however, anumber of persons at most of the settleraents who have scarcely any other sources whencte they can derive a supply. In order to afford them an opportu nity of procuring this, and at the same tirae securing to the proprietors their right to the disposal of the fruit growing dn their own lands, the twenty-fifth regulation was framed, and appUed to raost of the trees whose fruit is used as an article of food. The government having-been hitherto an arbitrary monarchy, the king and chiefs had been accustomed not only to receive a regular supply of all the articles produced in the islands, but to send their servants to take whatever they required, however abundant the supply furnished might have been.' This practice de stroyed all security of individual property, and so long as it continued, was a great barrier to the improvement of the people. It had always appeared to-us desirable to introduce such regulations, in reference to this sub ject, as would procure for the king and chiefs a revenue more ample than the system of extortion and plunder had ever furnished, and at the same time secure invio late to the people the right of private property. In proposing any regulation of this kind to the chiefs, we always felt some degree of delicacy, and found the introduction of the measure attended with, 'difficulties. To the chiefs it appeared in sonie degree depriving them of "their power, and rendering them dependent on the donations of the people ; and there were others who, connecting the prosperity of the people with the continuance of the monarchical government, were not free, from apprehension lest the restraint imposed on the chiefs should diminish their influence in the nation, and destroy the authority of the sovereign. The propo sition arose from no desire on our part to lirait the influence of the chiefs, or reduce them to a state of dependence ; on the contrary, we were satisfied that a certain proportion of the produce of the soil, fixed by law, and regularly paid, would give them greater power JUDICIAL PROCEEDINGS. 155 than they had ever enjoyed before ; and though some were apprehensive of a contrary effect, the rulers and chiefs of Huahine readily embraced the plan, and, heartily recommending it to the adoption of the people, have found it much more productive than the former system of oppression. To the people the advantage of this enactment is incalculable. They have already begun to taste the enjoyments resulting from the secure possession of their property, and the satisfaction of contemplating the produce of their labour as inviolably their own. No regulation before introduced appears so much adapted to promote agriculture, industry, and advancement in civilization. In 1826 this enactment was improved : the proportion of tribute individuals in the several classes of society should furnish was definitely fixed, and the whole ren dered more explicit. Although this regulation has been subsequently introduced, and still further extended, in the codes of some of the other islands, this being the first enactment on the subjeet, promulgated by any of the infant governments of Polynesia, may be regarded as the basis on which the right and security of private property is" established. The remaining articles in the first Huahinean code refer to the regulation of their judicial proceedings, and are designed to supply the deficiency that appeared in the laws of other islands previously introduced. In these the power of the judge and magistrate was dis cretionary, both as to the kind and degree of penalty for several offences. This was found to open a door for the abuse of power, and was frequently very unsat isfactory to the people. ^From these considerations we were led to recommend the chiefs to annex the punish ment to the prohibition of the offence, and restrict the magistrate to the infliction of such penalty only as the law enjoined : this plan has appeared in general to give satisfaction, though it is often attended with practical difficulties ; these, however, the increasing experience of the people will probably enable them to remove. In 1826 the regulations regarding the local magis-< trates were improved, and two were appointed to pre-. serve the peace in each district, from whose decision any one could appeal, even in petty cases, to the judges of the island. At the same time, the salaries of th§ 156 POLYNESIAN RES magistrates, as well as those of the jiidges, which are paid by the king, were definitely fixed. The law which declared that, " No raan should be tried for any great offence (viz, one which affected his person, liberty, or possessions) without a jury," we have always regarded as the basis of their public justice. The liberty granted to the prisoner of objecting to any members of the jury is a valuable security for the proper and impartial investigation of the case. In 1826 this enactment was also-amended, and it was then enjoined, not only that a chief or raatira should be tried by his equals, but that if a peasant or^ mechanic were brought tp trial, the jury alsp sjiould be peasants or mechanics. Every friend of liberty, of the natural rights of man, and to the Order and good,government of society, raust rejoice that, these infant nations, should have enjoyed, so early in their civil existence, the se curity which the trial of a subject by his peers is adapted to ensure. At the same tirrie it was also enacted, that, in all cases, the jury should be unanimous in their verdict. Besides these regulations, wliich were included in the first legislative code, established in 1823, and improved in 1826 ; at this latter period, several, important articles were added, and the Huahinean code now contains fifty laws. The first of those introduced at this time fe garded the education or discipline of the children, and was designed to counteract, the fugitive habits in which they indulged, prior to the establishment of regular schools. Formerly the children were accustomed to resist all parental restraint, and, whenever they chose, to leave their parents' abode, and associate with other children, or take up their residence in any other part of the island. The facility with which the means of support might in general be obtained rendered it a matter of little or no inconvenience to the parties to whom such children- might,'' at the age of eight, ten, or twelve years, attach themselves. The person with whose establishment they might unite exercised no guardianship over them ; and their distance from the dwelling of their own parents removed them from the restraint and superintendence of those on whom naturally devolved the preservation of their morals and the formation of their character. To prevent the sanction and support which children absconding from their horaes had- beenaccustomed to VARIOUS ENACTMENTS. 157 receive, and to promote a more general attention to the reciprocal duties of parents and children, this regulation ¦was introduced. Another enactment prohibited the revival of those amusements and dances which were immoral in their tendencies. A third prohibited husbands from ill-treating their •wives. The fourth referred to their fisheries, and, by fixing the proportion of fish taken which should be given to the king and governors, was adapted to prevent dis satisfaction. The most -advantageous regulation, however, intro duced at this period, for the first time in any of the legal enactraents, was that which regarded the boundaries of lands. This law required that all disputes about land marks should be referred to the judges, or settled by the decision of a jury ; and that the boundaries of all the lands, fields, &c. throughout the island should be -care fully ascertained, and, with the dijnensions, descriptions of the land, and the names' of the owners, should be entered in a book, called the book of the boundaries of lands. A copy of the boundaries of each land, with the name of its owner, signed by the principal judge, and sealed with the king's seal, was to be prepared, as a document or legal title to the possession of such land in perpetuity. Many difficulties presented themselves in adjusting the rights of different Claimants to the sarae lands. Prior to the introduction of Christianity, the lands often changed owners during the intemal wars that prevailed ; and the descendants of those who at this anterior time possessed or occupied the land preferred their claims. But as those who possessed the lands at th« abolition of idolatty, held'them either as the fruits of conquest, or the gifts of the king, it was decreed that those who possessedithemthen should be considered as their law ful owners, and that no claim referring to a period an tecedent to this should be admitted. This law, by which the lands of the islands were made the freehold property of their possessors, was one of the most im portant in its influence on property that had yet been enacted. The unalienable right in the soil would thus descend from the father to the son, and no man could 158 POLYNESIAN RESI be deprived of this natural right but by a flagrant viola tion of the laws of his country. In the year 1824, when the infant Pomare III. was recognized by the nation as the successor to his father in the government of Tahiti and Moorea, the Tahitian code was revised and enlarged. At this time a most important law was introduced, which gave to the nation, for the first time, what might be termed a representa^ tive government, and rendered the' Tahitian a limited, instead of art absolute, monarchy. It was then decreed that members frora everydistrict should meet annually, for the purpose of enacting new laws, and anriending those already in existence. " The duration of the session was to be regulated by the business to be transacted. .The inhabitants of the districts were t(X select their representatives and fresh deputies, or members, every three years. It was at first enacted, that two should be sent from each district ; but the same law authorized the body which might be thus convened to increase the nuraber to three or four from each, if it were found desirable. No regulation was to be regarded as a law but such as had been approved or proposed by theni , and had received the sanction of the king; and every regu lation made by them, and approved by the king, was to be observed as the law of the land. The printed report of the session of what may be termed the Tahitian parliament,^ which assembled in May, 1826, contains an alteration of two laws, and four new regulations. The first of these is sufficiently im portant to justifyits translation, it is — CoNOEENiNO Seamen who may leave theie Vessels. 1. The captain, or master Of the vessel, who shall turn one of his crew on shore, without the consent of the governor of the district, is crirainal. He shall pay thirty dollars ; twenty to the king, six to the governor, and four to the man who shall conduct the seaman back to his ship. 2. The man who ^all forsake his shjp, and hide him'self on shore, shall be immediately apprehended. The man that finds and apprehends (each deserter) shall receive eight dollars, if he was taken near at hand ; and fifteen doUars, if brought from a distance, 3, The person who shall entice anj man belonging to a ship, so that he abandon his ship, and the man who shall hide or secrete him who shall so abscond, shall be tried, and (if convicted) HARBOUR REGULATIONS, 159 his sentence shall be to make fifty fathoms of pathway or road, or to build eight yards of stone pier or wall, 4, A seaman who shall have concealed himself ,on shore, and who shall be found after his ship has sailed, shall be brought to trial, and his sentence shaU be to make fifty fathoms of road. One of the greatest sources of annoyance to the na tives, and inconvenience to foreigners, has been the conduct of seamen who have absconded from their ships, or been turned on shore by the masters of trading ves sels. To prevent as nlueh as possible seamen from leaving their ships, this law was enacted ; and by sub jecting to a puiii^hment with hard labour, both the de serters and those who may favour -their desertion or concealment, it is adapted to answer the end proposed, A copy of this law, with an English translation, printed on the same, paper, is given by a person whom the gov ernraent appoints for that purpose, to the master of every vessel entering any of their harbours. The regulation is so just in its nature, and so salutaryis its tendency in regard to thpse who visit the islands, as ¦vvell as the community on shore, that the most ready acquiescence in its requirements may be reasonably expected., The harbour laws, or regulations, enacted in 1829, are not less important to public justice, than in reference to the security they are designed to afford ; and as they point out the sources of evil to which the people 'are exposed, as well as the objects intended to be secured, their insertion may be advantagepus. HARBOUR REGULATIONS. KEGULATIONS TO BE OBSEEVED BY SHIPS ENTERING THE HAEBOUK ,. OF HUAHINE. 1, Any ship or vessel entering the harbour of Huahine, for the purpose of trading or procuring refreshments, shall be pro tected by-the laws and regulations of the place ; for which pro tection a fee of four Spanish dollars, or an equivalent, shall be paid to the chief governor, or governess, as the case may be, before any trade shall commence, or refreshments be supplied, — N,B, This regulation doe^ not refer to the small"vessels or boats belonging to the islands ; but should any such vessel or boat arrive frora his Britannic majesty's colony of New South Wales, 160 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. or Van Diemen's Land, without a regular license, or register, she will be seized, and the people confined', until an opportunity offers of sending them back, or a conveyance be sent for them ; and should they prove to be - prisoners of' the crown of Great Britain, the colonial, government will pay any reasonable rerau neration for their maintenance, and a salvage will be paid by the owner of the vessel (sbould the same have been piratically taken) for retaking her, 2, Should any seaman desert from his ship, he sliall be im mediately apprehended and taken on board, and the person- ap prehending him shall receive four dollars, or an equivalent, be fore he is given up, which of course the commander or master of the ship will stop out of his wages, ^ , , 3, Should any seaman desert about the time of the ship's sailing, and succeed in secreting himself until she is gone to sea, he will, as soon as found, be put to work on the roads, or other public employment, until an opportunity Offers to send, him off the island. 4. As many disturbances and much distress have been caused by people being landed among the Society Jslands without the smallest means of support ; such a practice is hereby forbidden under a penalty of forty dollars, or an equivalent, for every per son so landed, to be paid by the raaster, or dommander, or person so landing him or them. ¦ 5. No person is to be landed for the purpose of remaining after the ship or vessel that brought him has left, without the ^permission of the govemor of the place at which he is desirous of remaining, ' 6. Should the goyemor give his permission to any person to remain on the island for the recovery of his health, during the absence of the ship, it Is expected that the master or commander will furnish him with any reasonable supply for his support, as many seamen have been left in the greatest distress from the neglect of this precaution : be it known, that a recurrence of it will cause a stateraent to be made of the ease to the government to which the vessel belongs, that the master, or commander, or other person so offending may be proceeded against on his arri val there, as the laws of his own country direct on that behalf. 7. As soon as any ship or vessel appears within a reasonable distance of the reefs, a pilot will be sent to conduct her in ; and when she leaves, he wUl in like manner take her to sea, for which service h? is to receive six Spanish dollars, or an equiva lent. ' ' 8, All masters, commanders, and other persons residing on or visiting this island are charged strictjy to observe these regu lations ; and as it is the duty of any aiid aU of his Britannic majesty's subjects to enforce the laws of their own country, so it wiU be to give «ll advice and assistance in setfuring offenders 'foreign seamen. 161 against them, and stating- their name, and other particulars, to the government of New South 'Wales, or to the secretary of the admiralty, should the case refer to a person belonging, or likely to return, to Great Britain, with the name of the person, the ship, and the place to which she belongs. The above regulations for ships entering the harbour of Hua hine, having been submitted to me, I deem them just and equita ble, and have transmitted a copy of the same to my government, together with this fiag, red above, white in the middle, avA red below, proposed for the Georgian and Society Islands, Given under my hand oiwhoard H, M, ship Satellite, at Rai,i- tea, this 17th day of March, 1829, - ' I, LA'WS, Commander, The people have always felt more difficulty in the enforcement of those regulations which refer to sub jects of other governments residing among them than to the natives of their own islands. The sentencing of such sailors as may desert from their ships, or may be found on shore after their vessels have sailed, to hard labour on the public roads or quays, is probably the most effectual plan they could have adopted to deter seamen from the very frequent practice of forsaking their vessels. . ¦¦ The promulgation pf an official printed code among the inhabitants of these islands, not only formed an epoch in their history, but introduced a new order of feeling and action in their civil relations, as a com munity governed by laws which they had deliberately and unitedly adopted. Perspicuity and plainness had been studied in the fraraing of their laws, and in several instances we should have preferred even greater ex plicltness. The public administration of justice under the foriner system had been exceedingly unceremonious arid simple ; and although the change now introduced had rendered it rather more complex, it was neither in tricate nor perplexing. In several of the islands, I believe, court-houses have been built. There were none, however, in Huahine when I left, though I have since heard that they were erecting one for the chief judges. No investigations or trials have ever taken place with "closed doors," but "all causes are tried in open court. In some of the islands the bellman goes round the district to give public notice before any trial takes place. Their places of justice have usually been the 162 POL'YNESIAN RESE governor's house or the open air, frequently the court yard in front of the chief's dwelling, an open space in the centre of the settlement, or near the sea-beach, A wide-spreading tree, or clump, is usually selected, and under its shade the bench is fixed and the trial attended. The hour of sunrise is usually chosen, as they prefer the coolness of the morning to the heat of noon, Important^as this change in the civil constitution was to all the great interests of the peqple, there were doubt less many who vvere either insensible of the advantages that would accrue to themselves and their posterity, or were unable to appreciate their value. There were others, however, among different ranks in society, who thought and felt differently, and occasionally exhibited the high sense they entertained of natural and acknow ledged rights, and the security they expected from the laws they had adopted. Many illustrations of this re mark might be adduced; I shall only cite one that occurred in the Society Islands, and I simply relate it as a fact, without offerings any comraent. 1 was absent at the time it occurred, ahd it was regulated entirely by the natives themselves, without consulting or even acquainting the missionary who was there. In the autumn of 1822 the queen of Tahiti, the widow of Pomare, visited Huahine. Her attendants, who fol lowed in her train from Tahiti, requiring a piece of timber, she directed them to cut down a bread-fruit tree ¦growing in the garden of a poor man on the opposite side of the bay, near which her own residence stood. Her orders were obeyed, and the tree was carried away. Teuhe, the owner of-the spot on which it stood, -return ing in the evening tp his cottage, saw that the spoiler had been there: the stump was bleeding, and th'e boughs lay strewed around, but the «tately trunk was gone. Informed by his neighbours that the queen's men had cut it down, he repaired to the magistrate of the district, and lodged a complaint against her majesty the queen. The magistrate directed him to come to the place of public justice the following raorning at sunrise, arid sub stantiate his charge : he afterward sent his servant to the queen, and inviteJd her attendance at the same hour. The next morning, as the sun rose above the horizon, Ori, the magistrate, was seen sitting in the open air, be neath the spreading branches of a venerable tree ; on a finely-woven mat, hefore him, sat the quera, attended JUDICIAL IMPARTIALITY. 163 by her train ; beside her stood the native peasant — and, around them all, what may be terraed the police-officers. Turning to Teuhe, the magistrate inquired for what purpose they had been convened. The poor man said, that in his garden grew a bread-fruit tree, whose shade •was grateful to the inraates of his cottage, and whose fruit, with that of those which grew around, supported his faraily for five or seven inonths in every year ; but that, yesterday, some one had cut it down, as he had been informed, by order of the queen. He knew that they had laws — he had thought those laws protected the poor man's property, as well as that of kings and chiefs ; and he wished to know whether it was right that, without his knowledge or consent, the tree should have been ciit down. The magistrate, turning to the queen, asked if she had ordered the tree to be cut down. She answered, " Yes." He then asked if she did not know that they had lavvs. She said, " Yes ;" but she was not aware that they applied to her. The magistrate asked, " If in tiiose laws" (a copy ofwhich he held in his hand) "there were any exceptions in favour of chiefs, or kings, or queens'!" She said, "No" — and despatched one of her attendants to her house, who soon returned with a bag of dollars, whicli she threw down before the poor man, as a recorapense for his loss. " Stop," said the justice, " we have not done yet." The queen began to weep. " Do you think it right that you should have cut down the tree without asking the owner's permis sion V continued the magistrate. " It was not right," said the queen. Then turning to the poor man, he asked, " 'What remuneration do you require 1" Teuhe answered, " If the queen is convinced that it was not right to, take a little raan's tree without his permission, I am sure she will not do so again. I am satisfied — I require no other recompense." His disinterestedness was apjilauded ; the assembly dispersed — and afterward, I think, the queen sent him privately a present equal to the Talue of his ffee. 164 POLYNESIAN RESE ^ CHAPTER vm. Visit from the windward islands— Opposition to the moral restraints^if Chris tianity— Tattooing prohibited by the chiefs— Revival of the practice— Trial and penalty of Iheoffendfers — Rebellion -against the laws and government — Public assembly — Address of Taua — Departure V thfi chiefs^ and people^ from the encampment of the ting's son— Singularity of their dress and appearance — Interview between the rival p'arties — Return of Hautia and, the captives— Arrival of tbe deputation at 'fahiti— Account of Taaroarii — i^n- couraging circumstances « connected -with his early life-pHis marriage—. Profligate ass.ociates — Eifects of bad example-^Disorderiy conduct — His illness— Attention of the chiefs and people— ¦Visits to hia encampment— Last interview — Death of Taaroarii — Ftlneral, procession — Impressive cirtum- stances connected with his decease and interment— His monument and epitaph — Notice of his father — His widow and daughter— Institution of Christian burial— Dying expressions of native converts., "During the year 1821, besides going to Tahiti, Imade three voyages to Raiatea, and spent several weeks with the raissionaries there. These voyages were not dan gerous, although we were often out at sea all night, and soraetimes for nights and .days • together. The Hope, whose arrival at Tahiti in April had afforded us so much satisfaction, called at Huahine on her way to England, with a cargo she had taken in at Tahiti. Shortly after this we were also favoured with a visit frora Messrs, Darling and Bourne, who accompanied the captain of the 'Westnioreland frora Tahiti in the ship's long-boat. After raeeting the missionaries of the leeward islands at Raiatea, they passed some weeks with us in Huahine. Their visit was peculiarly gratifying, being the first we had receivfed from any of the missionaries in the wind- 'ward islands, though we had' been at Fa-re harbour up wards of three years. The season they spent with us was also distinguished by one or two iraportant circum stances. Paganism had been renounced in 1816, and a general profession of Christianity followed the comraenceraent of the raission here ; there were, however, a number who felt the restraint Christianity imposed upon their evil propensities to be exceedingly irksorae. These were principally young persons ; and though, from the influence of example or the popularity of religion, they had attached themselves to the Christians, they were TATTOOING PROHIBITED. 165 probably hoping that a change would take place in the sentiments of the nation raore favourable to their wishes, and relax the restriction which the precepts of Scripture had iraposed. They did not, however, dis turb tbe tranquillity of the community. But when the chiefs intimated their intention #f gov erning for the future according to the principles and maxims of the Bible, and that the new code of laws had received the sanction of Pomare-vahine, as well as that of the ruling chiefs on the island, they began to be ap prehensive that the existing state of things was likely tobe permanent. They then flrst exhibited a disposi tion to oppose their application. Several who had trangressed had teen by the chiefs admonished and dismissed; the latter, at the sarae time, firmly declaring their deterrriination to enforce the laws which they had promulgated. Among other prohibitions, that of tattooing, or stain ing the body, was included. The siraple act of marking the skin was not a breach of the peace, but it was in timately connected with- their former idolatry, always attended with the practice of abominable vices, and was on this account prohibited. Ih the month of July it was discovered that a number, about forty-six young persons, had been marking themselves.- The principal chiefs said that formerly the disobedience of so nume rous a parfy to any order ofthe chiefs would have been considered equivalent to a declaration of war, and they shoiild have sent armed men after them at once, and either have slain or banished the delinquents ; but now, as they had laws, they wishedto knovv whether it would be right that they should all be tried, and, if found guilty, have the sentence annexed to the crime pronounced against them. ¦We told the chiefs it would not be wrong, and the next raorning attended the trial. It was conducted with the greatest candour and forbearance on the part of the magistrates and accusers, aud an equal degree of sub mission on the part ofthe offenders, though it -appeared they had supposed that from their numbers and the cir curastance of one or two young chiefs of distinction being among them, the government would not have noticed their conduct. They were sentenced to build a- certain quantity of stone-work on the margin of the sea. 166 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. In a day or two afterward itwas discovered' that Taa- ¦roarii, the king's son, a youth about eighteen years of age, had also been tattooed ; and this being considered as an expression of his disapprobation of his "father's proceedings, and of his deterraination as to the conduct he deigned to pursue, produced a great sensation among the people. His venerable father was deeply affected, and the struggle between affection for his son and his. duty to the people was evidently strong. The latter prevailed ; he directed him to be tried, and attended him to the trial : here he affectionately admonished his son to -profit by his experience,, and warned the spectators, telling thera not to be deceived, and suppose that the laws by which they had mutually agreed to be governed would be violated with impunity. Some of the latter observed, if the king's son does not escape, what will become of the common men ! Taaroarii, the chief of Sir Charles Sanders's Island, and the expected successor to his father in the sove reignty of Huahine, now assisted in building the portion of stone- work allotted to hira. His friends and attend ants performed- the greater part of the labour — still there was a feeling of pride, that would not allow him to stand altogether idle. I visited his -house one evening, and entered freely into conversation with hira on the sub ject. He observed that he was sorry for what he had done, but appeared to indicate that he did not wish it to be thought that the work assigned him was any punishment. , Several unsteady young men and women, who fol lowed the example of the first party, were also tried, and sentenced to similar, punishments ; and afterward two principal personages in the island, "by having their bodies tattooed, joined their party: these two were the son of the king of Raiatea, who was. residing at Hua hine — and his sister, who had been married to a mera ber of Mahine's family. Their party was now strong, both in point of number and-influenee, and we expected that the siraple circumstance of marking the person with tattoo was only one ofthe preliminariesfff their design; and in this we were not raistaken. In the month of -August we heard that Taaroarii, ¦with a nuraber of those whom the chiefs had sentenced to labour on the public works, had left their employ ment, and vvere gone to Parea, in the northern part of DISAFFECTION TO THE LAWS. 167 the island. They told the officers of the chief ap pointed to superintend them that they intended in a few days to return. The people were greatly attached to the king's son, and the officers,, willing to show hira every indulgence, did not oppose his removal^ but reports were soon circulated that he was emplDying emissaries to invite the disaffected to join him, with the assurance, that as soon as they were strong enough, he intended to assurae the governraent of the island, and abolish the laws — that under his reign eVery one should follow his own inclinations with regard to those customs which the laws prohibited. His father being absent at Raiatea, he had judged the present a favour able time for making a vigorous effort. On the evening of the 9th of September, which was the Sabbath, a messenger came from the chiefs while we were engaged at family prayers, informing me that a large party of wild young men had gone to Parea, and that the son of the king of Raiatea was preparing to follow them. I went down to his dwelling ; his wife and several of his principal men were persuading him to remain, and not unite himself with those whose de signs were evidently unfavourable to peace. I mingled my entreaties with theirs,- but it was of no avail. His own men, finding he could not be deterred unless by violence, desisted : while a number of young fellows, like minded with himself, urging hira tordepart, he has tened after the party that had gone to Parea. As soon as Hautia, the deputy-governor of the island, heard it, he gave orders for the people to prepare to go, and fetch them b-ack the next day. , On the following morning, accorapanied by Messrs. Darling and Bourn, I went down to the settlement about sunrise, to witness the proceedings of an assem bly convened to consider the events of the preceding day. It was one of the most interesting of the kind I ever attended. The public council was held in the open air, on the sea-beach, in the shade of several tamanu-trees, that grew in front of the governor's house. Hautia sat on a rustic native seat near the trunk of the principal tree. The chiefs of the different districts and the magistrates were assembled near hira, while raost of the people of the settleraent had ga thered round, to witness their proceedings, fuU of anxiety for the result. 168 POLYNESIAN RESI It appeared from the decl-arations of several, that the conduct of the young men, and especially the chiefs' sons, had not proceeded frora any desire, to ornament their persons with tattoo, but frorii an impatience of the rostmint the laws imposed ; that they had merely seledied that as a means of showing their hostility to those laws, and their determination not toregard them ; that if they'might-be allowed, without .molestation, to follow their own inplinations, no disturbance of the present sort would be ¦attempted; but that if the re straints, of the laws vvere imposed, and their penalties enforced, they were determined to withstand thera. It was also reported that they were armed, and in tended to resist all. attempts to enforce their obedience. After a short declaration, it was proposed to go and address them first, with kiiidness, but firmness, inviting them to return;' that if they accepted' the, invitation, well; if not, that they should attempt to bind them, and bring them back; that if they resisted, to use force, but by no raeans to have recourse to arras, unless they should be first assaulted. This was acceded to by all present. The raen repaired for their arras,' and in half an hour the greater part of the inhabitants ofthe dis trict assembled in front of the chief's house, ready to set out as soon as he should lead them. Before they started, Taua, a tall, ¦welLraade chief, who had formerly been a warrior and a priest, arid who was one of their orators, stood up in the midst, and addressed the assembly.. His person was commanding, his fea tures masculine, his head uncovered, and his hair short, black, and slightly curled. A mantle of finely w6ven bark was thrown loosely over his shoulders, his loins were girded with a purau, and i^ his hand he held a light spear. He spoke with considerable judgment and effect. They might as well, he said, leave their ¦vveapons at home, as to any use which he expected they would be required to make of them, but that stiirit was perhaps best to go prepared, and to show these misguided young men, especially the king's two-sons, that it was their de termination to make the laws, to which they had openly agreed, the rule of public conduct, to maintain them as they were, and not to bend them to the views of those whose object was to introduce disorder and to foster crime ; to let them know at once, that though PUBLIC ASSEMBLY. 169 they were chiefs, they, as well as their subjects, must respect the laws, or sustain the consequences. 'We think they will submit (he added), but perhaps we are mistaken, and the issue of this day is not altogether certain. God, who overrules all events, and sometimes uses the wicked to accomplish his purposes, may, per haps, design by them to punish and to humble us, and to give thera a temporary ascendency : we ought there fore to look to Him. I do not vouch for the accuracy of the language, but these are the sentiments he expressed. Drawing to a close, he turned towards us, as we were sitting on a rustic rail near the outside of the assembly, and observed, " that though he apprehended there was no danger, it would be well to be prepared ; for should they be overcome, although the young chiefs raight be inclined to favour us, they could not restrain their fol lowers ; that our property would be a teraptation ; and that as we were supposed to have facilitated the intro duction and enforced the observance of the laws, it might be necessary, in order to our safety, that we should leave the island, even befor« sunset." A degree of excited animation, attended with a lively and im pressive action and an iippassioned feeling, which greatly affected us, breathed through the whole of his harangue, and during the latter part we could not refrain from tears. Shortly after Taua closed, Hautia, who was clad in a loose parau round his. loins, a light and beautifully fringed purau mat thrown like a mantle loosely over his shoulders, and holding a light spear in his hand, arose, and came and took leave of us, and then set off towards Parea, surrounded by the chiefs, and followed by their adherents. When he rose and gave with his spear the signal to move onward, there was an evident indication of strong excitement, which continued till they had left the court yard, not only among those who were going, but araong the- women, children, and others, who were spectators. Hautia's wife walked on by the side of her husband ; many of the other women also went to see the issue of the rencounter. 'We remained till all had departed. The chiefs and their people did not proceed in one unbroken coluran, but, after the departure of Hautia and his companions, followed in small detached parties, Vol. ni.— H 170 POLYNESIAN RESI consisting of a chief and three, four, or five of his de pendants. Their appearance, equipraent, and dress presented a singular spectacle. The symmetry of form, well-shaped and finely turned limbs and graceful steps df sorae, together with their tasteful, curaberless dress, the light spear in their hand, and the excitement of their countenance, presented a figure that could not be contemplated without admiration ; and the only feel ings of a different' order, on beholding such an indi vidual, were those of regret at the errand on which he was "going. , There were others, however, very different in ap pearance, which made the contrast the more striking ; sorae exceedihgly corpulent and heavy, others spare iu habit, all arrayed in a different kind of dress frora that they ordinarily wore, and some presenting frightful figures. Many wore a kind of turban, others a bandage of huraan hair, across their forehead, and round the back of the head. The most singular headdress was that worn by Biihia, one of the chiefs of Maeva. It was a kind of wig, con sisting of long and yellowbeards, fastened in a sort of net work fitted to the head. Whether they were the Beards of vanquished eneraies, that had been taken as trophies by his ancestors, as the Americans are accustomed to preserve -the scalps of their prisoners, I did not learn. The singularity of his appearance, was greatly increased by two "or three small whales' teeth, the, roots of which were fixed to the net-work, while the points projected through the hair like very shorthorns : one was ¦placed over each eye, and, I think, one over one of the ears. The other parts~of his dress were altogether those of an ancient warrior ; and his appearance was so singu lar, that I could not forbear stopping him a moment to exaraine his headdress, and inquire about it. He inforraed rae that the hair was the beards of men, and that the design of it was to excite terror. On my en- ?tuiring what the homy appearances were, I was in- ormed thaf they were the neho or tara of taehae tahito, teeth or horns of ancient cannibals or wild men. I informed him they were young whale's teeth ; but he seemed inclined to doubt itr 1 could not but think, as I looked at him, that he certainly had succeeded toler ably well in rendering himself a terrible object. One of his attendants, Maro, a plump-bodied, round-faced MARCH AGAINST THE REBELS. 171 good-natured looking man appeared in perfect contrast with his chief, and it was impossible to behold him without a sraile. His person was rather stout ¦ and short, his hair was cut close to his head, the upper part of his body was uncovered, but round his waist he wore a pareu reaching to his inees. He had a drummer's jacket on, highly ornamented, and scarlet-coloured; it was, however, too small for him to get it on his back, or to pass his muscular arms through thV sleeves ; it was therefore fixed on the outside of his pareu, the body of the jacket hanging down in place of the skirts of a coat, while the sleeves, passing round his waist, were tied in a knot in front. His equipment was in perfect accordance with his uniform, for the only wea^ pon that he had was a short brass-barrelled blun derbuss, called by the natives vaha rahi, or great mouth. Although the events of the morning had been such as were adapted to awaken very different feelings, yet when he turned round his good-natured face to bid me farewell, I could not forbear smiUng. His person, dress, a,rms, and a habit of leaning forwards, which, as he hastened by, exhibited very fully the - scarlet jacket, rendered his appearance ludicrous, in the extreme. When the parties had all started, we returned to the valley tobreakfast, but were surprised, as we passed through the settlement, to behold alraost every house deserted. We inferred that those women and children who had not 'accorapanied the raen to Parea had retired to places of greater security,, or better observation. After breakfast we spent some tiftie in prayer that no blood raight be shed, but that the issue of the interview between the rival parties might be conciUatory., We then launched our boat, fixed our masts and rudder, twisted up our matting sails, and waited, not without anxiety, the arrival of intelligence. - The chiefs, before they left,^had appointed the follow ing signals. If there waff- no resistance made by the young chiefs and their adherents, all would remain quiet till they returned. If they had to fight, they would send a raan to fire a rausket so near the valley that we might hear it. If the rival party was numerous and there was danger, two would be fired, ¦ We reraained in a state of great suspense during the forenoon, and scarcely s'dw an individual in the settle ment. About twelve o'clock we heard one musket 172 POLYNESIAN RES] fired, and very shortly afterward another. This only in creased our embarrassment, for although two had been fired, they had not been fired together, and, judging vfrom the report, we inferred that one was much nearer than the other. We therefore determined to wait fur- ' ther intimation, before we took any measures for per sonal security. In this state of .uncertainty we con tinued, supposing a conflict had, certainly commenced; and that the two' shots we had heard had, perhaps, occasioned an equal loss of lives. At two o'clock in the afternoon, however, our anxiety was reUeved by the arrival of Tauira, whom the chiefs had sent to inform us that all was peace : that Moeore, the son of the king of Raiatea, and his adherents, had surrendered on the arrival of Hautia, and that the par ties were retiring to the settlement. The messenger was alraost breathless with speed ; aijd whUe resting, he united with us in rendering grateful acknowledg ments for the agreeable tidings. In an hour or two, Taauroa, one of our people, arrived, and told us the reports we" heard were only random shots, fired as ex pressions of joy, and that it had been done without the knowledge of the chiefs. Towards sunset we walked to 4;he adjoining district of Haapape, where we were deUghted to meet Hautia and his friends returning; the young chief, who was about six-and-twentyyears of age, with his adherents, foUowing in their tram as captives. We mingled our congratulations for the issue of the events of the day. We were also thankful to learn, that although one indi- - vidual had a very narrpw escape, yet no Ufe had been lost, and no person injured. Two days afterward we attended the trial of the rebels, at a special court, held in the open air. The conduct of each was candidly and impartiaUy exam ined ; and, as many, it was found, had gone merely to accorapany the chief, or to procure food, lyithout any intention pf joining in the rebeUion, they were liber ated. The others, who had not only d,esigned but com menced hostiUties, by plundering the plantations, kiUing and eating the hogs of the party favourable to the laws, were sentenced to public labour, and were set to ¦work in small parties, with police officers to attend them. Although they were repeatedly interrogated as to the reasons for their conduct, they said but Uttle in reply. CONTINUATION OF PEACE. 173 In the evening of the same day, gre^t numbers of the people attended our weekly service, when I endeavoured suitably to impress their rainds in reference t(ithe re cent painful Events, by directing them to the history of Absalom's rebellion. There have been two or three slight insurrections in Tahiti since the proraulgation of the laws, but they have affected only a sraall number. They have not been re cent, and the laws seem firmly estabUshed ; but there are many, in all the islands, who find them an irksorae restraint, a;id would raost willingly, if an opportunity offered, abrogate them. Such individuals desire the return of the tirae when there was no law, and every one followed his own, inchnations. In Huahine, though they have been frequently violated, I do not think any attempt has been made to disannul them since the one above alluded to. The South Sea isKulders are generally addicted to war. It occurred very frequently prior to the introduc tion of Christianity. During the fifteen years Mr. Nott spent in the islands, while the people were pagans, the island of Tahiti was involved in actual war ten different times. The missionaries were painfully familiar with it. It surrounded their dwellings ; and the wounded in bAtle have often, with the wounds fresh and bleeding, repaired to their houses for relief. This, however, was the only time 'that I saw anything like it, though we often heard its ruraours. Reports of war have indeed been heard, esffecially at Tahiti-^where, since the death of the late king, very powerful interests, and perhaps some latent feelings of ancient rivalship, have been brought into collision, and where the conduct bf some, in the highest authority, has not been at all times the most honourable or conciliatory — but no actual hostility has yet existed. In the leeward 'islands, also, reports of war, and warUke preparations, have appeared — more particularly in reference to the bold and martial chief tain of Tahaa, and some of the re,stless spirits among the inhabitants of Borabora, once celebrated for their military prowess, and piasters of most of the leeward group — but it has been only rumour. The transient affair at Huahine, in connexion with which these reraarks have been introduced, and similar occurrences in Raiatea and Tahaa — between the chiefs, together -with a great body of the people, on the one 174 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. side ; and those dissatisfied with the moral restraints to which under idolatry they had been unaccustomed, on the otl^r — are the only public disturbances that have occurred. A few disaffected and lawless young fellows in Raiatea, supposing the missionaries were chiefly in strumental in the adoption and maintenahee of the laws, formed a plan for murdering thera, and overturning the governraent. Mr. Williams, who was to have been the first object of their vengeance, averted the^ threatened danger by what appeared to him, at the time, a circum stance entirely accidental, but which afterward proved a remarkable interposition of Providence for the preser-, vation of his life. With these exceptions, the inhabit ants have, since their adoption of Christianity, enjoyed uninterrupted- peace during a longer period ¦than was ever known before. Noble instances of calm deterraination not to appeal to arms have been given by Utami and other govern ors ; the love and the culture of peace having indeed succeeded their delight' in the practice of war, even in the 'most turbulent and -fighting districts. It is weU known, Mr. Darling observes, in reference to the dis trict of Atehuru, that the inhabitants of this part of Tahiti were always the first for war. False reports having reached the ear of 'the king's party, that flhe people of Atehuru entertained evU'designs against the royal family, rumours of war were spread by the adhe rents of the Ring, but, instead of rejoicing, as they would formerly have done, every one appeared to dread it as the greatest calamity. They gathered round the house of the missionary, declaring that, if attacked,' they would not fight, but would wilUngly become prisoners or slaves, rather than go. to war.' The mischief was thus pre vented — ^those with whora the reports had, originated were sought out— an appeal was made to the lems, in stead of the spear. The punishment annexed to the circulation of false and injurious reports was inflicted on the offenders, and the parties united in .amity and friendship, "" As they fee;l the blessings of peace increase with its continuance, their desires to. perpetuate it appear stronger. Its prevalence and extent are often surpris ing, evento themselves ; and some of the most striking illustrations of the advantages of true reUgion, and ap peals for its support and extension, are drawn from this AVERSION TO WAR. 175 fact, and expressed in terms like these : Let our hands forget how to hi te omqre, or vero ti patia, lift the club, or throw the spear : Let our guns decay with rust, we want them not ; for though we have been pierced with balls or spears, if we pierce each other now, let it be with the Word of God : How happy are we now ! we sleep not with our cartridges under our heads, our mus kets by our side, and our hearts palpitating with alarm : We have the Bible, we know the Saviour ; and if all knew him, if all obeyed him, theire would be no more war. It is not in public orily that they manifest these senti ments ; in ordinary Ufe at home they act upon thera. The raost affectionate and friendly intercourse is culti vated between the parties who formerly cherished the most implacable hatred, and often vowed each other's extermination, pffices of kindness and affection are performed with promptitude and cheerfulness ; and though by some their weapons are retained as relics of past days, or securities against invasion, by many they are destroyed. Often have I seen a guit-barrel, or other iron weapon, that has been carried to the forge^ cora mitted to the fire, laid upon the anvil, arid beaten, not exactly into a plough-share or a pruuing-hook (for the vine does not stretch its luxuriant branches along the sides of their sunny hills), but beaten into an implement of husbandry, and used by its proprietor in the culture of his plantation or his garden. Their weapons of wood also have often been employed as handles for their tools ; and their impleraents of war have been converted with proraptitude into the furniture of the earthly sanctuary of the Prince of peace. The last pulpit I ascended in the South Sea islands was at Rurutu. I had rainistered to a large congregation, in a spacious and well built chapel, of native architecture, over which the natives conducted rae at the close of the service^ The floor was boarded, and a considerable portion of the interior space fitted up with seats or forms. The pulpit was firmly, though rudely, constructed ; the stairs that led to it were guarded by rails, surmounted by a banister of mahogany-coloured tamanu wood ; the rails were of dark aito vvood, and highly poUshed, I asked my com panions where they had procured these rails ; and they repUed that they had made them of the handles of warriors' speajs ! 176 POLYNESIAN RESE Our, friends from the windward islands, who were with us when the disturbance at Huahine occurred, had been with us a month, when Pomare's vessel called at Huahine, on her way frora New South Wales to Tahiti, Circumstances requiring that as many of the raissiona ries in tl}e leeward islands as could leave their stations should meet those of the windward group, Mr. and Mrs, WiUiams, Mrs, EUis, and myself accompanied our friends on board the Governor Macquarie, . ' After five days at sea, finding ourselves near the land, we entered our boat, which had been towed at the. stern of the vessel, and, rowing to the shore, landed a few rriiles to the southward of the settlement, at Burder's Point, No effort had been wanting on the part of the captain to rendet our voyage a,greeable ; but,' from the sraallness of the cabin, number of the passengers, fre- quent rains, and pontrary winds, it had been tedious and unpleasant, and we were glad to flnd ourselves on shore. again. Exhausted by the fatigues of the voyage, we found the walk to the settleraent laborious; but on reaching the dweUings of our friends, the welcome, the refreshment, and the rest we there received soon re cruited our strength and spirits. We had accomplished our business, and- 'were at Papeete preparing to return, when, on the 24th of Sep tember, about three o'clock in the-afternoon, a vessel of considerable size was seen approaching Point Venus. By the aid of a glass, we perceived that it was a three- masted vessel, and, in endeavouring to ascertain its sig nal, we were surprised on beholding a large white trian gular banner flying at the top-gallant-roast head. The ship was too distant to allow of our reading the molto, or perceiving with distinctness the device, and we could only conjecture the character of the vessel, or the ob ject of the visit. The next ifiorning, a note .from Mr. Nott conveyed to us the gratifying inteUigence that the ship was direct from England; and that G. Bennet, Esq., the Rev. I>. Tyertaan, 'a deputation from the society, with three missionaries, had arrived. The captain had corae over in his boat, and, anxious to welcorae our newly arrived friends, 1 accorapanieii him in his return to thc ship, On reaching the Tuscan, we were happy to see IVIessrs. Jones, Armitage, and Blossom, with their wives, -and. ARRIVALS FROM ENGLAND. 177 afterward proceeding to the shore, had an opportunity of greeting the arrival of the deputation. The next morning the ship proceeded to Papeete ; and in the forenoon of the same day Messrs, WiUiams and Darling , having returned from Eimeo, we raet the deputation, read the letters from the directors, acknow ledged the appointment of the deputation as a proof of their attachraent, and expressed our sense of their kindness in forwarding supplies. The letters they had brought, and the accounts of their intercourse with our friends, were cheering ; and after spending upwards of a week very pleasantly in their s,ociety, I returned to Eimeo in my own boat, Mr, and Mrs, Williams and Mrs. EUis having sailed to Hua hine a week before, in the 'Westmoreland. Contrary winds detained me another week at Eimeo, during which I visited Pomare. On the 12th of, October we set sail, and, after having passed two nights at sea, reached Fa-re harbour in safety on the 14th. The year 1821 was an eventful period in the political annals of Huahine, not only in reference to the pro mulgation of the new code of laws, but also in regard , to the death of Taaroarii, the king's only son, the chief of Sir Charles Sanders's Island, and the heir to the gov ernment of Huahine. This event took place very soon after ray return from Tahiti. The circurastances preceding his death were dis tressing. The young chieftain was in his nineteenth year ; his rank and influence led us, to indulge cheering anticipa tions ; and, during his juvenile years, he was greatly beloved by the people. He had also, when it was sup posed he could scarcely have prrived at.years of discre tion, shown his contempt for the idols of his country, his desire to be instructed Concerriing the true God, and had prohibited the licentious and idolatrous ceremonies of the Areois, when few were favourable to Christian ity. Subsequently, Taaroarii had become a diligent pupil of the missionaries. We could not but hope that Divine Providence was raising him up to succeed his father, and to govern the islands under his authority foi' the stabUity of the Christian, faith and the advancement of the people's best interests. These hopes, however, were disappointed. He treated Christianity and the worship of God with respect, was 13 178 POLYNESIAN RESE a steady enemy to the introduction or use of ardent spirits by chiefs or people, and was not a profligate man ; but, soon after our establishment in Huahine, a number of the most abandoned young men of that and other islands attached themselves to bis retinue, which was always numerous, became his companions, flattered his pride, and, in many respects ministering to his wishes, they infused their own evil principles into his raindi Being naturaUy cheerful and good-natured, he was induced by his corapanions first to neglect instruction, then the public- worship of God, and subsequently to patronise and support his followers. His venerable father beheld the change with poignant grief, and used all the affection, influence, and authority of a parent to lead him from those evil courses ; but his efforts, and those of other friends, failed; In order to draw him from this influence,, a matrimo nial connexion was arranged, and he was united in mar riage with the daughter of Hautia, who; next to Mahine, was the highest chief, and deputy-governor of the island. His daughter was near the age of the king's son; and, though rather inferior in rank, she was in every other respect a suitable partner, and proved a faithful and af fectionate wife. A house was built for hira near the dweUing of his wife's family, and a more commodious one for the youth ful couple adjacent to his father's residence. It was, however, soon manifest that the baneful influence of his former associates was hot destroyed. The,y gath ered around hiro again, and he gave hiraself up to their guidance and control. ¦ His wife was treated with cruelty, but stiU continued attentive to liis comfort. A number of the most profli gate of the young men attached to his estabUshment having tattooed themselves, he was induced to subrait to the same, it is supposed, with a view to screen them from punishraent. They iraagined that the magistrates would not bring him to pubUc trial ; and if he was ex empted, they knew they should escape. When it was found that the young chief had actually violated the laws, the magistrates came to the king to ask hira whether he should be tried. The struggle was severe • but, under the influence of a patriotism worthy of his station, he said he wished the laws to be regarded rather than those feelings which would lead him to spare TAAROARII. 179 his son the disgrace to which he had subjected himself. To convince the people that the government would act according to the laws, and to deter others from their • violation, he directed that liis son should be tried. Taaroarii received the sentence with apparent indiffer ence, but was so exasperated with his father that he raore than once threatened to murder him, or to cause his destruction. Sorae months after this he broke a blood-vessel, it is supposed, with ove^-exertion at the public work ap pointed as a penalty for his crirae. After this he laid aside his labour ; his people would at the first have per formed the work for him, but he would not allow it, and appeared to identify himself with them in the hu miliating situation to which they had reduced thera selves. In the conversations we soriietiraes had with him, he seeraed to regret having connected hiraself with the party who now considered hira as their leader. Shortly after this event, syraptoms of rapid consump tion appeared, and assumed an alarming character. AU available, raeans were promptly employed, but without effect. His father frequently visited him, and his wife was^ his constant attendant. In order to try the effect of change of air, he was laid upon a litter, and brought on men's shoulders into the valley, where a temporary encampraent had been erected near our dwelling. The chiefs of the island, with their guards, attended, and, when they reached the valley, fired three volleys of musketry, indicative of their sympathy. While he reraained here we often saw hira ; he was generally coramunicative, and sometimes cheerful, ex cepting when the topic of religion was introduced, and then an evident change of feeling took place ; he would attend to our observations, biit seldom utter a syllable in reply, and seemed unwiUing to have the subject brought under consideration. This was the most dis tressing circumstance attending his illness, and to none more painfuUy affecting than to his aged father. On the last day of his life, Mrs., Ellis and our two «lder children, to whom he had always been partial, went to see him ; he appeared coraparatively cheerful, listened to aU that was said, and shook the children by the hand very affectionately when they said la ora na, or Farewell. I spent some time with him during the 180 POLYNESIAN RESI same afternoon, and it was the raost affectpg inter course I ever had with a dying fellow-creature. The encampment was fixed on an elevated part of the plain, near which the river, that flowed from the inte rior mountain to the sea, formed a considerable curva ture. The adjacent parts of the yalley were covered with shrubs, but the margin of the river was overgrown with slender branching purap, and ancient chestnut- trees, that reared their stately heads far above the rest, and shed their grateful shade on thq waters, and on the shore. Near the edge of the cool stream that rippled over the pebbles, and at the root ofone of these stately trees, 1 found the yourig chieftain, lying on a portable couch, surrounded by his sorrowing friends and attend ants. I askedwhythey had, brought hira there: they said that he complained of heat, or want of air, and they had brought him to that spot that he raight enjoy the re freshing coolness of the stream and the shade. I could not but admire their choice as I sat beside him, and felt, after' leaving the portions of the vaUey exposed to the sun's rays, as if I had entered another cUmate, The gentle, but elastic, current of air swept along the course of the river, beneath foUage that often formed beautiful natur^ arches over the water, and through which a straggling sunbeam was here and there seen sparkling in the ripple of the stream. After mingling my sympathy with the friends around, I spoke at some length to the young man, whosevisage had. considerably altered since the preceding day. I endeavoured to direct his mind to God for mercy through Christ, and affectionately urged a personal and imme diate application by faith to hira who is able to save even to the uttermost, and wiUing to receive even at the eleventh hour, &c. ' .A 11 prospect of his recovery had ceeded; our soUci tude was therefore e^eciaUy directed to his preparation for that state on which he was so soon to enter. This indeed had been our principal aim in aU our intercourse with him. On this occasion he raade no reply (indeed I suppose he was unable, had he been disposed), but he raised his head after I had done spea.king, and gazed steadfastly upon rae with an expression of anguish in his Whole countenance which I never shaU forget, and TAAROARll's LAST ILLNESS. 181 which is altogether indescribable. Whether it arose from bodily or mental agony I am not able to say, but I never beheld so affecting a spectacle. Before I left his couch, I agaii) attempted to direct his mind to the compassionate Redeemer, and, I think, engaged in prayer with him. The evening was advan cing when I took leave, and the conviction was strongly impressed on my mind that it was the last day he would spend on earth. My eye lingered on hira with intense and mingled interest, as I stood at his feet, and watched his short and laborious respiration ; his restless and feverish head had been long pillowed on the lap of his affectionate wife, whose face, with that of every other friend, was suffused with tears. His eye, rolling its keen, fitful glance on every object, but resting on none, spoke a state of feeUng remote indeed from tranquillity and ease. I could not help supposing that his agitated soul was through this, her natural window, looking wishfully on aU she was then leaving ; and as 1 saw his eye rest on his wife, his father, his friends around, and then glancing to- the green boughs that waved gently in the passing breeze, the bright and clear blue sky that ap peared at intervals through the foliage, and the distant hills whose summits were burnished with the splendour of the retiring sun — I almost imagined the inten^ty and rapidity of his glance indicated an impression that he would never gaze on them again. Such was the con viction of my own mind ; and I reluctantly retired, more deeply than ever impressed with the necessity of early and habitual preparation for death. O ! how different would the scene have been, had this interesting youth, as earth with all its associations re ceded, experienced the consolations and the, hopes of the gospel ! I presurae not to say that in his last hours, in those emotions of the soul which nature was too much exhausted to allow him to declare, and which were known only to God and to himself, he was not cheered by these anticipations. I would try to hope it was so : for indications of such feelings his sorrowing and suf-viving friends anxiously waited. How striking the contrast between his last day on earth and that of Teivaiva, another youth of Huahine, and, Uke Taaroarii, an only son, and an only child, who, when he, saw his sorrowing parents weeping by the side of the couch on which he lay, collected his 182 POLYNESIAN JIESE remaining strength, and, rousing hiraself, said, " I am in pain, but I am not unhappy ; Jesus Christ is with me, and he supports rae : we raust part, but we shall not be parted long; in heaven we, shaU raeet, and never die. Father, don't weep for me. Mother, don't-weep for me. We shaU never die in heaven." But the latter of these, while in health and corafort, had been happy in fhe ways of religion, seeking the favour of God : the former had neglected and, departed from those ways, and had lived in the practice of sin. About nine o'clock in the evening Mahine sent word that his son was worse. Mr. Barff and myself hastened to the encarapment, and found him apparently dying, but quite sensible. We remained with them some time, endeavoured to-administer a small portion of medicine, and then returned; A short tirae before raidnight, on the 25th of October, 1821, he breathed his last. When the raessenger brought us the tidings of his death, we repaired to the tent, found his parents, his wife, and an aunt who was exceedingly fond of hira, sobbing and weeping bitterly by the side of the corpse. The attendants joined in the lamentation ; it was not the wild and frantic grief of paganism, formerly so uni versal on such occasions, but the expressiori of deep anguish, chastened by submission to the Divine will. We mingled our sympathies with the mourners, spent a considerable time with them, endeavouring to impart consolation to their minds, and then returned to rest, but not to sleep. The sudden departure of the young chieftain, and the circumstances connected with it, powerfully affected our rainds. We had been intiraate with hira ever since our arrival in the islands, had received raany tokens of kindness frora hira, and had watched his progress with no ordinary interest, especially since his removal to Hua hine in 1818. We had considered hira as the future sovereign of the island in which we Should probably spend our days, but he was now for ever reraoved. We hoped we had been faithful to him. But at times such as this, when one and another were removed from the people among whom we laboured, we were led to reflect on the state into which they had entered ; and when their prospects had been dark, and their character doubt ful, we could not but fear that we perhaps had not manifested all the soUcitude which we ought to have FUNERAL or TAAROARII. 183 done, nor used means available for the purpose of lead ing them to Hira who alone could deliver from the fear of death, and all the consequences of conscious guilt. Reflections of this kind were now solemn and intense, and 1 trust profitable. The funeral was conducted in the Christian manner : a coffin was made for the body^ and a new substantial stone vault was built in the south-west angle of the chapel-yard ; on account of which his interment was deferred until fiye days after his decease. About three o'clock in the afternoon of the 30th of Oxitober we repaired to the 'encampment of the king, and found most of the people of the isjand assembled. About four the procession left, the tent. Mr. Barff and myself walked in front, followed by a few of the favour ite attendants of the young chief. The coffin was borne by six of his own men ; it was covered with a rich yel low pall, of thick native cloth, with a deep black border. Six young chiefs, in European suits- of mourning, bore the pall ; among them was the son of the king of Rai atea. His wife, his father, and near relations followed, wearing also deep European raourning. Mrs. Barff and Mrs. Ellis, with our children, walked after these ; the tenantry of his own district and servants of his house hold came next ; and after them the greater -part of the population of the island. .«s, - When we reached the place" of sepulture, I turned and, looking towards the valley, beheld, I think, a scene of the most soleran interest that ever I witnessed. Before us stood the bier, on which was laid the corpse ofthe individual of brightest hopes among all I beheld, destined for , the highest distinction the nation knew, whose tall and, for his years, gigantic form, open and manly brow, had . promised fair for many years of raost comraanding influence, an influence which we once hoped would have advanced his country's welfare. Be side that bier stood his youthful widow, weeping, we have reason to believe, tears of unfeigned sorrow ; and who, in addition to the loss she had sustained, was on the eve of becoming a mother. Near her stood his venerable sire, gray with age, and bending with infirm ities, taking a last sad look of all that now remained, of what had once been the stay of his declining years, his hope and joy; towards whom, in all his wayward courses, he had exercised the affection of a father. 184 POLYNESIAN RESI Around them stood the friends, and along the margin of the placid ocean, and emerging from the shadowy paths that wound along the distant valley, the mourning tribes, the father and the> mother, with their children, were seen advancing slowly to the spot. Each indi vidual in the whole procession, which, as they walked only two abreast, extended from the sepulchre to the vaUey, wore some badge of mourning; frequently it was a white tipUta, or mantle, with aivide black fringe. When the greater part had reached the chapel yard, Mr, Barff addressed the spectators, and I offered a prayer to the Almighty that the iriournful ev*nt might be made a blessing to tlje survivors. The body was then depos ited in the tombT-the paU left-on the coffin, .The father, the widow, and several other friends entered, took a last glance, and retired in sUence, under strong and painful emotion. When we withdrew, the servants placed a large stone against the entrance, and left it till the following day, when it was walled up. The torab was whitewashed, and a sraall coral stone placed per pendicularly, at the end towards the sea, on which was inscribed in the native language, this simple epitaph, " Taaroarii died October 25th, 1821." On the foUowing Sabbath, a discourse was delivered from 2 Kings xx. 1, in reference to the solemn event. I never saw persons more^ deeply affected than the friends of the deceased had been during his illness, especially his excellent father, and his wife. For many days prior to his death, the latter sat by his couch sup porting his "aching head in her lap, wiping the cold per spiration from his brow, or refreshing him with her fan,' watching with fondest solicitude his look,' and aiming, if possible, to anticipate his wishes. It ended not with his decease. She scarcely left his body untU it was interred, sitting on one side, while his aunt, or some Other relative, sat on the other, through the day ; and when overcome with fatigue and watching, falling asleep in the same station at night ; yet I never heard the least murmur or repining word against the dealings of God. It was but the excess of sorrow, on account of the bereaveraent. Two months afterward she became a mother ; and,during our continuance on the island, Mrs. EUis was considered as the guardian of her infant daughter. Since our departure, the child has been trained, by its mother, according to the direction of Mrs. MODES OF INTERMENT. 185 Barlf, and will probably succeed to the govemment of the island at its grandfather's death, Mahine, the pious and venerable chief, stiU lives to be an ornament to the Christian religion, a nursing father to the- infant churches established in his country, and the greatest blessing to the people whora he governs. His danghter-in-law, who it was hoped would have sup plied to him the place of his departed son, has been removed by death, -and disappointed those hopes. The orphan princess, an interesting and amiable child, is under the Christian guardianship of Maihara, the daughter of the king of Raiatea, arid sister to the norainal queen of the island. Many barbarous cereraonies attended pagan interment, but, since the abolition of idolatry, the rites and usages of Christian burial, as far as they seemed- desirable, or the circumstances of the people would admit, have been introduced, and are generally observed, - At each of the missionary stations, a piece of ground near the seashore, and at some dist'ance frora the houses, has been devoted by the government to the purposes of interment, and aU who die near are buried there. Those who die in the remote districts are buried by their friends near the place ; sometiraes in the vicinity of their little rustic chapel, at others in the garden near their dwelling. They are riot always deposited in a coffin, as the survivors are often destitute of boards and nails ; they are, however, decently interred, usuaUy wrapped in native cloth and matting, and placed in the keel or lower part of a canoe. If there be 3. native missionary or teacher near, he is called to officiate at the interment ; if not, a male branch of the faraily usually offers up a prayer when the body is comraitted to the earth. Some^ inconvenience was sustained when the natives first erabraced Christianity, with regard to the burial of those who died at a distance from the raissionary station. The heat of the climate was often such as rendered it necessary to inter them on the day of their decease, or on that which followed, and they had not time to send for a nativeteacher. To obviate this, a prayer suitable to be offered up at the tirae of interment was written, and distributed among the natives, for the use of those who resided at a dis. tance. This appeared' not only according to Christian propriety, but necessary, to guard against any latent 186 POLYNESIAN RESE influence of the former superstitions, which might lurk in the minds of those who, though they renounced idolatry, were but very partially instructed in many points of Christian doctrine. At the missionary stations, the corpse has seldoin been brought to the place of worship, 'We in general repair to the house, and offering up a prayer with the family, accompany the procession to the place of interment ; our practice, however, in this respect is not uniform, but is regulated by circumstances. On reaching the burying-ground, we stand by the side of the grave; which is usually about six feet deep, and when the coffin is lowered down, address the friends of the deceased and- the spectators, and conclude the ser vice with a short prayer. At first they believed that the deceased rnust be in some degree benefited by this service ; and that such should occasionally have been their ideas is not sur prising, when we consider the mass of delusion from which they had been so recently delivered. This, how ever, rendered it necessary for us to be raore explicit in impressing upon their rainds that the state of the dead was unalterably fixed, and that our own benefit alone could be advanced by attending it. But the views and ceremonies connected with death, and with the disposal of the body, either in the pagan or Christian mannel-, are uniraportant in corap'drison with the change in the individuals who have died, and the views and an ticipations which, under these systems, different indi viduals have entertained. " One J:hing, of' all I have read or heard," said the aged and venerable Matahira, " now supports ray mind-^Christ has said ' 1 am the way.' ¦¦ . ) JJ " He the "beloved Son, The Son beloved, Jesus Christ, The Father gave. That we through hun might live," was sung by another in the native language, with the last breath she drew. " 1 am happy, 1 am happy," were among the last words of the late distinguished regent of the Sandwich Islands. These are expressions no pagan ever used, in looking forward to his dissolution. They result alone frora the effects which the raercy of DEATH OF POMARE IL 187 God in Christ is adapted to kindle in our hearts, aug mented by gratitude to Hira who hath brought life and immortality to light. CHAPTER IX, Arrival of the deputation in Huahine — Death of Pomare — Notice of his an cestry — Description of "his person — His mental character and habits — Per severance and proficiency in writing— His letter to England, &c, — Estima. tion in which he v/ke held by the people— Pomai-e the iirst convert to Christianity — His commendable endeavours to promote its extension— De clension during the latter part of his life— His friendship to tile missionaries uniform — His aid important — Circumstances connected with- his deatli — A ccession of his son Pomare TII, — Coronation of the infant king — Encourag ing progress in learning— Early death— Extensive use of letters among the islanders— Writing on plantain-leaves — Value of writing-paper — South Sea Academy — Trials peculiar to mission families among uncivilized nations — Advantages of sending missionary cbildren to civilized countries. Soon after our return from Tahiti, the indisposition of Mr. and Mrs. Williams required a suspension of their exertions in Raiatea, and a visit to New South Wales, On the 8th of Deceraber, 1821, the shout of E pahi, e! A ship, ho ! re-echoed through our valley ; we pro ceeded towards the beach, and, on reaching the sea-side, beheld a large American Vessel already within the har bour. The captain soon landed, and informed us that our friends Messrs. Bennet and Tyerman were in the ship. We hastened on board, conducted them to the shore, and welcoraed them to our dwellings. Mr. Bennet took up his abode with Mr. Barff, while we were happy to accommodate Mr, Tyerman, The chiefs and people, who had been led to expect a visit from our friends, greeted their arrival with demonstrations of joy; tliese friends remained some tirae in Fa-re, and the period they spent with us was one of unusual interest and enjoyraent. In the close of this year, 1821, the mission and the nation experienced the heaviest beareavement that had occurred since the introduction of Christianity. This was the death of the king, Pomare II., which took place on the seventh of Deceraber, the day preceding the depu tation's arrival in Huahine. His health had been for sorae time declining, but his departure at last was 188 POLYNESIAN RESEAP sudden. I spent the greater part of a Sabbath afternoon with him at Eiraeo, in the beginning of October. He was then unable to leave fhe house, but was not con sidered dangerously iU. 1 was then for some days with him, and had not seen him since. He had long been afflicted with the elephantiasis, a disorder very preva lent among the people ; but the principal cause of his dissolution was a dropsical complaint to which he had been for sorae time subject. The corispicuous station Pomare had occupied in the poUtical changes of Tahiti, since the arrival ofthe mis sionaries, the prominent part he -had taken in the aboli tion of idolatry, the. zeal he had manifested in the estab lishment of Christianity', and the assistance he had rendered to the mifesioriaiies, caused a considerable sen sation to be experienced araong all classes by his death ; and as his name is perhaps raore farailiar to the English reader than that of any other native of the South Sea klands, some accoimt of his person and character cannpt fail to be acceptable. Pomare, originally caUed Otoo, was the son pf Po mare and Idia : the father was sovereign of the larger peninsula when it was visited by Cook, and was then called Otoo ; subsequently, being aided by the mutineers of the Bounty, he became king of the whole islands and adopted the name of Pomare, which at his deatlj vvas assumed by his son, ahd has since been the hereditary name of the reigning family. Idia, his mother, was a princess of the adjacent island of, Eiraeo, and sister to Motuaro, one of the principal chiefs at the time of Cook's visit. Pomare was the second son of Otoo an'd Idia, the first having been destroyed according to the regulations of tlie Areois society, of which they were merabers. He was born about the year -1774, and was consequently about forty-seven years of age at the tirae of his decease, TaU, and proportionahly stout, hut not corpulent, his person was coramanding, being upwards of six feet high.* His head was generally bent forward, and he seldora walked erect. His coraplexion was not dark, but rather tawny ; his countenance often heavy, though his eyes at times beamed with inteUigence, The portrait of Po mare in the frontispiece to the first volurae of this '* His father's liei^ht was six feet four incites. CHARACTER OF POMARE. 18? work is from one taken at Tahiti by an artist attached to two Russian ships of discovery, that visited the islands a short time before his death, and, excepting a little undue prominency in the forehead, is a good lik«- ness. His character was totally different from that of his father — who was a man of enterprise, excessive labour and perseverance, bent on the aggrandizement of his family, and the improvement of his country, clearing waste tracts of land, planting them, and generally oc cupying the people with some public work. Poraare took no delight in exertipns of this kind ; his habits of life were indolent, his disposition sluggish, and his first appearance was by no means adapted to produce a favourable irapression on a stranger's mind. Cap tain Wilson conceived such an idea of his stupidity and incapacity, as to suppose him the last person on whom any favourable impression would be made. He was, however, though heavy in his a'ppearance and indolent in his habits, inquisitive, attentive, and raore thoughtful, perhaps, than any other native of the islands ; a keen observer of every thing that passed under his notice, although at the tirae he would not appear to be paying particular regard. He was riot only curious and patient in his inquiries, laborious in his re searches, but often exhibited a great degree of ingenuity. 1 have sometimes been in his company, when he has kept a party of chiefs in constant laughter, as much from the coolness with which his expressions were uttered, as the huraour they contained. He was not, however, fond of conviviality or society, but appeared to be more at ease when alone, or attended only by one or two favourite chiefs. In mental application Pomare certainly exceeded every other Tahitian ; and had he been free from practices which so banefuUy retarded his progress, and enjoyed the advantage of a regular and liberal education, there is every reason to beUeve the developraent and culture of his intellect would have shown that it was of no in ferior order. He had heard rauch, frora the early visiters to his island, of King George, and appeared on more than one occasion desirous to make the British sovereign his model. He was walking one day in the district of Pare with great dignity, in the company of the missionaries, 190 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. when he suddenly stopped, and said, "Does King George walk in this way V As soon as he in any de gree comprehended the use of letters, he manifested a great desire to be able to read apd write, and was one of the first pupils. Looking over the books of the mis sionaries one day, he saw a Hebrew Bible j the singu larity of the letter attracted his attention,; and having been informed that it was the language of the Jews, in which the greater part of the- Scriptures was written, he expressed a wish that one of the missionaries would teach hira to read it, inquiring at the same time whether King George understood Hebrew. In this he did not persevere, but he soon made himself master of the Eng lish alphabet, and could read in the- English Bible, not with fluency, but so as to comprehend the meaning of the plainest parts. It was, however, in his native language that the Tahitian ruler made the greatest progress, and in writing this he excelled every other individual. Mr. Nott and Mr. Davies were his principal instructers ; the latter has spent raany hours with him, sitting on the ground, and teaching him to forra letters on the sand, probably before Dr, BeU's system was introduced to general notice in England, The handwritingof Pomare, during the latter part bf his life, was rauch better than that of any of the raissionaries. His earUest_letters or notes, the first ever written by a native, were frora Eiraeo. In 1805 he wrote a letter to the missionaries. In 1807 he wrote one to the missionary society, which, being the first despatch ever forwarded by a native of those islands to Britain, is a great curiosity. The directors had -written, advising him to bahish the natibnal idol, to attend to the instruction of the mis sionaries, and to discountenance those sins which were so rapidly depopulating his country. In reply, he wrote a letter in the native language, which the missionaries translated; he then copied the translation, and both letters, signed by his own hand, wereforwarded to Lon don. He expresses a determination to banish Oro to Raiatea, wishes the directors success in their efforts to instruct the people of Tahiti, which he caUs a bad land, a regardless land. He desires them to send a number of riien, women, and children to Tahiti, to send cloth, and then they wiU adopt the EngUsh dress ; but teUs them, that, should he be kiUed, they wiU have no CHARACTER OF POMARE. 191 friend in the islands. " Come not here after I am dead," was his expression. He also requested them to send him all the curious things in England, especially those necessary for writing, and after enumerating pens, ink, &c., concluded his request by stating, "Let no writing utensil be wanting." He signed his name, " Po mare, King of Tahiti," &c. and superscribed his letter to " My Friends the Missionary Society, London." Sedentary occupations and amuseraents appeared raore congenial to Pomare than active pursuits ; he found an agreeable occupation in braiding the finest kinds of cinet "with the fibre of the cocoanut-husk ; writing, however, was his chief eraployraent and re creation. At first he had a writing-house erected, that he might follow his favourite pursuit uninterrupted by his domestics or the members of his household ; he then had a table, but, during the latter part of his life, he usually wrote lying in a horizontal position, lean ing his chest on a high" cushion, and having a desk be fore him. Pomare kept a regular daily journal, and wrote, in a book provided for that purpose, every text of Scripture that he heard. Sometimes he wrote out the prayers he used in social and private devotion ; maintained an ex tensive correspondence, after the introduction of writing araong the people ; prepared the fiyst code of laws for his kingdora ; transcribed thera fairly with his own hand, and promulgated them with his voice. He also ren dered very iraportant aid to the missionaries in the translation of the Scriptures, and copied out raany por tions before they were printed. The king was remarkably pleased with engravings and paintings, and has often caUed at my house to look at the plates in an Encyclopaedia, frequently asking if I thought it possible for hira to learn to draw. I always told hira it depended on' his own industry ; that I had no doubt of his capacity, if he would apply. His policy as a ruler was deliberative and cautious, rather than prorapt and decisive, and raost of his mea sures were pursued more with a view to their ulterior influence than to their immediate effect. His views were in many respects contracted, and he was easily imposed upon by bold and heedless advisers. He was more rapacious than tyrannical, and probably would not have been so rigid in his actions, but for the influence of 193 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. those constantly around him, who often availed them selves of his authority and infiuence to advance their own unjust and oppressive proceedings. Though des titute of many essentials in a great prince, the Tahitian ruler, was universaUy respected: He was beloved hy his own family, and by many of the chiefs, who were under great obUgations to him ; but 1 do not think he was beloved by the nation at large. It was rather a respectful fear than a fond attachraent, that was gen eraUy entertained for him , He was exceedingly jealous of any interference >vith his prerogative or his interest, and was frequently attended by a number of the Pau- motuans, or natives of the Palliser Islands, as a kind of body-guard. These were considered as in some degree foreigners ; and their selection by the king, as the proi tectors of his person, caused dissatisfaction in the minds of several of the chiefs. Pom'are was not only the Urst pupil vi^hom the mis sionaries taught to read and write, but he was also the first convert to Christiariity in the island of which he was king. He made a profession of belief in the true God, and the orily Saviour, in 1812 ; and there is every reason to believe, that according to the knowledge he had of Christianity, and the duties it enjoined, he was sincere. He bore the persecution and ridicule to which he was exposed on this account, with firmness and temper, raildly entreating those who revUed him to ex araine for themselves. In the year 181S he proposed to Tamatoa the king of Raiatea, and Mahine the king of Huahine, to renounce idolatry. They deterrainately refused ; but he still con tinued firra in his own principles, and persevering in all his endeavours to infiuence other chiefs in favour of Christianity. It was in consequence of his recoraraend ation, that Taaroarii, the son of the king of Huahine, prohibited the abominations of the Areois, and sent for a preacher to teach him the Word of God. Pomare pon- tinued the steady disciple of the missionaries for sev eral years, using aU his influence in persuading the people to renounce their dependence on the idols, and to hear about the true God. His conduct in this re spect was most commendable, for 1 never heard that he had recourse to any other means than persuasion, or that he ever held out any other inducements than those which the .Scriptures present. He had no honours or CHARACTER OF POMARE. 193 emoluments to bestow, for he was at that time in exile ; and the constant reproach of his family and ad herents was, that his ruin was inevitable, as he had, by renouncing the national worship, made the gods his enemies. The conduct of the king in the battle of Atehuru, his treatment of the captives, and his clemency towards the vanquished have been already detailed, as well as hie journeys for the purpose of inducing the people to em brace Christianity, His baptism, and his promulgation of the laws by which the islands of Tahiti and Eimeo are now governed, have been also given. During the latter part of his life, his conduct was in many respects exceptionable, and his character appeared less araiable than it had been before. He had shpwn his weakness in allowing the unfounded representations of a transient visiter to induce hira to request that the manufacture of sugar might not be extensively carried on under the management of Mr. Gyles, He was also, as might have been expected, from the circurastance of his having been the high-priest of the nation under the system of false religion, and having been identified with all the religious observances of the people, too fond of regulating matters purely connected with public worship or ecclesiastical discipline ; and although the missionaries deeraed it right respectfully to inform him that here the directions of the Scripture were suflicient and supreme, and could not with safety or propriety be altered in subserviency to any measures of political expediency, they uniformly supported his authority, endeavoured to strengthen his influence, and increase his resources, as the rightful sovereign of the people. A few years before his death he was induced, by the representations of designing and misinforraed individuals to engage in injudicious commercial speculations, with persons in New South Wales. This proved a great source of disquietude to his mind, and probably hastened his death.' One or two vessels were purchased for hfm at a most extravagant price ; and the produce of the island was required to pay for them, and to defray ex penses connected with their navigation. One of them was, seized, a lawsuit instituted in consequence at Port Jackson, the rahui or tabu laid upon the island, the rights of property were invaded, and no native was aUowed to dispose of any article of produce, except- VOL, III.— I 194 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. ing to the agents of the king. He became the chief factor in the island, or rather the instrument of those who were associated' with him in these commercial speculations, and who used his authority to deprive the people of the right to seU the fruits of their own labour. The inhabitants were required to bring their pigs, oU, &c., and to receive in return what he chose to give them : the individuals who urged upon hira this policy considered all they could obtain by any means as fair eraoluraent. The welfare of the nation, the natural rights of the people, the establishment of commerce upon jost and honourable principles, were beneath their regard. It is needless to add, that these speculations ended in embarrassment and loss. The habits of intemperance which Pomare was led to indulge, in consequence of these associations, threw a stain upon his character, and cast a gloom over hjs mind, from which he never recovered, and under the cloud thus induced he ended his days. He was also reported to be addicted to other and more debasing vices, but I have no wish to exhibit the dark features of his character — truth and irapartiality require what has been said — and it is with far greater pleasure that we contemplate his uniform kindness to the mis sionaries, and steady patronage, especially in their sea sons of greatest extreraity, when civil wars forced them to abandon their home, and seek safety in flight. His unwavering adherence to the profession of Christianity, amid the greatest reproach, and his valuable aid in its introduction, were highly serviceable to the nation. Without presuming to pronounce an opinion on his final state, he certainly was eraployed by God (who selects his agents from whatever station he chooses, and uses thera just so long as he sees fit), as a principal instru ment in subverting idol-worship, introducing Christian ity, and estabUshing a code of laws founded on the principles of true reUgion; he is therefore to be con sidered, if not a father, undoubtedly as a benefactor, to his country, Pomare was not averse to religious con versation and devotional engageraents; we conversed very freely together the last tirae I saw him, which was about two months before his death. He expressed his apprehensions of the increase of his disorder, but did not thiuk it likely to prove fatal ; he was shortly after ward reraoved to Tahiti, where he died. During, his CORONATION OF POMARE III. 195 illness he was attended by Mr. Crook, vvho reminded him, in their last conversation, of the nuraber and raag nitude of his sins, and directed hira to Jesus Christ, who alone could save his soul : all the reply he made was, " Jesus Christ alone," and in about an' hour afterward expired. The lamentations of his friends, and of the people around, were great ; a new torab was erected for his remains near the large chapel he had built at Papaoa. Messrs. Nott, Davies, and Henry, the senior missionaries in the island, performed the religious services at his funeral, which was attended by all the missionaries, and multitudes of the people. Mr. Nott, who had been in habits of closest intimacy with hitn, and had better op portunities of understanding his character than others, deeply regretted his departure. No one felt the loss of his assistance more than Mr. Nott, who was princi pally employed in translations of the Scripture. For this department Pomare was well qualified, and always ready to render the most important services. He was well acquainted with the language, usages, and ancient in stitutions of the people, and his corrections were usually made with judgment and care. The compUation of a dictionary of the Tahitian language would, if completed, have been invaluable ; but he had scarcely commenced it systematicaUy when death arrested his progress, even in the prirae oflife. Poraare was succeeded in the governraent by his son, who, being proclairaed king im mediately after his father's death, was crowned, under the title of Pomare III., on the 21st of April, 1824. In order that the ceremonies on this occasion might be performed in the presence of the inhabitants, the greater part of whom were expected to attend, a stone platforra was raised nearly sixty feet square, upon which another smaller platforra was erected, where the coro nation was to take place. ¦When the order of the procession was arranged, it advanced towards the place, preceded by two native girls, who strewed the path with flowers. Mahine, the chief of Huahine, and nominally one of the judge.s of Tahiti, carried a large Bible, and was attended by the deputation frora the Missionary Society, who were then at Tahiti, and Messrs, Nott and Henry ; the rest of the missionaries followed. Then came the supreme judges, 12 196 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. three abreast ; Utami, the chief of Atehuru, bearing a copy of the Tahitian code of laws Three other judges foUowed ; and Tati, the chief of Papara, waUcing in the centre, carried the crown. The young king seated on a chair, was next borne in the procession by four young chieftains, an equal number of chiefs' sons supporting the canopy over his head ; his mother and his sister walking on One side, and his aunts on the other. His brother-in-law walked immediately behind, and was followed by Tamatoa, the king of Raiatea, and the merabers of the royal faraily. The governors, judges of districts, and magistrates, walking four abreast, closed the procession, ¦When they reached the place of coronation, the king was seated in his chair ; in the centre before him, on sraall tables, the crown, the Bible, and the code of laws were placed. Those who were to take part in the transactions of the day were seated around and be hind the king. The youthful Pomare, being oidy four years of age, was necessarily passive in the iraportant business. Mr, Davies, one of the senior missionaries, spoke for him ; and as aU were requested to take a part in the ceremo nies, when the king had been asked if he promised to govern the people with justice and mercy, agreeably to the laws and the Word of God, Mr, Nott placed the crown on his, head, and pronounced a benediction upon the young ruler ; Mr, Darling then presented'him with a Bible, accompanying the presentation with a suitable address. As soon as the coronation ceremony was closed, a herald proclaimed pardon to all who were under the sen tence ofthe law. Every exile was directed to return, and aU were exhorted to becorae good merabers of society. The asserably afterward repaired tb the Royal Mission Chapel, where divine service was perforraed, and thus the first Christian coronation in the South Sea islands closed. The kings of Tahiti were not formerly invested with any regal dignity by receiving a crown, but by being girded vvith the maro ura, or sacred girdle, of which cereraony an account has been already given. On that occasion they bathed the king in the sea, before gird ing him with the sacred maro. On the present occa sion they anointed his person with oil ; a part of the DEATH OF POMARE III. 197 ceremony which, I think, might have been as weU dis pensed with. Shortly after his coronation, young Pomare III. was placed at the South Sea Acaderay, in Eiraeo, under the care of Mr. and Mrs. Orsmond, for the purpose of re ceiving, with the children of the raissionaries, a systera atic English education. His disposition was affection ate, his progress encouraging, and he promised fair to gain a correct acquaintance with the EngUsh lan guage, which, had he lived, by giving him the key to aU the stores of knowledge contained in it, would have con ferred on him a commanding, influence among the people over whora the providence of God had raade hira king. So far as his faculties were developed, they were not inferior to those of European children at the same age ; but he was soon removed by death. Being attacked with a complaint that passed through the islands about the raiddle of Deceraber, 1826, he was immediately conveyed to his mother's residence in Pare, where he lingered till the eleventh of January, 1827, when he died in Mr. Orsmond's arms. His mother and other friends standing by, when they saw hira actually in the agonies of death, were so affected that they could not bear to look upon his struggles, but cast a cloth over Mr. Orsmond and the dying child he held in his arms ; they reraoved it in a few minutes, and found his spirit had fled. He was Pomare's only son, and the sole child of his surviving widow. A daughter of Poraare II. by a second wife, whose narae is Aimata, and who is about sixteen years of age, being his only surviving child, has suc ceeded to the government ; she was married some years ago to a young chief of Tahaa, to wh»m her father had given his own name, so that Pomare is still the regal name. Her character, perhaps, is yet scarcely forraed, and we can only hope she will prove a blessing to the nation. Although Poraare II, was the first pupil whora the missionaries taught to write, and who excelled all others, his example induced many to make an atterapt, while his success encouraged thera to proceed ; and it is probable that as great a proportion ofthe population of the Georgian and Society Islands can now write as would be found capable of doing so in many portions of the United Kingdora, Some progress had been made 198 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. by several of the most intelhgent of the converts, before the abolition of idolatry in 1815 ; but it is only since that period that writing has become general. Various methods of instruction have been adopted: some of the natives have been taught altogether by writ ing on the sea-beach, or on sand in the schools ; others have learned to write on the broad smooth leaves of the plantain-tree, using a bluntly pointed stick, instead of a pen or pencil. The deUcate fibres of the leaf, being bruised by the pen,, become brown, while the other parts remain green. If it was necessary to read it immediately after being written, when held up to the Ught the letters were easily distinguished. These plantain- leaf letters answer very well for short notes to pass among the natives themselves ; but are liable to injury if conveyed to any great distance, or kept any length of time. They are always rolled up like a sheet of parchment, and have aremarkably rustic appearance, being usually fastened with a piece of baric, tied rounti the roll, the length Of which, being formed by the breadth of the leaf, is about twelve or fifteen inches. I have often seen the chiefs messenger hastening along the road with two or three plantain-leaf rolls under his arm, or in his hand, containing the despatches of which he was the bearer. Some of the chiefs learned to write on a slate, but these have always been articles too scarce and -valuable for common use ; they were very highly prized, and preserved with care.- The greatest fa.vour a chief could show his son, has sometimes beeri to allow him to practise on his slate. We have often regretted that the supply was not more abundant, and though several hundreds of the thick slates, without frames, such as are used in the national schools, have been sent out by the society, and others by the UberaUty of friends, they have not been suificient to supply the different schools: so that iqany of the natives, who desire to possess thera as their own, are stiU destitute. Framed slates are sometirnes taken by traders as articles (if barter ; but they are so Uable to break, that the people greatly prefer the kind above aUuded to.' A copy-book has never been used for the purpose of learning to write ; paper has always been too scarce and valuable araong them, to admit of such an appro priation ; and a copy-book, although highly prized, is DESIRE FOR WRITING-PAPER. 199 used rather as a journal, commonplace book, or deposi tory of something more valuable than mere copies. Writing-paper is still a verj' valuable article, and proves one of the most acceptable presents that can be sent them, Ihave often been amused on beholding a native, who had several letters to write, sitting down to look over his paper, and finding perhaps that he possessed but one sheet, has been obliged to cut it into three, four, or five pieces, and regulate the size of his letter, not by the quantity of information he had to communicate, but by the extent of the paper he had to fill. I have recently received upwards' of twenty letters from the natives, sorae of thera, although they were to travel fifteen thousand railes, written on very small scraps of paper, and that often of an inferior kind': part of the small space for writing being occupied by apologies for the small paper, and urgent requests that, if I do not return soon, I will send them some paper ; and that if I return, 1 will take them a supply. The art of writing is of the greatest service to the people in their commercial, civil, and do .'nestic trans actions, as well as in the pursuit of knowledge. They are not so far advanced in civilization as to have a regular post ; but a native seldora makes a journey across the island, and scarcely a canoe passes from one island to another, without conveying a nuraber of let ters. Writing is an art perfectly congenial with the habits of the people, and hence they have acquired it with uncoraraon facility; not only have the children readUy learned, but raany adults, who never took pen or pencil in their hands until they were thirty or even forty years of age, have by patient perseverance learned, in the space of twelve months or two years, to write a fair and legible hand. Their comparatively sraall alphabet, and the siraple structure of their language, has probably been advantageous ; their letters are bold and well formed, and their ideas are always expressed with perspicuity, precision, and simplicity.* The South Sea Academy, in which the young iing * Writing apparatus and materials of every kind are in great demaiid among tliem ; moat of the letters 1 have received contain a request tbat, if poseible, 1 will seiid them out a writing-desk, or an inkstand, penknife, ^ns, a blank paper book, &c. The widow of Taaroarii, in her last letter, solicited Eoe to bring her a Vriting-de^k. 200 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. was a pupil, is an important institution, in connexion with the missionary establishments in this part of Polynesia. It had long been required by the circum stances of the European families, and the peculiar state of Tahitian society ; and the estabUshment of the academy was designed to meet their peculiar neces sities in this respect. ¦ There are raany trials and privations inseparable from the situation of a Christian raissionary araong a hea then people. The latent enmity af the mind famiUar with vice to the raoral influence of the gospel, the prejiidices against his message, fhe infatuation of the pagan in favour of idolatry, and the pollutions connected therewith, originate trials coraraon to every mission ary : but there are others peculiar to particular spheres of labour. The situation of a European in India, where, although surrounded by pagans, he yet can mingle with civUized and occasionaUy with Christian society, is very different frora that of one pursuing his solitary labours, year after year, in the deserts of Africa, or the isolated islands of the South Sea, where ijve years have soraetimes elapsed without hearing frora England, where there is but one European family in many of the islands, and where I have been twelve or fifteen months without seeing a ship, or hearing a word of the English language, excepting what has been spoken by our own farailies. There are disadvaritages even where the missionary is in what is called civilized society, but they are of a different kind from those experienced from a residence among a rude, uncultivated race. In either barbarous or civUized countries, the greatest trials the mission aries experience are those connected- with the bringing up of a family in the midst of a heathen population; and it probably causes more anxious days and sleepless nights than any other source of distress to which they are exposed. This was the case in the South Sea mission. There were at one time nearly sixty children or orphans of missionaries ; and there are now, per haps, forty rising up in the different islands, under cir cumstances adapted to produce in their parents' minds the most painful anxiety. In the Sandwich Islands, during our residence there, although our hearts were cheered, and our hands strengthened, by the great change daily advaneingt ANXIETY OF MISSIONARY PARENTS. 201 among the people, yet the situation of our children was such as constantly to excite the raost intense and painful interest. It is irapossible for an individual, who has never mingled in pagan society, and who does not understand the language employed in their most farailiar intercourse with each other, to forra any adequate idea of the awfully polluting character of their most coramon com munications. Their appearance is often such as the eye, accustomed only to scenes of civilized life, turns away in pain from beholding. Their actions are often most repulsive, and their language is still worse. Ideas are exchanged, with painful insensibility, which cannot be repeated, and whose most rapid passage through the mind must leave pollution. So strongly did we feel this in the Sandwich Islands, that the only play-ground to which our children were allowed access was en closed with a high fence ; and the- room they occupied was one strictly interdicted to the natives, who were in the habit of coming to our dwelling. We always sought to inspire the natives with con fidence, and adrait them to our houses ; but when any of the chiefs carae, they were attended by a large train of followers, whose conversation with our own ser vants we -could not restrain, but which we should have trerabled at the thought that our children heard. The disadvantages under which they raust have laboured are too apparent to need enumeration. Idolatry had indeed been renounced by the natives, but, during the earlier part of the time we spent there, nothing better had been substituted in its place, and the great mass of the people were Uving without any moral or reli gious restraint. Our corapanions the American missionaries felt deeply and tenderly on account of the circurastances of their rising farailies, and made very full representa tions to their patrons ; they have also sent sorae of their children to their friends in their native country. The children of the missionaries in the South Sea islands were not in a situation exactly similar to those in the northern islands. The raoral and religious change that has taken place since the subversion of idolatry had very materially iraproved the condition of the people, and elevated the tone of moral feeling among them ; still it must be remembered, that though many are under the controUing influence of Christian principle 13 203 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES, and moral purity, these are not the majority, and there IS not yet among thera that fine sense of decency which IS so powerful a safeguard to virtue; ^nd, besides tbis the circumstances of the famUies, are far from being the most pleasing. In only two of the islands is there raore than one missionary; and only at the academy, where Mr. Blos sora is associated with Mr. Orsmond, is there raore than one family at a station. The duties of each settle ment, from the partially organized state of society, and the multitude of objects deraanding his attention, are such, that the raissionary cannot devote the neces sary time to the education of his own chUdren, with out neglecting pubhc duties ; hence he experiences a constant and painful struggle between the dictates of parental affectibn and the clairas of pastoral care. To afford relief, as far as possible, frora this embarrass ment, the South Sea Academy was estabUshed by the deputation frora the society, and the missionaries iu the islands, in March, 1824. In compliance with the earnest recoramendation of the deputation, and the solicitation of his brethren, Mr. Orsmond removed from Borabora, to take charge of the institution, over which he has continued to pre side, to the satisfaction of the parents, and the benefit of the pupils. The first annual meeting was held in March, 1826 ; the children had not only been taught to read the Scriptures, and to commit the most approved catechisras to raeraory, but had also been instructed in writing, grammar, history, &c. During the examina tion portions of Scripture were read and recited, copy books exarained, probleras in geometry worked, and parts of catechisras on geography, astronomy, and chronology repeated. The whole of the proceedings gave satisfaction to aU present, and left an impression on each mind that great attention must have been paid by Mr. and Mrs. Orsmond to the pupils, during the short period they had been in the school. Subsequent exara inations have been equaUy satisfactory. The institution is under the management of a com mittee, and its primary design was to furnish a suitable and, so far as circumstances would admit, a liberal education to the children of the raissionaries, " such an education as is calculated to prepare thera to fiU useful situations in future Ufe." Native children of UHlLil^KJU^iN UiT iU,i»mUJ>IAKil<;a. 203 piety and talent have access to its advantages, and it is designed as preparatory to a serainary for training native pastors to fiU different stations in the South Sea islands. It is an important institution, and will, it is hoped, exert no ordinary influence on the future char acter of the nation at large, as well as prove highly advantageous to the individuals who become its in mates. It merits the countenance of the friends of missions. Several individuals have kindly enriched its library with suitable elementary books, philosophical apparatus, &c., but these are stiU very inadequate to the accomplishment of the design contemplated. But while the est'dblishment of this institution is a just occasion of gratitude to the missionaries, it does not remove anxiety from their minds with regard to the future prospects of their families. The nature of their station, and the spirit and principles of their office as ministers of Christ, prevent the parents frora making any provision for their families. The pro per settlement of their children is an object of most anxious soUcitude to Christian parents at home — to foreign missionaries it is peculiarly so. Their reraote and isolated situation precludes their erabracing those openings in Divine Providence for placing their chil dren in suitable circurastances, of which they might avail themselves in Christian and civilized society. The prospects of filling comfortable stations there, are aU uncertain ; professions there are none ; commerce is in its infancy, as will appear from the fact of its being still carried on by exchange or barter. The circulation of money is very limited, and its use known to but few. The fondest hope of every missionary is, that his children may grow up in the fear of God, be raade par takers of his grace, and, under the constraining influ ence of the love of Christ in their hearts, irabibe their parent's spirit, select his office, spend their lives in sup plying his lack of service, and carrying on that work which he has been honoured to commence. In prose cuting this, they will have advantages their parents never possessed; they wiU have been identified with the people among whom they labour, and will not appear in language and idiom as foreigners ; but they wiU labour under raore than counteracting disadvan tages, if they never visit the land of their fathers, and 204 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. must necessarily be far less efficient teachers of the truths of Christianity than their predecessors in the work. There are a thousand things known to an individual who has received or finished his education and passed his early days in England, which can only be known under corresponding circumstances, and which a mis sionary can never, in sueh situations as the South Sea islands, teach his child. Those born there may indeed have access to English Uterature; but raany books, however faraiUar and perspicuous to an ordinary Eng lish reader, wiU, in many perhaps important parts, appear enigmatical to those who, have never seen any other society than such as that now under considera tion. It has always appeared to me, in reference to an unciviUzed, iUiterate people, who are to be raised from ignorance, barbarism, and idolatry, to a state of intelU gence, enjoyment, and piety — where their character, habits, taste, and opinions have to be formed principaUy, ifnot entirely, by the raissionary — thatforsonie genera tions at least, every missionary's child, trained for the missionary work even by a father's harui, and blessed with the grace of God, ought to finish his education in the land of his parents, prior to entering upon the work to which his life is devoted. Many a niissionary spends the greater part of his life without being able to produce any powerful or favour able impression upon the people araong whom he has laboured ; others expire in a field on which they have bestowed fervent prayer, tears, and toil, but frora which no fruit has been gathered ; the second generation have to comraene^ their labours under circurastances cor responding with those under which their predecessors began. "When success attends their efforts, and a change takes place decisive and extensive as that which has occurred in the South Sea islands ;¦ yet so mighty is the work, so deep the prejudices, so difflcult to be overcorae are evil habits, and so' slow the process of improvement upon a broad seale, even under the raost favourable circumstances, that the ordina^ period of a missionary's hfe in actual service is too short to raise them frora their wretchedness to a standard in morals, habits, intelligence, and stability in religion, at which those who were instrumental in originatmg their eman cipation would desire to leave thew. They never can \^xiiijx/ai:,i^ Ui! lUisaiunAKifiS* 205 be expected to advance beyond those who are their models, their preceptors, and their guides ; and if the successors of the first missionaries be in any respect inferior to their predecessors, the progress of the nation must, in regard to iraprovement, be retrograde — unless this deficiency be suppUed frora some other source. On this account, it does appear exceedingly desirable that the successors to the first missionaries araong an uncivilized people, who raay even renounce idolatry, should be in every respect equaUy qualified for this office with those by whom they were preceded, and that even the children of the missionaries should be able to carry on, to a greater degree of perfection, that work which their parents were privileged to commence. I am aware that the expense attending a measure of this kind will probably prevent its adoption in those institutions by whora the first missionaries are sent out ; but this does not render the raeasure less desirable or iraportant in its iraraediate or remote and permanent influence upon the converted nations. The same diffl culties occur with regard to the promotion of civiUza tion, and the culture of the mechanic arts, among the barbarous nations. The priraary design of all mission ary contributions is the communication of Christianity to the heathen ; and it is to be regretted that the sraaU^ est portion ofthe pecuniary raeans furnished by Christian liberality for this purpose, should be appS'opriated to any other purpose than the direct promulgation of the gospel. The difficulties already aUuded to, connected with the missionary stations, are not the only ones that exist. They would operate powerfully, supposing the children were all that the parents coiUd wish ; supposing they were qualifled by talent, disposed by deliberate choice, and prepared by Divine grace for the work of Christian missionaries ;~ but these indispensable requisites, it is unnecessary to remark, a parent, with aU his solicitude and care, cannot always secure, God may see fit to withhold those decisive evidences of genuine piety, without which the fondest parent would tremble at the idea of introducing even his own child into the sacred office of an evangelist. However raissionary pur suits may have been accounted the honour, or have proved the happiness of the parent, the child, as he grows up, may not even possess a desire to engage in the same; that desire the parent cannot give; and, 206 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. without it, it woTild, from every consideration, be both cruel and injurious to urge it. The alternative is most distressing to contemplate. There are at present no situations of comfort to fiU, no trade or business that can be followed. Productive plantations, regular labour, mercantile estabUshments, warehouses, and shops, it is lo be expected, wiU ulti mately exist and flourish in these islands ; but they can not be looked for in the short period of fifteen years from the time when the people emerged from gross ignorance, inveterate vice, and the raost enervating and dissipating idleness. The circurastances of the female branches of the mission faraiUes are, perhaps, stiU raore discouraging, 1 have extended these rera.arks rauch beyond what 1 intended, when speaking of the South Sea Academy; and although they raay be less interesting to the general reader thah other raatters, they will serve to show what are some of the trials of a missionary life among an unciviUzed people. They may also not only a'vvaken the sympathies of the friends of missionaries, but lead to such a consideration of the subject as may result in the suggestion or application of a remedy, which, if it shall not altogether remove them, wiU at least alleviate their pressure : which is, perhaps, felt more heavily by the present generation than it wiU be by their sue- CHAPTER X, Voyage to Borabora — Appearance of the settlement — Description of the island— Geology — Opening of the new place of worship— Visit of the '¦Dauntless— Arrival of the Mermaid— Designation of native missionaries- Voyage to the Sandwich Islands — Interview between the prince of Tabaa and the princess of Tahiti — Marriage of Pomare and Ainiata—Dress of the parties, and appearance of the attendants — Christian marriage — Advan tageous results— Female occupations — EmbarUation tor England— Visit to Fa-re— Improvement of the settlement— Visit to Hurutu and Raivavai— Final departure from the South Sea islands. Mr. Orsmond, who removed to Raiatea in the close of the year 1818, was accompanied by Mrs. Orsmond, who, in the communication of useful instruction to her own sex, and in every other department of female misi JiiBB AKliA'l lOJN FOR BORABOKA. 207 sionary labour, was indefatigable until her decease, which took place very soon after her removal from Huahine, In Noveraber, 1820, nearly two years after this, Mr, Orsmond, in compUance with the urgent request of the chiefs and people, removed to the island of Borabora, where he established a mission, and continued his valu able labours till required, by the united voice of the mis sionaries in the windward and leeward i.slands, to t-ake charge of the academy founded at Eiraeo in 1824, During the year 1821, the inhabitants of Borabora erected a substantial place of worship; and in the beginning of 1822, according to a previous engagement with Mr, Orsmond, I visited the island for the purpose of preaching at the opening of the new chapel. Indis position detained Mr, Bennet at Huahine, but the late Rev. D, Tyerman, his colleague, kindly accompanied hira. On the 24th of January we repaired to the beach soon after ten, but heavy rains detained us until nearly two, when we erabarked for Raiatea, The afternoon was calra, but about sunset a light breeze carae frora the south-vvest. It soon, however, died away, while a heavy swell running in a north-easterly direction, con tinuing, not only rendered rowing more laborious, but materially impeded our progress. Soon after ten at night we entered within the reefs at Tipaemau, having rowed nearly thirty miles. Landing at Avera, the shore opposite the opening, our people climbed some cocoa- nut trees, and, having taken refreshment, we held on our way within the reefs. The land-breeze gently fill ing our sails, Mr, Tyerman and myself fell asleep in the boat : and I suppose several of the people did the same, for soon after midnight we were awaked by the boat's being aground near the Avapiti. It was soon pushed into deeper water ; and as the wind was light, the oars were manned, and, about an hour before daybreak^ we landed at the settlement, and entered Mr, Threlkeld's house, the doors of which were unfastened. We were shortly afterward welcoraed by our friends, who pre pared us an early breakfast, by no raeans unacceptable, as we had taken no refreshment since leaving Huahine on the preceding day. Here we spent the Sabbath, pleased with the numbers and attention of the assem,. bUes for worship. At the close of the native services, 208 POLYNESIAN RESBARCHES. Mr, Tyerraan preached in English, after which we spent a pleasant evening with the missionaries and people. On the following day we sailed for Borabora, accom.. panied by Tamatoa, the king of Raiatea, and Faariri, one of the principal chiefs. Two ships were sailing in the straits between Tahaa and Raiatea, and appeared bouncfe to the former. At five in the afternoon we saw the set tlement at Borabora ; but the entrance to the harbour is so circuitous, that it was sunset before we reached the shore. At the extreraity of a pier built in the sea, to the edge of the deep water, we 'were met by Mr. Orsmond, who, cordially welcoming our arrival, led the way to his own dwelling. The sides of the road along which we passed were thronged with healthy-looking children, whom curiosity had brought to gaze at the strangers. On the following day we viewed the settleraent, to which the people had given the appeUation of Beulah, gratified no less with tbe reception we experienced than with the evident improvement among the inhabit ants. The school was regularly attended, and raany were well inforraed in the great truths of revelation ; the observance of the Sabbath, we learned, was strictly regarded. There was a road about eight feet wide, ex tending nearly a raile and a half; four or five neat plas tered houses were finished, others were in progress. Three causeways, upwards of six feet wide, and elevated two or three feet above the water, extended about three hundred and sixty feet into the sea, and united at the extreraity. The chapel, which was one of the best that had been erected in the islands, was part of a large building one hundred and sixty feet by forty-eight, comprising a place of worship, school, and court-house. On the 1st of February the chapel, which is capable of holding 1100 perS'ons, was opened for public worship. The floor was elevated at the extremities of the build ing. The pulpit was supported by a single pillar, and approached by a winding staircase of neat workmanship. About ten in the forenoon we repaired to the chapel, which we were pleased to see neariy filled with a de cently clothed native congregation. After I had finished the sermon, Mr, Tyerman addressed the people, Mp, Orsmond interpreted his address, and concluded the services with prayer. In the afternoon a discourse on the advantages of affection and harmony was preached VAITAPE BAIT. 209 Jby Mr. Orsmond ; and a serraon in English by Mr. Tyer man, in the evening, terminated the interesting engage ments of the day. On the 3d, which was the Sabbath, I preached in the new chapel at sunrise. In the fore noon Mr. Orsmond preached to a nuraerous audience. Mr. Tyerraan and myself afterward united with the little church, consisting of fifteen members, in partaking of the sacrament corameraorative of the Saviour's death. Violent and contrary winds detained us sorae tirae in the pleasant settlement at the head of Vaitape Bay, on the west side of the island, which is situated in 16° 32' S, lat, and nearly 152° W, long, Borabora, as weU as the other islands of the group, is surrounded by a reef, rising to the water's edge at unequal distances from the shore. On this reef are three low coral islands, covered with trees and verdure equal to that which adorns those around Raiatea and Tahaa, There are also four other islands separated frora the mainland, which is about sixteen miles in circuraference. These islands, like Papeorea in Huahine, are not of coral forraation, but resemble in structure the promontories on the adjacent shore, Tobua, the principal, forming the south or west side of Vaitape Bay, is not less than three or four hun dred feet above the sea, '' In the geology of Borabora, the only peculiarity is the existence of a species of feldspar and quartz ; but the appearance and shape of the island is singular and imposing. The high land in the interior is not broken into a number of sraall mountain ridges, but, uniting in one stupendous mass, rears its magnificent forra, which resembles a double-peaked mountain, to an elevation perhaps Uttle below 3000 feet above the water. The lower hiUs and smaU islands are not seen at a distance, so that when viev^ed frora the sea or the other islands, especiaUy Huahine (frora the north and western parts of which it is generally visible), it appears Uke a solitary ¦gigantic obeUsk or pyramid, rising frora the ocean, and reaching to the clouds. The settleraent at the head of Vaitape Bay coramands a view of every diversity in scenery. The lofty inte rior raountain clothed with verdure, and the deep glens that indent its sides, stand in pleasing contrast with the hiUy, or coraUine, islands that appear in the west, while the uniforraity and nakedness of the distant horizon is broken by the appearance, of the conical or circular ¦210 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. sumraits of the mountains of Maupiti, or Maurua, up wards of thirty railes distant. This island was fre quently visible frora Borabora during our visit at this time, Maupiti is but circumscribed in extent, and its moun tains are less broken and romantic than those of others in the group ; it has, however, some peculiarities. It is the only place in the Georgian or, Society Islands in which rocks of apparently priraitive formation are found. After remaining some time at Borabora, we took leave of our friends, and sailed for Huahine. On our way we touched at Raiatea, and were gratified with the prosperous appearance of the station. It was then at Va6aara ; but since that period Mr, Wilhams, the only remaining raissionary, has reraoved to Utuma- oro, a flne extensive district near the northern extreraity of the island, and adjacent to the opening in the reef called the Avapiti, or double-entrance. This station was commenced in 1823; and, in consequence of the extent of land by which it is surrounded, and the prox imity of the harbour, has been found much more con venient than that formerly occupied. The only incon venience is that which arises from the lowness and consequent moisture of the soil. The improvement has been rapid, and the transformation so astonishing, that in a short period three hundred enclosures for the culture of sugar, coffee, and tobacco, with other kinds of produce, were completed, a substantial place of wor ship, schools, and a house for the missionaries had been finished, and the neat plastered dweUings of the natives extended for two railes along the beach. The scenery of this district of the island is much less picturesque than in many other parts ; yet it is impossible to behold the neat and extensive settlement, with its gardens, quays, schools, capacious chapel, and cottages, stretch. ing along the shore, which but a few years before was covered with brushwood and trees, without astonisht- ment and delight. On the twentieth of January, shortly after our return from Borabora, his majesty's ship Dauntless, commanded by Captain G, C; Gambier, touched at Huahine. We were happy to introduce the commander of the Daunt less, Captain R, EUiot, and the officers of the vessel, to the governor and chiefs of the island, and to welcorae tbem to our humble dwelUngs, as well as to experience NATIVE MISSIONARIES. 211 their hospitality on board. The recoUection of the polite and kind attentions of Captain Garabier, Captain Elliot, and other gentlemen of the ship, is stUl grateful to the missionaries and the inhabitants of Huahine, In a week or two after the departure of the Daunt less, the colonial governraent-cutter Mermaid arrived in Fa-re harbour, on her way to the_ Sandwich Islands with a sraall schooner, the Prince Regent, as a present frora the British government to the king of those islands. The captain intimated *his intention of touching at the Marquesas on his return from Hawaii, and politely of fered a passage to any of us who might be desirous of visiting these islands. We had long been anxious to attempt the establishment of Christianity among the inhabitants of the former, and, as the present appeared a favourable opportunity, we coraraunicated the same to the deputation, and it appeared to thera desirable to visit these places. It was on the 18th of February that the deputation inforraed the captain of their acceptance of his offer, and also requested Mr, Barff aud myself to arrange as to which of us would accompany the teachers whom it was proposed to send. This having been fixed, we sent a letter to one of the deacons, requesting hira to invite the merabers of the church and those who were bap tized to assemble in the place of worship in the evening. When they were convened, we met them, and after singing, and imploring in prayer the Divine guidance, I acquainted thera with the object of our raeeting — the opportunity afforded for sending two of our nuraber to the Marquesas on board the ship in harbour, — and in terrogated them as to whether we should do so or not. Hautia, the governor, Auna, Taua, Pato, and Utu, all persons of influence among those asserabled, expressed their joy at the proposal, and the whole lifted up their hands to signify their assent. I then said, " Whom shaU we send ?" and raentioned the name of Matatore, one ofthe deacons of the church, a man in the prime of life, and one of the most sensible and useful raen in the station, asking the members of the church if they thought hira and his wife suitable persons. An answer was returned in the affirmative, and the hands of the asserably were lifted up. They were both present, and I asked them if it was agreeable to them to go. They both answered before the whole congregation, " Yes, it 212 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. is agreeable." Mr. Barff then addressed them, and mentioned Tiori, a valuable teacher in one' of our schools ; but some of the merabers objebted, because he was an unmarried man, Mr, Barff next proposed Puna, but the same objection was urged. He then named Auna. The church immediately repUed, "It is agreed." Auna was then asked if it was agreed to by himself ; he iramediately repUed, " It has been agreed to long ago." We had often talked on the subject: two years before this, in an interesting conversation which 1 held with Auna, he said he was exceedingly desirous to go as a missionary to some of the islands around ; stating that their inhabitants frequently appeared to his raind like persons standing on tl^e verge of a precipice over a chasm, faUing backwards into it, but stretching out their hands as they fell, and calling for assistance. After the assembly had testified its approbation of the two raen and their wives who had been proposed, and had expressed their readiness to go, Mr, Tyerman ad dressed the persons present, expressing the pleasure he experienced at their decision, and offering them suitable encouragement. Mr. Barff interpreted his speech ; Mr. Bennet also tendered them his congratulations, and ex horted thera to vigUance. When I had interpreted his address, the meeting was closed with prayer. On the evening of the 21st we again assembled in the chapel. Mr, Bourne, who had arrived on the preceding day, commenced the services by prayer, and addressed the people on the duty and advantages of sending out teachers of Christianiiy. I then inquired of those who had been selected the grounds of their readiness to engage in the enterprise, and the manner in which they desired and designed fo prosecute their work, Auna replied, " From a sense of the love of God, and his good ness, and a regard to the direction, ' Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.' " His companion said, " Our desire is to engage in this work with humbleness of mind, with prayer, with gentleness and dependence upon the Lord Jesus Christ," Mr. Barff then offered up a prayer at their designation, and afterward exhibited the nature and duties of their office in an address from " Behold, I send you forth as lambs in the midst of wolves,"* and concluded the service in the usual manner. '?Matt.x.ia. VOYAGE TO THE SANDWICH ISLANDS. 213 The arrangements for the voyage being completed, we assembled at the chapel about ten o'clock on the forenoon of the 25th of February : the native Christians were animated by kind and appropriate addresses from the church, and were affectionately encouraged by Mr. Barff and Mr, Orsmond, the latter being on a visit with us. The native missionaries then took leave of their feUow Christians in a most solemn and impressive manner ; and, as it had been arranged by Mr, Barff and myself that I should accorapany them to aid in the cora mencement of their labours, I addressed the people, and, recommending Mrs, EUis and our dear children to their kind attentions under God, I also bade them farewell. The meeting was peculiarly impressive and affecting ; and after mutually committing each other, under deep intensity of feeling, to the guidance and the keeping of the God of all our mercies, the whole congregation walked frora the chapel to the seashore, where we exchanged our last salutations. The deputation, the two native missionaries and their wives, five other natives and myself, now embarked, and the Mermaid stood out to sea. The weather was on the whole pleasant, and we reached the Sandwich Islands in about a month after our departure frora Huahine. While supping at our table on the night previous to our embarkation, the captain had, in answer to Mrs, Ellis's inquiries, assured her that he expected to return in three months ; but seven months passed without any appearance of our vessel. In the raean tirae a piratical ship touched at Huahine ; some of the pirates absconded, and reraained on shore. It was found that they knew soraething of our vessels ; but as they refused to say what they knew, surraises arose, and reports were spread that they had met us at sea, and either sunk our vessel or raurdered the passengers. Such was the in fluence of this report when fir§t circulated that it was necessary to protect the deserters from the indignation of the populace. The whole of their stateraent was in vested with a degree of mystery which, together with the very protracted period of our absence, augmented the distress of Mrs. Ellis and our friends in Huahine, From this painful state of anxious uncertainty they were, however, relieved by the appearance of the Mermaid off Fa-re harbour early in the month of -October, and by SI4 POL'YNESIAN RESEARCHES. our landing in health and safety in the evening of thfl same day. The pirates had faUen in with the schooner, which had been separated frora us during the early part of the voyage ; they by this raeans heard of our desti nation, &c,, and this partial inforraation accounted for the vagueness of their reports. In the close of the same month, the invitation I had received frora the chiefs in the Sandwich Islands, and the American liiissionaries, to reraove thither, was submitted to the consideration of the missionaries in the leeward islands, and they, with the deputation, were unaniraous in opinion thatwe Ought to proceed to that iraportant station by the earliest opportunity. The details of the first voyage to Hawau, and some account of our proceedings there, will be given in the succeeding volume. The Active, a small schooner commanded' by Captain Charlton, arriving at Huahine soon after, was engaged to convey us to the Sandwich Islands, WhUe we were preparing for our departure, viz. in the month of Decem ber, 1822, a marriage took place between Pomare, the young chief of Tahaa, and Aimata, the only daughter of the late king of Tahiti. The parties raet at Huahine, which was raidway between the residence of the fami lies to which they respectively belonged. Young Po mare had received his name as a raark of special favour from the king of Tahiti, More than a week before his intended bride arrived from Tahiti, Pomare saUed from Tahaa and landed at Fa-re, where he was entertained with the attention and respect suited to his rank and prospects, by the chiefs of Huahine, It was not, however, at that time supposed that his consort would becorae the queen of Tahiti — as her brother, with whom her father had left the govern ment, was then living. In the month of December, Aimata, accompanied by her mother and aunt, arrived at Huahine on board the Queen Charlotte, a brig belonging to the king. The afternoon of the day on which the vessel anchored was fixed on for her.landing, and introduction lo her future husband. We walked down to the settlement to wit ness the meeting of the youthful pair. A smaU open house belonging to the governor was the place appointed for their first interview. .When we reached the spot, we beheld the young chieftain, who, for his age, was remarkably stout, dressed, in fuU native costume, with POMARE AND AIMATA. 219 a large purau and a flowing tiputa ; he wore, also, an English beaver hat. He was seated at one end of the building on an iri, or native seat, waiting with gravity of appearance the arrival of Aimata. About a quarter of an hour after we had reached the place, two or three boats frora the -vessel rowed towards the shore. Several of the attendants of the young prin cess arrived in the first ; and the queen and her sister, with the youthful Aimata, landed frora the second. The visiters were met on the beach by the governor of the island and a number of chief woraen, who conducted Airaata to the house where Poraare and his friends were waiting. They entered, and after greeting the friends present, took their seats near where the young chief was sitting. Poraare continued motionless, neither rising to wel corae his guests nor uncovering his head. Aimata sat close by her mother's side, occasionally glancing at the individual who was to be her husband, and who sat like a statue before her. This was the first time either Poraare or Airaata had seen each other, and the interview was certainly a sin gular one ; for after sitting together for about twenty minutes, the queen and her companions rose, and re paired to the house provided for their accoramodation, and Pomare and his friends returned to their encarap ment. During the whole of the time they had been in each other's company they had not exchanged a single word. Shortly after this raeeting they were publicly raar ried, and afterward removed to the island of Tahiti, which has ever since been their principal residence. Poraare was about sixteen years of age, and his consort but little, if any, younger. Since the death of her bro ther, which took place in 1827, she has been considered qiieen of Tahiti, Eiraeo, &c., though the regency ap pointed to govern the islands during the rainority of the late king stiU manages the political affairs, acting, how ever, in the narae of Aimata, instead of that of her brother. Pomare was very young wben the inhabitants of his native island eml^raced Christianity ; the first tirae we saw him was in 1819, when he appeared nine or ten years of age. His establishment, however, was at that time nearly as large as it has been since. He possessed 216 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. a number of houses in different parts of Raiatea and Tahaa, and was surrounded by a nuraerous train of at tendants ; one or two chiefs of rank and influence, act ing as his guardians, usually accompanied him. During the early parts of his Ufe he was frequently carried about on raen's shoulders, according to the ancient custora of the kin^ of the -Society Islands, When the king of Tahiti embraced Christianity, this, with other practices connected with idolatry, was laid aside in the windward isles. It was occasionaUy adopted by the yoiing chief of Tahaa, more perhaps to gratify the pride of some ofhis attendants than to afford any satisfaction to his own raind. By him it has now been discontin ued for a number of years ; and young Pomare is prob ably the last Tahitian chieftain that will ever ride in state on the necks of his people, Aimata, the only surviving child of the king of Tahiti, although about the same age, appeared in perfect con trast to her husband. Her form was neither athletic nor corpulent, her countenance open and lively, her jet- black eye sparkling and intelligent, her manners and address engaging, her disposition volatile, and her con versation cheerful. In these respects she was the very opposite to Pomare, who was taciturn and forbidding. She gave early indicationsof superior inteUectual en dowments, and had her mental faculties been properly cultivated she would probably have exceUed most of her own sex in the society in which she was destined to exert the highest influence. The restraint and ap plication, however, which this required were ill suited to her lively disposition and uncontrolled habits of Ufe. She has, nevertheless, been a frequent, and while she continued, a promising pupU of the missionaries, having in a short tirae made a pleasing progress in the acquisi tion of knowledge. She has fbr some tirae made a pro fession of Christianity, To the missionaries she has invariably proved friendly ; and, since she has been the queen of Tahiti, has patronised and encouraged tbeir efforts, Pomare and Airaata had been, by tbeir respective famihes, betrothed to each other for some time prior to their meeting in Huahine. Considerable preparations had been made for the celebration of the marriage ; and as the parties were nearly related to the reigning fami Ues in the windward and leeward islands, arrangements ROYAL MARRIAGE. 217 •were made for entertainments corresponding with the rank and dignity of the bridegroom and his bride. About noon on the day appointed, the young chieftain, with his guardian and friends, reached the chapel, where we were waiting to receive them. Aimata, attended by her raother-in-law, the queen of Tahiti, her sister, and the wife of Mahine, chief of Huahine, arrived shortly after. The royal party were attended by the depend ants of Hautia, the governor of the island. In honour of the distinguished giiest, these dependants or guards were not only arrayed in their best apparel, which was certainly any thing rather than uniform, but they also raarched under arms. Many of the raatiras of Huahine attended, out of respect to the reigning faraily. When the ceremony comraenced, Mr. Barff and my self took our station near the communion-table in front of the pulpit — Pomare and his friends standing on, our right, and Aimata, with her relatives, on the left. The raatiras formed a semicircle three or four deep imme diately behind the bride and bridegroom, while the body ofthe chapel was filled with spectators. Most of the chiefs appeared in European dresses, some of which being large loose gowns of highly glazed chintz of a brilliant red and yellow colour, intermixed with dresses of black and blue broadcloth,, presented a novel spec tacle. The principal part of Pomare's dress was manufac tured in the islands, and worn after the ancient fashion. Aimata wore a white English gown, a light pink scarf, and a finely plaited hibiscus bonnet, trimmed with white ribands. The queen, Pomare-vahine, and all the females- of the royal party appeared in white dresses of foreign manufacture. The raatiras wore the native costume peculiar to their rank and station, while the dress of the multitude behind them presented almost every variety of European and native clothing. The rich and showy colours exhibited in the apparel of the chiefs, the uniforra white raiment of the queen and her companions, in striking contrast with their olive-coloured complexions and dark glossy curling hair, presented an unusual appearance. The pictu resque dress of ihe raatiras, who wore the purau, or beautifully fine white matting tiputa, bordered round the neck and the edges with a raost elegant fringe, and bore in the right hand a higbly poUshed staff, or kind of hal- VoL, III,— K 218 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. bert, of black iron-wood, together with the diversified appearance of tbe spectators, greatly increased the novel and imposing effect of the whole. During the ceremony T observed a tear moistening the eye of the youthful bride. Agitation of feeUng per haps produced it, as I have every reason to beUeve no cloud of anticipated evil overshadowed her prospects ;' and she is reported to have said, that had she not been betrothed, but free to choose her future partner, she should have selected the individual her friends had chosen for her, . When the service was over, the registry made, and the ne(;essary signatures affixed, the parties returned to partake of the entertainment provided. We were in vited to join them, but decUned the honour ; yet walked down to see {be preparation, and, among, other ar ticles of dessert, noticed two barrels full of pine-apples. As soon as the ceremony was concluded, the governor's guards, who were drawn up on the outside. of the chapel, fired several voUeys of musketry, and a British vessel lying in the harbour saluted them with twenty-one guns. With the aboUtion of idolatry, all the ceremonies ori ginally performed at the temple, and which have been already described, were^discontinued ; and shortly after the reception of Christianity by the nation. Christian marriage was instituted, and it is now universally ob served. From this moral revolution some perplexing questions relative to polygamy have naturally arisen ; but for the principal difficulties the code of laws in serted in a preceding chapter has made suitable pro visions. . In the marriage ceremony, the use of the ring has not been introduced — and the only distinction that pre vaUs in society in reference to married and unmarried feraales is, that the wife ceases to be caUed by her ori ginal name, and is designated by that of her husband ; excepting where the name of the wife was also an he reditary title of rank or honour, in which case it is retained. . No change in their customs or usages has taken place, in connexion with the introduction of.the religion of the Bible, more extensive or beneficial in its influence on every class in society than the institution of Christian marriage. Instances of unfaithfulness are not indeed DOMESTIC HAPPINESS. 219 unknown ; but, considering their former habits of life, the partial influence of regard to character, and the slight inconvenience in reference to the means of sup port, by whicb they would probably be foUowed, they have but seldora occurred. The solemn and indissolu ble obligations of tbe marriage vow are recognised by all who profess to be Christians ; and the dom'estic, so cial, and elevated happiness it has imparted is readily acknowledged. It has entirely altered the tone of feel ings, and imparted new principles of conduct in regard to the conjugal relation. Originating frora the institution of marriage, and nur tured by its influence, domestic, happiness, though for merly unknown even in narae, is now sedulously culti vated, 'dnd spreads around their abodes of order and comfort its choicest blessings. The husband and the wife, instead of promiscuously mingling with the multi tude, or dwelling in the houses of their chiefs, live to gether in the neat Uttle cottages reared by their own industry, and find satisfaction and comfort in each other's society. Every household virtue adorns their families ; the children grow up the objects of their mutual affection, and call into exercise new solicitudes and unwonted emotions of delight. Often they appear sitting together reading the Scriptures, walking in com pany to the bouse of God, or surrounding, not indeed the family hearth or the domestic fireside, whicb in tbeir warm climate would be no addition to their com fort, but the family board, spread with the liberal gifts of Divine bounty. The father, at tiraes, may also be seen nursing his little child at the door oif his cottage, and the mother sitting at needlework' by his side, or engaged in other domestic employments. These are the delights it has imparted to the present race — while the rising generation are trained under the influence of Christianity, and these examples of social and domestic virtue. Marriage.s frequently take place at an early age among the people ; they do not, however, appear to be- less happy than those celebrated when the parties are fur ther advanced in life. In former times the men were often cruel in their treatraent of the women, and con sidered thera as their slaves ; but the husbands now treat tbeir wives with respect, and often cherish for thera the most sincere affection. The female character is ele- K2 220 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. vated ih society ; the husbands perform the labours of the plantation or the fishery, recognisingit as their duty to provide the means of subsistence for the family; whUe the preparation of their food (especiaUy where the European mode of Uving has been adopted by them), together with attention to the children, and the making of clothing, native or foreign, for themselves and the other merabers of the- family, is now considered the proper department of the females. They occasionaUy accompany their husbands and elder children to work in the plantation or garden, at particular seasons of the year; but itjs a raatter of choice, and not from fear of cruel treatment, as formerly. They go to assist their husbands in planting and gathering in the crops, instead of undertaking alone these labours, while the men were idling away the noonday hours in heedless slumbers, or spending them in songs or other amusements. The establishment of schools has in some degree overcome the love of wandering, ahd habituated thera to regularity and perseverance in their occupations, al though at first found irksome and difficult. Desire of mental improveraent, general acquaintance with writing, and fondness for epistolary correspondence furnish new and agreeable occupations for their leisure hours. The introduction of needlework,- the universal desire for European clothing, together with the preservation of these articles of dress, having increased their domestic duties, oc9upies a great portion of their time. With the close of the year 1828 we terminated our regular labours in fhe South Sea islands ; and op the 31st of December, soon after the marriage of Pomare and Aimata, accompanied by two native teachers, Taua and his family, and Taamotu, a female who had been a member of the church, a teacher in the school, and an affectionate and valuable companion and assistant to Mrs. EUis during my voyage to Hawaii, we embarked in the Active, and reached Oahu on the Sth of the fol lowing February. Towards the close of 1824 an afflic tive dispensation of Divihe Providence removed us from these islands. This Was the severe and protracted iU ness of Mrs, EUis^the only hope of whose life was de rived frora the effects of a voyage to England. On our return we visited Huahine, anchored in Fa-re harbour, and had the high satisfaction of spending a fortnight in DEPARTURE FOR ENGLAND. 221 delightful intercourse with our missionary friends and the kind people of the settleraent. Early in the raonth of Noveniber we again took leave of our friends and fellow-labourers, hoping to revisit tbem when we should return to the Pacific ; feeling, at the same tirae, that with regard to some, perhaps many, we should not meet again in tbis world, but cheered with the anticipation of raeeting in a region where part ing would be unknown. When our anchor was raised and our sails spread, the vessel raoved slowly out ofthe harbour. The day was reraarkably fine, and the wind light, and both these afforded opportunities Of leisurely surveying the receding shore. As the different sections of the bay opened and receded from my view, 1 could not forbear contrasting the appearance of the district at this time with that presented on ray first arrival in 1818. There was the sarae rich anddiversified scenery ; "but instead of a few rustic huts, a fine town, two miles in length, now spread itself along the raargin of the bay ; a good road extended through the settleraent ; nearly four hundred white plastered native cottages appeared, sorae on the margin of the sea, others enclosed in neat and well-cultivated gardens. A number of quays were erected along the shore ; the schools were conspicuous ; and prominent above the rest was seen their spacious chapel, since rebuUt, and now capable of accommodating 2000 worshippers. The same individuals who on the former occasioh had appeared uncivilized and alraost unclothed islanders, now stood in crowds upon the beach, arrayed in decent apparel, wearing hats and bon nets of their own manufacture ; while beyond the set tleraent their plantations and their gardens adorned the mountain's side. These were but indications of. a greater change among the people. All were professing Christians. Most of them- could read the Bible, and between four and five hundred had been united in church- fellowship. This number bas been increased to five hundred, who are walking in the ordinances and com mandments of the Lord blameless. Agriculture has since increased, and sorae acres are now planted, or preparing for the culture of coffee. Such was the statff of general iraproveraent in Hua hine when we paid our last visit, in- the close of.the year 1824 ; and althougb the subsequent accounts have 222 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. been at tiraes of a checkered complexion,>they have not been more so than raight be expected, and have, upon the whole, been such as to aftbrd matter for sincere gratitude- to the Most High, and encouragement to aU interested in the raoral and spiritual improvement of mankind. CHAPTER XL Efforts of tlie natives to propagate Christianity— Amount of-early contriW tiona— Effect of .annual meetings— E^xenions of tbe first converts— Descnp- tion pf the Paumotus, or Dangerous Archjpelago^Viaits of the people to Tahiti — Their reception of Christianity — The number and situaiion of the Marquesas— Their appearance and productions — Population, dress, and figure of the natives — TatQoing^Disposition— Governjnent — War and'can- nit)alism — Attempts to introduce Christianity among their in&abitants — Pitcairn's island— Descendants of thc mutineers of the Bounty,— Waihu or Easier Island- Cape Horn—Juao Fernandez- Alexander Selkirk, CHBis-nANiTY, univeBsally recejved, and, we have rea son to believe, firmly established, in the Georgian and Society islands, having' overcome tlie combined opposi tion of idolatry, priestcraft, interest, and pride, with the barriers of depravity and abomination, which so long despised its authority, and resisted its app^eals — and having survived the more fatal treachery of the enemies that have adopted its name and assumed itSgarb-r-bas not been confined to those islands, ' Acknowledging the coramand of Christ to '" teach aU nations, and preach the gospel to every creatui;e," to be obUgatory on all his disciples imbibing soraewhat ofthe true spirit of Christianity, whichis not restrictive and selfish, but expansive and coraraunicative — animated by the spirit of the primitive Christians, and imitating their example — the raerabers of the first Polynesian churches no sooner enjoyed the advantages of religion-themselves, ' than they adopted vigorous measures for imparting thera to others, Sorae notice "of their efforts to coraraunicate a know ledge of Christianity to other tribes in the Pacific, of the islands to which they have sent the.ir raissionaries, and others more or'less connecteiTwitb these, will, it is presumed, not be unacceptable, as presenting a mor,o NATIVE MISSIONS. 223 disfinct view of the relation these islands bear to Tahiti and the adjacent group. An account has already been given of the formatipn of raissionary societies in Tahiti, Eimeo, and Huahine^ Others were afterward established. Their first remit tance to London was in 1821, and amounted to nearly 1900/. The Raiatean society, besides maintaining at its own expense six native missionaries, sent to England, in 1827, 300/, This sura, and the liberal contributions from other associations, would have been greatly in creased, could the productions in whicb the native sub-- scriptions were furnished have -been disposed of to the best advantage. The anniversaries of the native societies, and their public missionary meetings, continue to prove to the inhabitants seasojis of delightful satisfaction. At these meetings ¦ their pleasure has been heightened by the details of native missionaries wbo bave returned from distant islands, and the exhibition of rejected idols from countries wheire formerly they had been worshipped. Inhabitants of reraote islands have appeared at their meetings, as arabassadors from the tribes to which they belonged, requesting that books and teachers raight be sent fo their native land,; and chiefs and kings have also at these periods publicly, with gratitude to the true God, returned the native churches their acknowledgments for sending them instructers. At the jnissionary anniversary held at Raiatea, in 1828, the king of Rarotoa, an island seven hundred miles distant, and containing six or seven thousand people, stood up, and, in his native dialect, thanked the Raiatean Christians for sending the gospel to his island, and de livering him and his people from tbe bondage of idolatry, and sin, and death. The native churches are daily extending the range of their benevolent operations; their vessels penetrate where no ships ever went before,-and their missionaries land where no foreigner has dared to ^set his foot on shore. Yet, wherever they have been, the merchant or the saUor raay now safely follow, and he will raeet with hospitality and kindness. The foUowing account will appropriately illustrate this remark. On his passage from Tahiti to New South Wales, in 1825, in the brig Brutus, Mr. Nott touched at Aitutake (the Whylootakie of Cook), Native teachers had been 234 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. there above^three years. The inhabitants were Chris tians. The passengers landed; and when the natives found a missionary among them, they requested he would preach to them; and about 1000 soon assembled. Tbe islanders showed their visiters every possible kind ness, accompanied them tothe ship when they embarked, and carried a number of suppUes as a present to the captain. After stating these facts, Mr, Nott, in a letter, dated May, 1825, continues :— ' " The next island we called at was one of the Friendly Islands, Eoaa, as written by Cook, and as we have it written on the charts, but which should be Ua. At this island, also, as there is no anchorage, we were obUged to stand off and bn whUe the -boat went on shore. -Here a circumstance took place which, among raany others, might be brought forward to show the value of mission ary estabUshments, The boat reached the land with Capt, Forbes, the chief mate, and Mr, Torrance. They began to barter with the natives, and obtained several pigs, some plantains, cocoanuts, &c., but suddenly they were seized, and every thing was taken from them,- without any offence being given, ' Axes were held over their heads, and knives applied to their throats ; a rope was also brought, and fornied with a noose, and hung over their heads, to signify to them what they must expect, if they offered to escape or resist, A ransom was then demanded, before they -would let tbem return to us on board the brig, and the chiefmate was sent off in the boat to fetch the property. But as it was dark when the boat reached the brig, it was not proper that she sbould return to tbe shore untU mornihg. During tbe night, the prisoners, Capt, Forbes, Mr, Torrance^ and another of the boat's crew, were kept in the greatest terror, with a strict guard, and continual threats. In the raorning, the boat was sent on shore with muskets (or rather fowUng-pieces of considerable value), powder, and cloth, to the araount of 30/, or 40/., and a New- Zealander, who was on board with us, was sent to negotiate the affair, the people being afraid to venture on shore again. The Chief received the property, and Capt. Forbes was permitted to corae on board the brig, biit Mr, Torrance was detained tUl raore property should be sent on shore, whidh was done by the boat, and taken on shore by the New-Zealander,- Mr, Torrance was then permitted to corae off to ns,' At tbis instant Capt. THE PEARL ISLANDS. 225 Forbes exclairaed, ' O,' Mr. Nott ! we see now, raore than ever, what bas been done by you and the mission aries on the islands where you have resided, and the trouble you have bad in bringing the natives from what they were to what they are now.' " We have already noticed Pomare, the first convert in the islands, visiting the different districts for the purpose of persuading its inhabitants to renounce their idols, and embrace the Christian faith. We have seen Mahine, the king of Huahine, sending his messenger to that island for the same purpose ; and we bave seen Tapa, and the chiefs' of Raiatea, prosecuting, in 1816, the work commenced by Mr. Nott and bis companion in 1814, and engaged in subverting idolatry and preparing his people to receive Christianity, before any European missionary had taken up his abode on their islands, Mai and Tefaora not only distinguished themselves by their zeal in the destruction of the idols and teraples of Borabora, but the latter sailed over to Maurua, and in duced the chief and people of that island to follow bis example, and discontinue the worship of their idols. It is not probable that all who thus distinguished them selves were fully acquainted with the gospel, or entirely under the influence of the high and sacred motives it inspires, but they are convinced of its superiority to the system of delusion and-iniquity from which they bad been released ; and. hence, perhaps, chiefly originated their exertions to induce its reception by others. The knowledge of Christianity was early conveyed to the Paumotus, wbich lie to the north and east of Tahiti, To the southward of the Marquesas,, innumerable clusters and single islands, of a totally different structure and appearance from the larger islands, cover tbe bosom of the ocean, and render navigation exceedingly dan gerous. They are low narrow islands, of coralline formation, an;l though among thera some few, as Gara- bier's Islands, are hilly, the greater number do not rise more than three feet above the level of. high water. The naraes of Crescent, Harp, Chain, Bow, &c., which some of them have receiifed, from their appearance, have been supposed -to indicate their shape. Those already known seera to be increasing in size, while others are constantly approaching the surface of the water. Soraetimes they rise, like a perpendicular wall, from the depths of the ocean to the level of its- surface 5 K3 226 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. at other times, reefs or groves of coral, of varied and beautiful form and colour, extend, in the form of suc cessive terraces below the water, to' a considerable distance around. Here islands may be seen in every stage of their progress ; some presenting Uttle more than a point or summit of a branching cdraUine pyramid, at a depth scarcely discernible through the, transparent waters; others spreading, Uke submarine gardens or shrubberies, beneath the surface ; or presenting here. and there a Uttle bank of broken f oral and sand, over which the roUing wave occasionaUy breaks ; while a number rise, like long curved or circular banks of sand, broken coral, and sheUs, two or three feet above the water, clothed with grass, or adorned with cocoanut and palm-trees. They generally form a curved line, some times bent like a horse-shoe ; the bank of soil or rock is seldora raore than half a raile or a mile across, yet it is often clothed with the richest verdure.^ Within this enclosure is a space sometimes of great extent. In the island of Hao, the Bow Island of Captain Cook, it is said, ships may sail' many miles after entering the lagoon. The narrow strip of coral and sand enclosing the basin is sixty or seventy miles in length, although exceedingly narrow, . Their lagoons are either studded with sraaller reefs, or form a baj of great depth. The stiUness of the surface of the bright blue water within the lagoon, the border of white coral and sand by which it is surrounded, the dark foliage of the lofty trees by wbich it is sheltered, often reftected from the surface of the water, impart to the interior of these low island* an aspect of singular beauty and solitude, such as is but seldom presented by the more bold and romantic scenery. of the higher lands. These islands bave received different names: by some they have been called the Labyrinth, by others the Pearl Islands, on account of the pearls obtained among thera. The natives of Tahiti designate the islands and their inhabitants Paumotus, but by navigators they are usuaUy denominated the Dangerous Archipelago. The islands vary in extent, but are usually smaU; most of them, however, are inhabited, and in some the population is nuraerous. Their inhabitants are taU and robust, dark coloured, and among the most rude and savage tribes of the eastern -Pacific, Their food prin cipaUy consists of fish and cocoanuts, as tbere is- but little land capable of cultivation. Their' means of sub- THE PEARL ISLANDS. 22? sistence are often scanty, and always precarious. They are exceedingly ferocious, and addicted to war, which tbey prosecute with cruelty, and are said generally to feast on tbe slain : a captive chUd bas been fed with the flesh of her own parent. The trees on the island are but small, yet the natives formerly built better vessels than any other nation in the eastern part of the ocean, and they are raore daring and successful navigators than the raore favoured and civilized tribes which they oc casionaUy visit. Their canoes were dignified by tbe Tahitians witb the narae of pahi, a terra applied only to their own war-canoes and the vessels of foreigners, and they are stiU superior to any in this part of the Pacific, excepting those recently constructed at Tahiti in the European raanner. The miseries of war had, in the early part of the reign of Poraare II. , king of Tahiti, driven many of tbe inhabitants of these islands to the Georgian group for security. Tbey were protected and hospitably enter tained by Poraare ; and when his own subjects re nounced idolatry, tbey also cast away the gods tbey had brought with them, and were instructed by tbe mis sionaries. In 1817 great numbers returned to tbeir native islands, accompanied by Moorea, one of their countrymen, who was a pious man, and had been taught to read, On reaching Anaa, or Chain Island, bis birth place, he began to instruct the people with such suc cess, under the Divine blessing, that with the exception of the inhabitants of one district, the population agreed to renounce heathenism. Moorea was subsequently charged with having de ceived his countrymen in the accounts, he bad given of the change at Tahiti, and was obliged to leave the island, as his life was threatened. The idolaters, con vinced afterward that they had accused him falsely, burnt their, idols and demolished fheir temples. About four hundred of them then saUed to Tahiti for books and instruction. They obtained a supply of books, and becanle the pupUs of Mr, Crook, who had the satisfac tion of admitting several of thera to feUowship with the Christians under bis care. Early in 1822, Moorea and Teraa were' publicly designated by tbe raeinbers of the cburch in Wilkes's Harbour as Christian teachers, and sailed for Ahaa. Shortly afterward, a canoe frora this island, which is situated in 17° S, lat,, 145° W. long. 228 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. arrwed at Tahiti,. These dauntless sailors, who, in order to procure books, had traversed in their rudely built vessels a distance of three hundred miles, brought the pleasing tidings that the inhabitants of Anaa were will ing to receive- Christianity, were building a place of worship in every district, that war, cannibalism, and other atrocities of idolatry had ceased. Two other teachers, Manao and Mareuu, were afterward sent to these islands, Anaa, when visited by Mr. Crook,- in January, 1825, presented a scene of ruin and desolation, occasioned by a violent tempest, whicb had been accompamed by an inipetuous inundation of the sea. Hundreds of large trees, torn up by the roots; Jay strewn in wild con fusion on the shore : a nuraber of dwelling*, and four teen places of -Worship, were levelled to the ground. The calamity bad been as sudden. as it was severe : the falling of the trees, and the rising of the sea over those entangled among their trunks, and the ruins of their houses, had occasioned the. loss of many lives. Besides the distress caused by the above afflictive visitation, he received the unpleasant tidings of the defection of two of the native tea'chers ; but was gratified to iQam that Mahao and Mareuu vivere steadfast, and that the inhabit ants of ten other islands, among those so thickly spread over the ocean, between Tahiti and the Marquesas, had received native teachers. The influence of Christianity had been salutary in softenings the barbarous character of the natives of Anaa, yet their savage dispositions were occasionally manifested. Desirous to extend the knowledge of the new reUgion, they sent two native teachers to Amanu. The inhabitants of this island at tacked the strangers, wounded one of the teachers, kiUed both their wives, and ,obliged tbe other teacher and his friends to seek their safety in flight. The wife of one of the teachers was the daughter of, the chief of Anaa. The report of her raurder so enraged many of the inhabitants, that, forgetting the principles of for bearance inculcated by the gospel, and so nqbiy exhib ited by their countrymen on another occasion, they fitted out a fleet, sailed to Araami, and punishei^witb death a number of the inhabitants. Captain Beechey, who recently visited this archipel ago, bas furnished an interesting account of the appear.- ance, extent, and structure of many of these islands, THE MARQUESAS. 229 with an affecting description of the state of the inhab itants ; and althougb be must have been misled in the report be received of tbe Chain islanders being canni bals, notwithstanding their having embraced Chris tianity, bis account of the native teacher^ whom he raet with, shows the favourable impression their deportment left upon his raind. Speaking bf his intercourse with tbe people on an island in 19° 40' S. lat., and 140° 29' W, long., which he h'ds designated Byara Martin Island, he observes, " We soon discovered that our Uttle colony were Christians : ~ tbey took an early opportunity of convincing us of this, and that tbey bad both Testa ments and hymn-books printed in the Otaheitan lan guage, &c. 'Some of the girls repeated hymns, and the greater part evinced a respect for the- sacred books which reflects much credit upon the missionaries under whose care we could no longer doubt they had at one time been,"* Tbe frigate afterward visited Bow Island ; and baving spoken of tbe state of the inhabitants, the tyranny and brutality of tbe men, and the debasement and raisery of thei feraales, Captain Beechey, mentioning the pres ence of the Dart, an English vessel, states, " The su percargo of the Dart had hired a party bf the natives of. Chain Island to dive for shells : among these was a na tive missionary, a very weU-behaved man, who used every effort to convert his new acquaintances to Chris tianity. He persevered amid much silent ridicule, and at length succeeded in persuading the greater part of fhe islanders to conform to the ceremonies of Christian vvorship. It was interesting to contemplate a body of savages abandoning their superstitions, silently and reverently kneeling upon the sandy shore, and joining !n the morning and evening prayers to the Almighty, "f The "Marquesas, The most easterly group of the high, fertile, and pop ulous isles>,of Polynesia are situated to the northward of the Labyrinth, or Dangerous Archipelago, and about seven or eight degrees distant from Anaa, or Chain Island, A range of mountainous islands appears to ex tend in an alraost unbroken line across the Pacific, in an - Beechey's Voyage, vol, i. p. 164. t Ibid. vol. i. p, 178. 230 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. easterly direction from Borneo, Java, New-Guinea, and the large Asiatic islands. Diverging from the Georgian and Society Islands,— Gambler's, Pitcairn's, and Easter Island appear to terminate its south-eastern course, while the Marquesas mark its north-eastern Umit. The latter form two clusters, which were discovered at different periods, and are politically, as weU as geogra- phicaUy, distinct. Jhe south-eastern cluster, compre hending five islands— Tahuata or Santa Christina, Hivaoa or La Dominica,, Mohotane or San Pedro, Fatuhiva or La Magdalena, and Fetuuku or Hood's Island— were, with the exception of the last, discovered in 1595 by Alvaro Mendano, a Spanish navigator, who was proceed ing from Peru to forra a settlement in the Solomon Islands, In honour of the Marques Mendoza, viceroy of. Peru^ andpatron of the enterprise, M«ndano desig nated the islands tbe Marquesas. The next account that we have of these islands is- their -being visited in 1774, -when they w«re examined by Captain Cook, who discovered the island caUed Hood's Island, to wTiicb he supposed the natives gave the name of Tebua. In 1789 they were visited by Marchand, a French navi gator, who saw other lands to the northward ; but it was not till the foUowing year, when Lieutenant Hergest,in the Daedalus, on his voyage from the Falkland Islands to Hawaii, touched at the Marquesas, in March, 1792, that the northern cluster was explored, or, so "far as I haye heard, any account of them pubUshed. This divi sion consists also of five islands-s-Nuuhiva or Nuku hiva, the largest in the group, called by Hergest Sir H. Martin's Island, Uapou, Trevenian's Island, Hua- kuka or Riou's Island, Hergest Rocks, ahd Robert's Island. Although the latter" cluster have been caUed Ingrara's Islands, after an, American trader, who saw them soon after the time of Marchand's visit,* Hergest's Island by Vancouver, and more recently Washington's Islands ; they are usually, with' the more southern islands, designated the Marquesas. They extend, according to Malte Brun, from 7° 51' to 10° 25' S. latitude, and from 138° 48' to 140° 29"W. long. The native names for sorae of the above 1 have received frora tbe inhabit-. ants, or the account of Mr. Stewart, who recently visited thera ; in one or two I have foUowed the voyagers by * Introduction to Uie Duff's Voyage, p. Ixxxiii, THE MARQUESANS. 231 whom they have been visited, and some of thera raay be incorrect. It -Very frequently occurs that transient visiters mistake tbe narae of the bay in which fheir ships anchor, or the opposite district, for that of the whole island ; hence Ohitahoo, which, according to the orthography now used by other tribes of. the Pacific, would be Vaitahu, the narae of one of the districts bor dering on the bay in which most vessels anchor, has been the name generaUy given to-the islandj caUed by the natives Tahuata. The geographical extent of tbe group is inferior to that of the Georgian and Society Islands, Nuuhiva, the largest, is rauch smaller than Tahiti, and probably not more than fifty miles in circuraference ; the moun tains are lofty, bold in outline, and either clothed with verdure or adorned with plantations ; cascades roll over the sides of th-e mountains, and streams flow through the valleys, Tbe, land capable of cultivation, however, is comparatively sraall, as the islands are not protected, like most others in the Paeiflc, by coral reefs," The sea extends to the base of the mountains, and thus prevents the forraation and preservation of that low border of prolific alluvial soil so valuable to the So ciety islanders. The shores are rocky and precipitous, and a level beach, or a good landing-place, -is seldom met with. Deep, wide, and extensive valleys abound in the islands, and. are the general places where the inhabit ants ab'-ie. The vegetable productions correspond with those of the islands to the west, and are cultivated in the spacious valleys. The bread-fruit is the chief arti cle of su'iport to tbe inhabitants ; it. is cultivated and preserved with peculiarcare, and probably is obtained in greater perfection among the Marquesas than ih any other island's of the Pacific. So careful are the people when gathering it, that they frequently suspend a net under the tree, to prevent such as may drop frora being bruised by faUing on the- ground, ..The sea and their coasts abound with, fish, which contribute materially to their subsistence. They have also pigs, goats, and fowls, but not in abundance. Notwithstanding the fer- tiUty of their valleys; and the superiority of their bread fruit, which grows spontaneously, seasons of famine are frequent and severe, and are occasioned by the in dolence of the people, and their dependence on the bread-fruit crop ; a failure in which reduces them to a 232 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. state of tbe greatest destitution, and often leads to the perpetration of the most revolting ind unnatural crime of raurdering and feeding upon, each other. We bave frequently met with the natives of the Mar quesas in other islands of the Pacific. Three of them attended a pubhc service. which I held in Byron's Bay, on the island of Hawaii, in 1823. When the assembly dispersed, they expressed their approbation of what they had heard. I asked them from what island they came : they said, Fatuiva, or La Magdalena, and that there were seven white men and two negroes living in their island, but they told them nothing concerning J,ehovah or -Jesus Christ. I asked .thera if they thought their cotintry- men would receive and protect missionaries. " Yes," they answered, " we are sure they would.!' — " But you kill and eat white people: raissionaries would not be safe among you," After a moment's pause, they ex claimed, " Oh no ! oh no ! you would not injure us, and should never be injured by us^' In the Sandwich Islands 1 have often had a number of Marquesans residing near me, and visiting my house 'daily, fpr the purpose of teaching me their language, and receiving instruction in reading and writing ; and though, when 1 have ques tioned them on the practice of eating one another, they have generaUy denied it,, they have alio wed its existence among other tribes ; and I have often been disposed to attribute such denial in reference to themselves to a sense of shame, arising from the detestation in which cannibalism is held by those among whom they were residing, rather than to their actual exemption from it. The testimoiiy of the", natives of Tahiti, of foreigners who have resided among them, and of the missionaries and voyagers by whom they have been visited, seems to be not less decisive than distressing^ Krusenstern, in his voyage roimd the world, touched at Nuuhiva ^n his way to Japah. He obtained rauch, information from Roberts, an Englishman, who had resided some time on the island^ and states that in times of famine the men butcher- their wives- and children, and aged parents. They bake and stew their flesh, and devour it with the greatest satisfaction. lEven the tender-looking female wiU join, if perraitted, in tbe horridrepast.* Most re cent visiters seem to think the population is diminish- * KrasenBtem, THE MARQUESANS. 233 ing, and both the physical and moral character of the people deteriorating. The population is, however, still greater, in all probabiUty, than that of the Georgian and Society Islands, The dress of the Marquesans is usuaUy made with the inner bark of the paper-mulberry, and consists of a broad bandage worn round the Waist, and'a large square piece like a shawl cast loosely over the upper part of the body, tied on a knot in one shoulder, and^reaching below the knees. They wear very showy breastplates, adorned with -hard red berries of the abrus precatorius, called by them peripeprio, and thejr helmets are often ingenious, their canoes and dwellings are in raany re spects similar, though inferior, to those of the westward islands. Their system of religion, with its appendages of raaraes, priests, sOrcery, divination, and sacrifices, is, with slight variation, a part of that vvhich prevails throughout the Polynesian tribes, excepting that the liunian victinls are not buried under thepavement pf the teraple, or. suspended in a sacred tree, but are eaten within the marae by the priests. The tabu, or sacred restriction, prevails in all it§ force smong them, and is often, in t|ie instance of general restriction, imposed in a very arbitrary raanner. The priests alone are said to have the power df laying a general prohibition on cer tain articles of food — vegetables, hogs, fish, &c. ; but every man has the power-of tabuing his own property, and the tabu operates as poVverfuUy on himself as any other individual ; so that, during its continuance, he dare not appropriate to bis own use fhe smallest portion of the article- thus prohibited. Physically considered, the Marquesans are described as among the most perfect of the human species. The men are said to be tall, strong-btiilt, and raany of them exhibit the finest symmetry of form : they are frequently upward . of six feet high, their limbs muscular and firra, but not heavy. Their mbvements are always agile, often easy and graceful. In shape and form, the females' limbs are inferior to the men, yet often present most agreeable models of the human figure, and are equaUy distinguished by the liveliness of their disposition, and the ease and quickness of their gait and gestures. Sorae Visiters, however, have represented them as scarcely superior to the Society islanders. The com- 234. POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. plexion of tbe Marquesans is much Ughter than that of the Tahitians, but it is seldom that the natural colour of their skin is discernible, on account of the astonish ing raanner in which their bodies are tattooed, and the frequent appUcation of a preparation of turraeric and oU. The shape of the face is generally oval. The hair is black, occasionally curling, often bound up on the crown or side of the head in an elegant and most fantastic man ner. Tl^ manifest a singular taste in cutting their hair, sometiraes the fore-part of the head is shaved, at other tiraes the whole of the head, excepting two smaU patches, one above each ear, where the hair is tied up in a sort of knot, giving to their naked heads a very strange appearance. Their eyebrows are good ; their eyes are not large, but Wack, andjremarkably brilliant and quick. Their features are smaU, and weU formed, but the pleas ing effect tbey would naturally produce is almost entirely destroyed by the use of tattoo. The vignette to the present volume, representing the natives on the rocks near tbe landing-place, when the Dauntless anchored near the shore, exhibits their singular appearance. In the practice of tattooing, -they surpass all other nations, both as to the extent of the human body to which it is appUed, and the varied images and pattems thus irapressed. Their tattooing is less rude than that of the Sandwich and PalUser islanders, lees curious and intricate in its figures than that impressed on the coun tenance of the New-Zealanders, equally elegant, and far -more profuse, than that of the Tahitians, . The colouring raatter itself is of a jet-black, but, as seen thi:ough the white skin beneath whicb it lies, it gives tbe limbs, and those parts of the body to which it is applied, a blue or dark slate-coloured hue. The females do not use it raore than those of Tahiti, but raany of the men cover the greater part of their bodies. The face is sometimes divided into different compartments, each of which receives a varied "shade, of colour ; sometimes it is covered with broad stripes, crossing each other at right angles ; and sometimes it is crowded witb sharks, lizards, and figures of other ammals, delineated with considerable spirit, freedom, and accuracy, frequently witb open mouths, or extended claws, so, as to give the countenance a most repulsive and frightful aspect. The operation of puncturing the skin, and injecting the THE MARQUESANS. 233 colouring, raatter (of which a more ample account bas been already given), raust be exceedingly tedious and painful, as the most tender parts of the face, such as the inner surface of the lips, and the edges of tbe eyelids, are thus punctured. Those Marquesans wbo bave been in the schools in the Society Islands bave not manifestedany inferiority in mental capacity ; and those who were jny pupils in the Sandwich Islands appeared to be equ'djly capable of learning to read, write, cipher, &c. with the people around them, though they usually manifested a greater restlessness and impatience of the application necessary to raake. much proficiency ; this, I presume, arose, from tbeir natural fickleness and volatile dispositions. All those I bave had any raeans of becoming ac quainted with have appeared gay, thoughtless, and good- natured, I never witnessed any thing of that ferocity of barbarisra which has distinguished their intercourse with lAost of those by whora they have been visited ; but I bave only seen thera as guests araong Strangers, where the vices practised extensively in their native islands were held in abhorrence, and where dispositions. of hospitality and kindly feelings were ,rei4pected and cultivated. The testimony of almost all who have vis ited thera concurs in inducing the belief that their morals are most debased, tbat their licentiousness is of the raost shameless kind, that tbeir propensity to theft is universal, and that tbey are quarrelsome and murderous. Since Mendano first anchored off their shores, few ships bave visited thera, during whose stay sorae blood, either of Europeans or natives, or both, bas not been shed ; and fewBr stiU, whose crews have not been engaged in violent and alarming quarrels. The Russian navigator whose testimony has been already referred to observes, that, though they mani fested some degree of .honesty in barter, they appeared to have neither social institutions, religion, nor humane feelings. Their general behaviour towards foreigners has been represented as wild, violent, and ferocious, adapted to inspire any feeling rather than that of confi dence or security. Their government is feudal or aris tocratical, ahd, for every purpose of benefit to the com munity,- is feeble and inefficient. The inhabitants ap pear to reside in the spacious valleys by wbich the high lands are intersected, the mountain-sides forming tha 236 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. natural boundaries. The inhabitants of each vaUey are said to have tbeir temple, their priests, and their chief tain or ruler; sometiraes several tribes, inhabiting as many vaUeys, are united under one chief, but we do jiot know of any chief who exercises the suprerae author ity over any one of the islands. In each there appears to be two or more distinct confederations; and these are frequently, at war with each other, or with the inhabitants of sonje neighbouring island. Wars are fre quent and cru61; they do not appear to be carried on frbra motives of arabition orrevenge,i so rauch as from a desire for plunder, or to secure a .feast upon the bodies of their enemies. The sculls of the captured are some times worn as trophies of a warrior's prowess, or are' offei:ed for sale to foreigners; Human bones constitute part of the Jurniture of their dwellings, and human hair ornaments most of their implements of war,' According to tbe testimony of tbe European raissionjiries,by whom they baye been raost recen1;ly visited, part, if not all, tbe bodies of the slain furnish the victor's banquet. Their feeding on each other does not appear to be con fined to seasons of famine, or the feast of triumph, but to be practised from motives more repulsive and crirai nal. Langsdorff, "who accompanied the Russian embassy to Japan, states, on the authority of a Frenchman who had resided some years in the islands, that the tauasj or priests, often regale themselves on human .flesh, merely from the delight they take in it,- Forthis purpose, tbey act as if under the influence of inspiration, and, after varied contortions of the body, appear to fall into a deep sleep, before a multitude of spectators ; when they awake, tbey relate wlfat the spirit has said to them in their dreara. The comraunication sometimes is, that a wonian or a man, a tattooed oruntattooed raan, a fat or lean raan, an old man, or a young man from the next valley, or border of the next stream, must be seized, and brought to them. Those to whi^m this' is related iramediately conceal themselves near, a footpath or river, and the first person that passes that way bearing any reserablance to the description given by the priest, is taken, conveyed to thp marae, and eaten by the priests,* Conduct more diabolical than that here- de scribed cannot easily be conceived of, I have always • Langsdorff, vol, ii, p, 159. THE MARQUESANS. 237 been reluctant to admit the cannibalism of any of the Polynesian tribes, but the concurring testimony of foreigners of every nation, by whora the Marquesans have been visited, and of the native teachers from the S(^ety Islands, who have resided for a long tirae among them, forces upon my mind the belief, that they perpe trate this unnatural crime to as great an extent, and under circumstances as aggravating, as it has been raet •vyith in any age of the wbrld, or araong any -portion of mankind, Tbe proximity of the Marquesans- to the Society Islands — frequent intercourse -formerly maintained be tween the islands by means of trading vessels — their identity in language, traditions, raanners, and custoras with the latter — their numbers, which are said to exceed those of the inhabitants of the southern islands, could not fail to make them objects of interest to those en gaged in iraprovihg the temporal and spiritual state of the Tahitians, In 1'797 a mission was attempted in Ta huata, but, after a residence of about twelve months, Mr. Crook was unexpectedly ^removed frora the islands, and no attempt to introduce Christianity araong thera was made until 1831, when two natives from Huahine were appointed to these islands ; and I accompanied thera for the purpose of assisting tbeir introduction, and ascertaining the state and disposition of the people, with a', view to the ultimate est'ablishraent of European missionaries among thera. Circumstances occurred during the voyage which prevented the native teachers from settling at their original destination, and led to tbeir residence in the Sandwich Islands. In 1825 the attempt was' renewed, and Mr. Crook conducted thither two native teachers from Huahine, and one from Tahiti, Several natives who had known Mr. Crook during his former abode welcoraed his return with gladness. The females recited a ballad composed on his arrival, as the adopted son of their late chief Tenae. Some of the inhabitants, he heard, had destroyed their idols. The greater part of the inhabitants of the island, however, were exceedingly rude, vicious, and disorderly in their behaviour, as well as strongly attached to their supersti tions. After reraaining about a raonth araong thera, holding repeated conferences with the chiefs and priests, Mr. Crook left the- native teachers under the protection of a friendly chief in Tahuata, or Santa Christina. 238 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Their prospects of usefulness were at first encouragitig ; but thp wickedness of the people was so great", "their conduct so violent and alarming even to the Tahitians, whom they threatened to kiU and devour, that they were obliged to i-eturn. They were succeede'd by otiers, who were obUged to leave in 1828,- In 1829, Messrs, Pritchard and Sirapson visited the islands, but such was the inipression raade upon their minds by the turbulent and repulsive conduct of the natives, that they deeraed the establishment of a European mission impracticable, and returned, leaving the- two native missionaries, who had been already two years in Uahou, to prosecute their perilous and self-denying labours, A chief, whose narae is Teato, received them with professions of .friendship, and at flrst treated them kindly — -l)ut their privations are -great, -and prospectp dark. These are the only indi viduals at present employed in endeavouring to soften the- savage cbaracter and restrain the brut^ and mur derous habits of the Marquesans. Tbeir feroci'ty, insa tiable desire of firearms and ammunition — their love qf war, its sanguinary character, and the inhuraan practice of cannibalism with which it is usuaUy concluded — their inveterate attachment to a system which sanctions every vice, and encourages every cruelty — their abom inable licentiousness and natural fickleness of" disposi tion — appear to present insurmountable barriers to the success of efforts sucb as those now employed; and nothing but a belief in the Divine piromises and energy, confirmed by the recent events which have transpired in the Society Islands, can induce the hope of any favourable change ; but from these sources •we are war ranted in confidently expecting it. , Recent tidings from Tahiti announce the preparation of one of the missiona ries to visit thera, and settle native teachers ih each island. Every friend of humanity will cordially wish that this enterprise, not less" benevolent than hazardous, may be successful. The're are several good harbours araong the Marque sas, but, on account of the turbulent and treacherous conduct of the natives, few of them, except in St. Chris tina, are visited. Near the south-eastern extremity of the Dangerous Archipelago is situated an island about six miles in cir cumference,- having a bold rocky shore with high land in the interior^ hUly and verdant. It is supposed to be pitcairn's island. 239 La Incarnation of Quiros, but appears to have been dis covered by Carteret in 1767, and by hira called, after the narae of the gentleman by whom it was first seen, Pitcairn's Island, At that tirae it was uninhabited, and, being destitute of any harbour, and dangerous to approach even by boats, attracted but little attention, thoifgh it has since excited very general interest in England. , It is situated, accord ing to Sir T. Staines, in 25° S. lat., and 130° 35' W. long. When the raurderous quarrels between the rautineers of the Bounty and the natives of Tubuai obUged the forraer in 1789 and 1790 to leave that island, they pro ceeded to Tahiti. Those who wished to reraain there left the ship, and the others stood out to sea in search of some unfrequented and uninhabited spot of the ocean that might afford them subsistence and concealraent. Proceeding in an easterly direction, they reached Pit cairn's Island, and could scarcely have desired a place more suited to their purpose. Here they run the Bounty on shore, xemoved the pigs, goats, and fowls to the land, and, having taken every thing on shore that -they sup posed would be useful, set fire to the vessel. The party consisted of twenty-seven persons, viz. ten English raen, six Tahitians, and eleven women ;* or, according to another account, of nine Englishmen and twelve women. In a sheltered and elevated part of the island they erected their .dwellings, deposited, in the earth the seeds and young plants which they had brought from Tahiti, and commenced the cultivation of the yam and other roots for their subsistence. New troubles awaited them. The wife of Christian, the. leader of the mutineers, died ; and he is said to have seized by force the wife of one of the Tahitians. ' Revenge or jealousy prompted the Tahitian to take the life of Chris tian, who vvas shot while at work in his garden about two years after his arrival. The English and the Tahi tians seemed bent on each Other's destruction. Six Englishraen were killed, and Adams, now the only sur vivor, .of the crew, was wounded: every Tahitian man was put lo death. The history^of the rautineers is truly tragical. Th.e children of these unhappy men have been * Narrative of Briton's Voyage, 240 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. trained up with the most indefatigable care and atten tion to morals and religion by John Adaras, who, with his interesting faraily around hira, reraained undiscov ered and unvisited for nearly twenty years ; when Cap tain Mayhew Folger, in the American ship Topaz, of Boston, touched at their island ; and, after maintaining a friendly intercourse with them for two days, prose cuted his voyage. No further inforraation respecting them transpired untU 1814, when Captain Sir T. Staines, in his, majesty's ship Briton; on his passage from the Marquesas. to Valparaiso, unexpectedly came" in sight of the island. Canoes were soon perceived coming off frora the shore ;'and it is not easy to conceive the aston ishment of the commander and his officers when those on board bailed thera in the English language. The surprise of the young raen in the canoe, who were the sons of the mutineers, when they came on board an English man. of war, was scarcely less than that of their visiters. The frankn^s with whichithey replied to^he interrogatori"es of the captain evinced the unsophisti cated manner in which they bad been brought up ; and their account of their belief in the most iraportant doc trines and practice of the great duties of religion re-. fleeted the highest honour ori tbeir venerable instructer. When they sat down to breakfast; without any hypo critical or formal shovv of devotion, but with a sim plicity and earnestness' tha| alone astonished and re proved those around them, they knelt down and implored " permission to partake iripeace of what was set before them ;" and at the close of their repast " resuming the same attitudp, offered a-fervent prayer of thanksgiving forthe indulgence they had received."^ The captains of the Briton and TagOs went. on shore,' and werfe inet on fee Jjrow of the hill by Adams's daughter, who, after the first emotions of surprise bad subsided, led them to the " beautiful little viUage formed on an oblong square witb trees, of various kinds irregularly , interspersed. The houses," Sir T, Staines adds, "were small, but regular, convenient, and of unequalled cleanUness," .After a very affecting interview with John Adams (who appeared aboutsixty years of age), and with his rising community, wbo -with tears and entreaties begged them not to take their father from them, the captains returned to their ships, and sent to these interesting people such useful articles as they could spare. There were forty- EASTER ISLAND. 241 ¦eight persons on the island at this time. Tbis smaU island is fertile, though water is not abundant. As soon as tbeir circurastances became known, a liberal supply of agricultural implements and tools was sent from Calcutta, Bibles and- prayer-books were also forwarded by the directors of the London Missionary Society, Tbey were gladly received by Adaras, and gratefuUy acknowledged. Since that tirae the nuniber of inhabitants has con siderably increased, and at the present time amounts to about eighty, including tbe seamen whOT^ve ' left their vessels, married females of the island, and have taken up their residence on shore. Apprehensive of the in adequacy of the productions of-the island to supply their wants, especially in fuel and water, tbey intimated four or five years ago their vvish to be taken to another country ; and it appeared probable that they might re move to the Society Islands, or som-e extensive and fertile but uninhabited island in the Pacific : this de.sire has, however; ceased, and, since the death of Adams, they havfe exprisssed their wishes to remain. I have been near their island more than once^ and regret that I had not an opportunity of. visitihg thera. The captain of the ship in-wbioh I returned to England had been on shore twice ; and his accounts, • with those of others whom I have raet. with in the Pacific,, were such as could not fail to excite a deep concern for their welfare, Two degrees farther fl'om the equator, and rather more than twenty degrees nearer the^ American conti-' nent, an island is situated which ba^'attracted consid erable notice from mpst of the navigators who have prosecuted .their discoveries in the Pacific, It was dis covered by Roggewein, on Easter-day 1772, and called ¦ ' Easter Island, This is a small hilly island, bearing evident marks of volcanic origin, or of having been subject to the action of subterraneous fire. The hills are conical, and were by Kotzebue supposed to reserable tbose of Hawaii, Nothing can be raore contradictory than the descrip tions -different voyagers have given of the appearance of this island. Some, as in Roggewein's- account, and that of La Perouse, representing it as rich and fertile ; others, as Forster, describing it as parched and desolate. Vol. IIL— L 242 POL-yNESLAN RESEARCHES. The population, which La-Perouse estimated at about two thousand, is supposed by Kotzebue to have in creased ; by others they are said to have decreased, and not to exceed 1200. Tbe inhabitants -are evidently part of the race wbicb has spread itself extensively over the isles of the Pacifio, and they evince thaf pro pensity to heentiousness and theft which marks, the larger coraraunities. The most remarkable objects in Easter Island are its monuments-o^tone-work and sculpture, which, "though rude and imjJWfect, are superior to 'any found, among the more numerous and civilized tribes inhabiting the South Sea islands. These monuraents consist in a number of terraces or platforms biiilt with stones, cut and fixed with' great exactness and skiU, forming„tbougb destitute of cement, a Strong, tiurable pile. On these terraces are fixed colossal figures or busts. They ap pear to be'rapnuments erected in memory of ancient kings or chiefs, as each bust or column bad a distinct name. One of these, of^wbich Forster took the dimen- , sions, consisted of a single stone twenty feet high and five wide, and represented.^- huniEiri-figure to the waist ; on the crown of the bead a stone of cylindrical shape was placed erect : this stone was of a different colour from the rest of the figure, which appeared to be.formed of a kind of cellular lava. In one place, seven pf these statues, or busts, stood together* : one which they saw Ijring on the ground was t,wenty-seven feet long and nine in -diamei-er. The largest, however, that La Pe rouse saw, was-fourteen feet six inches high, and seven feet sixinchesin diameter. Th^' inhabitants- of many of the northern and e.astern islands make stone repre sentations of their deities and ofjtheir departed ^ ances tors, but none equal in size to those found in, Easter Island. When Cook yisit,ed this island, the natives ap peared to possess but 'few means of subsistence, and to inhabit very smaU and comfortless dwellingg, A greater abundance Vappeared when they were subsequentl)* vis ited by the Frefich navigator ; their habitations appeared more comfortable, one of which was three hundred arid ten feet long, and ten feet wide. Easter Island is situated in 27"^ S" south lat,, and * Forster's Voyage, vol, i. p, 6S6 JUAN FERNANDEZ, 243 109° 43" west long. It is caUed by the inhabitants Waihu. It has been already stated tbat Magellan was the first European wbo sailed frora tbe Atlantic to the Pacific. The navigation of the Straits was often tedious and unsafe; yet it was the orily coraraunication known for nearly a century after it^ discovery, when in January, 1616, Schouten and Le Maire, two Dutch navigators, passed round the southern extremity of the American continent, which, in honour pf the town whence they sailed, they designated Cape Horn. Thife course is now almost invariably preferred ; and though the sea is high. and the gales are often boisterous and severe, the pas sage round the Cape is found raore expeditious and less hazardous than the way through the Straits. One ofthe first objects that arrests the attentibn of many. soon after they enter the Pacific is the sraaU island of Juan FeruEindez, situated' in lat. 33° 49" S.,, long, 80° 30' W, Tbe centre is raountainous, and the shore rocky, having one or two gbod harbours. It has received its designation frora its discoverer,* a Spanish pilot, -Juan Fernandez, V?bo originally, with several Spanish .families, settled on its shores, but removed to the opposite coast of Chili when the inhabitants becarae subject to his countryraen, " It is. distinguished by its verdant and romantic appearance, the luxuriance with -which peaches, nectarines, apricots, and plums (pro duced from seeds left by different visiters), grow in different parts of the' island, and by the bright red colour of the soU, But it is chiefly celebrated as- hav ing been tbe abode of Alexander' Selkirk, a native of Fife, in Scotland, who, being left on shore by the cap tain of tbe ship in which he saUed, remained in solitude on the island four years and four months, when he was released by Captain' Rogers, on the 3d of February, 1709.t During his residence here; he subsisted on such vegetables as he found on the island, with fish, and the broiled flesh of goats, which he pursuedwith surprising agility araong the rocky and mountainous parts of the island, ^Captain Rogers observes, that when he came on board " he was clothed in goat-skinS, and looked wilder than the first owners of thera ;" and adds, " he had so rauch forgbtten his language, that we could * Rogers's Voyage of Dtike and Duehess. t ^t^^d. 244 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. scarcely understand him," Cowper, with hi? accus tomed sensibUity of feeling and felicity of expression, has coraraemorated his exUe in those beautifol Unes wbich coraraence with " I ara raonarch of all I survey " The adventures of Selkirk in Juan Fernandez also fur nished De Foe with the materials for his unrivaUed " Robinson Crusoe." CHAPTER xn.' Boiitli-westem borders ofPolynesia—N^w-Holland— Temper off the coast--' Observations on the aborigines— New-Zealand— Situation— Soil— Frodue- tiona — Climate— Porest aeenery— Native flax — Population^Savage dlsposi. tions of the people— Cannibalism— Govemment— Slavery— in New-Zealand —in Rio Janeiro— Criiel treannerit of New-Zealand slares-^Saperstitions — Instance of parental tenderness— Occurrences at NeVtr-Zealand — Tattoo* ,ing— Sham-flgWing and War-dances— InfiuenQ.e of reports from, Tahiti— "Prospects of the mission. The preceding chapter ,contains a brief notice of the principal islands and clusters in the eastern part of Polynesia, and whicb usually arrest the attention of those who, by the way of Cape Horn, enter the Paeiflc. The countries on the south-western borders of fhis ocean are not less interesting ;jtnd, in many respects, they are entitled tg a greater -degree of attention. The raost important o^ these are New-HoUand and Van Diemen's Land. In tbe former is the new settle ment on tbe Swan River, and the iraportant. colony of New South Wales ; in the latter, its flourishing append ages in 'Van Diemen's Land. The navigation of the morthern part of this extensive island is intricate and dangerous. The shores of the southern part are rocky and -bold, affording, however, several harbours, of which P,ort Jackson, leading to the town of Sydney, is probably the most capacious and secure. "The weather ig often stormy and' the sea temr pestuous, and fatal to the bark that may be exposed to its -violence. We experienced somewhat of its fury on our first arrival off the eoast in 1816.' Our passage from Rio Janeiro had been pleasant; and, eleven week,s after leaving Brazil, we riiade the. western coast of "V^an Diemen's Land. We passed VOYAGE TO PORT JACKSON. 245 through Bass's Straits onthe sarae day, and sailed along the eastern shore of New-Holland towards Port Jack son. Soon after daylight the next raorning,^ we per ceived a sail sorae miles before us, which on nearer approach proved to be a sraall schooner. Our captain, on visiting her, found only three men on board, who were in the greatest "distress. They had been at Kan garoo Island procuring seal-skins, with a quantity of which they were now bound to Sydney. They had re- raainedon the island, oatching^ seals, till their provisions were nearly expended, and, during their voyage, bad encountered much hea.Vy weather, had been nearly lost, and were so exb'dusted by fatigue, vvant of food, and constant exposure, that they cbuld not even alter their sails wben a change in the wind rendered it necessary. They had been for some tirae living on seal-skins ; pieces of which- were found i-n a -saucepan over the fire when tbe boat's crew boarded thera.-.. The men -from our ship trimmed their sails, and- our captain -offered to take tbem in -tow;. but as they were' so near their port, -which they hoped to reach the next day, they declined his proposal. When he returned to-the ship, .he sent them sonie. bread and beef, a bottle of wine, and some water-; which "the poor starving men received with in describable eagerness and joy- The seamen who con veyed these , supplies returned to the ship, and we kept onWr way, ¦ We did not, however, hear of, their ar rival; and as we reraained nearly Six raonths in "Sydney after this time, and received no tidings of them, it is probable their crazy bark was -jvrecked, or fopndered during a heavy storm that carfie on in the course of the following day, , The wind from the sbuth coritinued fresh and favour able, and in the forenoon of the next day we sailed to wards the shore, under the influence of exhilarated spirits", and the confldent expectation of landing in Port Jackson before sunset. About noon we found ourselves near enough the coast to distinguish different objects along the 'shore, and' soon discovered the flag-staff erected on one of the heads leading to Sydney, our port of destination,- about four nules distant from us, hut rather to -windward. Tbe captain and officers being strangers tp the port, some tirae was sjSeiitin scanning the coast, in the hope of finding an opening still farther northward ; but at twelve o'clock our apprehensions of, 246 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. having missed our port were confirraed, as the latitude was then found, by an observation of the sun, to be four miles to the northward, of Sydney heads. We had, in fact^.saUed with a strong but favourable wind four miles past the harbour which we ought to have en tered. Hope, which had beamed in every eye, and lighted up every countenance withanticipated pleasure, when we first neared the' land, had alternated with fear, or given way to -most intense anxiety, when we wit nessed the uncertainty that prevailed among our com panions as to our actual situation ; but" disappointment the riiost distressing was nbw strongly marked iri every countenance; *' About ship," exclaimed the captain ; immediately the ship's head was turned from the land^ and, steering as near the wind as possible, we proceeded towards the open sea. - After saiUng in this direction for some time, the ship was again turned, towards the shore ; but the wind, which during- the forenoon had been so fav9urable, was now against us, and as soon as we could distinguish tbe flag-staff on the coast, we found ourselves farther, from it than before, , The wind in creased: and .'as, the', evening advanced, a storm on, which raged -with fearful, violence. The. night was unusuaUy dark j'the long and heavy waves of the Pacific rolled in foam around our vessel; the storray wind howled through the rigging ; aU Tiands were on deck, and twice or thrice, whUe in the act of turning thc ship from the land, the saUs were rent by the tempest ; while the hoarse and hollow roaring pf the breakers, and the occasional glimmering of lights on the coast, combined to convince us of our situation, and the proximity of our danger. The depression of spirits resulting frorii the disappointment which had been more" oi: less feltby all on board, the noise of the terapest, the vociferations and frequent imprecations ofthe officers, the hurried steps, rattling of ropes and cordage," and alriiost inces sant labours of the searaen on deck, aiitl the heavy, and violent motion of the vessel, which detached from tbeir fastenings, and dashed with violence frora one side of the ship to- the other, chests of drawers, trunks, and barrels, that had remained secure during the voyage, produced a state of mind peculiarly distressing. The darkness and general disorder that prevailed in the cabin, with the constant apprehension of striking on some fatal rock that might lie uriseen near the craggy TEMPEST OFF PORT JACKSON. 247 and iron-bound shore, and of being eitber ingulfed in the migbty deep, or wrecked on the inhospitable coast, rendered the night altogether one of the most alarra ing and anxious that we had passed since' our depar ture frora England, Araid the cdnftision by whicb we were surrounded, we' experienced coraparative com posure of raind, in reliance on the protection of the Most High, > "''¦-¦ " When o'er thd fearful depth we hung, High on the broken wave, We-knew He was not slow to hear„ Nor impotent to save." In such a season, confidence in Him who holdeth the wind in his fists, and the waters in tbe -_ hollow of his hand, can alone impart serenity and support. As-the morning advanced the storm abated; and at sunrise we found ourselves at a eonsiderable distance frorii the shore. Contrary, winds'kept ua out at sea for nearly a fortnight, t9 hei- master; at length he saw her sitting with some -natives at Jtoranareka, near his residence. He led ber away, tied her taa tree, and shot her. ^Captain Duke, of the Sisters, hearing of the circumstance, went to the place, and found -the body of the girl prepared -for baking in a native oven, the large bones of the legs and arms having been cut out. On his expostplatmg, they said it was not his concern, and they should act as they pleased. They often seera to take a savage delight in murdering their slaves, in whicU 258 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. tbey are unawed by the presence of strangers, A few years ago, a chief of the narae of Tuma kiUed with an iron bill-hook a female slave who was employed in wash ing linen at Mr, Hanson's dpor, tliough Mr, Kendall and Mr. King, two of the missionaries, interfered for her rescue. Their superstitions seem more vague and indistinct, atid tbeir system of religion more rude and unorganized, than that of raost ofthe other inhabitants of the South Sea islands, though raany of their traditions are singular and, interesting. Theii; temples are few.and insignifi cant, their priests- pfobably less-, numerous arid influen tial, asa distinct clasSj than those of .Tahiti br. Hawaii formerly were ;, their worship less frequent, cereraonial, ahd iraposing, and also- less sahgiiiriary, 1 never beard bf their ofierilig human-sacrifice's. They beheve in a future state; which they suppose- wiU corf-espond in sOrae degree, with {he present. Like some bf the bar barous nations in Africa, they iriiagine'that it is necessary the spirits of departed chiefs should, be attended by the spirits of their' slaves ; this occasions the death of num bers of unhappy captives. The. missionaries observe thaf it is a common-practice to kill one or two slaves on such occasions: At one tihie, a child -who residetl in the immediate neighbourhood of . the missionaries was drowned: tbe father was absent,- the mother made great 'lameintation, and called upon the people around to put to death sime one^whose spirit should be a com panion" for that of her child, on' its way to the rainga (heaven)-. An aged ffemale slave, apprehensive of the consequence of sUcb-an appeal,-'took.i'efuge araong the high fern, and effe'ctually concealed herself. A female relative 'of the-deceased- child called out to 'the slave, assuring her she sbould.be spared'. The poor creature made her appearance, when;ffie brother of the child was caUed, and immediately despatched the slave with a stone implement, ' • -- ,' ¦^ Although- their character is so dark, their temper so ferocious, an^ their conduct so violent and murderous, in some respects their dispositions appear more humane and amiable tharithose of the Tahitians. . To the cata logue of their '!viCes and their cruelties they did not add that deliberate systemfttic infanticide which -the Areois practised ; "and though not guiltless of this crime, it was exercised less frequently — and some of thera, especially NEW-ZEALANDERS. 259 the fathers, seeraed fond of tbeir children, A pleasing iUustration of this occurred while I was araong thera ; and 1 mention it the raore cheerfuUy as the general ira pression their spirit and behaviour made upon my mind was of a different kind. In an excui^ion to Waikadie, shortly after leaving the Bay of Islands, we reached Kauakaua, where Mr, HaU proposed to land. As we approached theshore, no trlice of inhabitants appeared; but we- had scarcely landed, when we were soraewhat slfrprised by the appearance of Tetoro and a nurnber of- his people. The chief ran to raeet us, greeting ns in English with "'How do youdoT' He perceived I was a stranger, and, on hearing ray er rand and destination, he offered me his band, and saluted me, according to the custora of his country, by touch ing my nose witb.his. He was a tall, fine-iobking raan, about six feet high, and proportionably stout, bis lirabs firra and muscular,— and when dressed in his war-qloak, with all his implement's of death appended^to his jJer- son, he must have- appeared formidable to his enemies. When acquainted' with Our business, he prepared tb ac company us ; but before we set but, an incident occurred tbat greatly raised ray estimation (5f his, character. In front of the hut sat his wife, and around ber played two or three little children. In passing from the but to the boat, Tetoro struck one of the little ones with his foot ; tbe child- cried — ^and though the chief had bis mat on, and bis gun in his band, and ,was in the act of stepping into the boat where we Vvere waiting for hirii, he no sooner beard its cries" than be turned back, took the child up in his arms,^ stroked its little head, 'dried its tears, and, giving it to the mother, hastened to join us. His conversation in tbe boat during tbe voyage, so far as tt was made known tp rpe, indicated no inferiority of intellect, nor deficiency of local information. On reach ing Waikadie, about twenty miles from our ship, we were met by -Waivea, Tetoro's brother ; buthis relation ship appeared to be almost all that he possessed in-com mon witb him, as be was both in appearance and in con duct entirely a savage, ^. It was in the month of December, 1816, that I visited New-Zealand, and- bere for the first time saw the rude inhabitants of the South Sea islands in their native state. At daylight on the morning after bur arrival on the coast, we found ourselves off Wangaroa bay, where, six years 260 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. before, the murderous quarrel took place, in which the cr^w of the Boyd were cut off by the natives, and near whicb, subsequently, the Methodist raissionary station at Wesleydale, established in 1823, has been, through the alarming ^ and violent conduct of -the inhabitants, abandoned by the missionaries; and utteriy destroyed by the natives. Several canoes, with three or four raen in each; approached our vessel at a very early hour, with fish, fishing-lines, hooks, and a few curiosi'ties, for sale. Their canoes were all single, generaUy- between twenty and thirty feet -long, jbrraed out ofone tree,~and nearly destitute of every kind of ornaraent. . The raen, alriiost naked, were rather above the raiddle stature, of a dark copper colour, tbeir featiires frequently well formed, their hair black and bushy, arid their faces much tatto'oed, and drna-inented, or rather^disfigured, by the. unsparing application.of a kind of -white clay and red ochre, mixed with oU, Their appearance -and conduct during our first intervi;ew were by no riieans adapted to inspire us with prepossessions in their favour. Our captain refused to admit them into the- ship, and, after bartering with them fpr some ofjbeir fish, we proceeded on our voyage, - . On reaching the Bay of Islands we were cordially welcomed by oiir Chrisftian brethren, the. missionaries ofthe Church Missionary Society,- who had befen about two years engagpd in promoting instruction and civiU zation among the . New-Zealanders^ They were the first missionaries we had seen on Ifeathen ground, and it afforded us pleasure to become acquainted with those )vho were- in .some respects to be our future fellow- labburers," Having been kindly invited to ^spend qn shore the next day, whicb wa^s the Sabbath, we left the ship soon after breakfast bn the morning of the 22d, When we reached the landing-place, crowds of riatives thronged around us, with an idle but by no means cere- irionious curiosity, and some time elapsed before we could proceed- from the beach to the houses of our friends. The missionaries had on the preceding day invited me to officiate for them, andi was happy to bave an oppor tunity pf preaching the gospel on the Shores of New- Zealand. Several "of the natives appeared in our little congregation, influenced probably by curiosity, aa the service was held in. a language uninteUigible to ithem. NEW-ZEALANDERS. 261 I could not, however, but indulge the hope tbat the time was not distant when, through the influence of the schools already established, and the general mstructions given by the raissionaries, ray brethren would have the pleasure of preaching on every returning Sabbath tbe unsearchable riches of Christ to numerous assemblies of attentive Christian hearers. The' circumstance Of its being, exactly two years, this Sa!bbath-day, since Mr. Marsden, who visited New-Zealand in 1814-1815, for the purpose of -establishing a Christian mission among the people, preached' not far from this spot the flrst sermon that was ever delivered in New-Zealand,, added to the feelings Of mterest connected witb the engage ments of the day - " Circumstances detaining us about a week in tbe Bay of Islaiids, afforded rae the means of becoming raore fully actjuainted with tbe missionaries; of raaking ex cursions to different parts- of the adjacent count):y, and witnessing several of tbe singular raariners and custoras of tbe people. An unusual noise frora the .land aroused us eariy .on the morning of the 25th, and, on reaching' tbe deck, a nuraber of war-canoes were seen lying along the Shore, while crowds of natives on tbe beach were engaged in war-dances, shouting, and firing their rauskets -at fre quent intervals. On inquiry^ we found that on the day we had visited Waikadie a chief of Rangehoo^ad com raitted suicide by throwing himself frora a high rock into the sea. This event had brought tbe chiefs and warriors of the adjacent country to investigate the cause of his death, arraed and prepared ^for revenge in tbe event of his having been . raurdered, A council was held for sorae hours on the' beaoh, when the strangers, being satisfied as to the oause and mannerof the chiefs death, preparations for war Were discontinued,~-and the people, of Rangehoo repaired to tbeir flelds to procure potatoes for -their entertainment. It was Christmas- day, an4 about twelve o'clock we. went on shore to dine with ohe of the mission friratlies. In the afternoon 1 walked throngh tbe encarapraent of tbe strangers, wbich was spread along the seashore. -Their long, stately^ and in many instances beautifully carved canoes were drawn up on the pebbly beach, anid the chiefs and war riors were sitting in circles- at a smaU distance from them. Each pirty occupied the heach opposite their 262 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. canoes, whUe the slaves, or doraestics, at some distance further from tbe shore, were busied round their respect ive flres, preparing tbeir n^asters' food. Near his side each warrior'.s spear was. fixed in the ground, while his patupatu, a stone weapon, the tomahawk of the New- Zealander, was- hanging on his arm. Several chiefs had a large .iron 'hatchet, or'bill-hook, mucb resembUng those used by woodmen, or others in mending hedgesin England, These, vrtiich in their hands were rather ter rifying weapons, appeared to be "highly prized ,•- thev were kept clean and polished, and gerieraUy^fas'tene^. round the wrifet, by a hrajded cord ^of native flax. The patupatu was sometimes placed in the girdle; in^;he same manner as a Malay would Wear his knife or dagger, or a Turk his pistol. Tbe rtien were generaUy taU and well-formed, altogfi'tber such as it -might be-expect(?d the warriors of a savaganation would be, Severatof these fighting-men were not less than six feet high; their limbs were raasculair and firm, and their bodies stout, but not corpulent. The dress of the chiefs and warriors cbnsisted, in general, of a girdle ronnd the loins,, and a ' short cloak, or mantle, worn over the shoulders, and tied' -with cords of braided flax in front, ' The rank of the chief appeared to be soraetiraes indicated- by the number of his cloaks fastened, one upon the other ; that which was sraallest, but generally raost valuable, being worn onthe. outside : tbe whole reserabled in this respect tbe capes of a travelling-coat, , Their physiognomy, indicating any thing but weak ness or cowardice, often exhibited great determination. They wore no helmet, or other covering for the head. Their' black and shining hair soraetimes hung in ririglets on their Shoulders,, but^was frequently tied up on- the crown of tbeir heads, and usually ornaraerited by a tuft of waving feathers,- Tbeir dark eyes,. though not large, were ofteii fierce and penetrating ;- their prominent features in-general weU forraed ; but their whole coun tenance was much disfigured- by the practice of tattoo ing. Each chief had,- thus iraprinted on his- face tbe marks ahd involutions peetiUar to bis farhily or tribe; whUe the figures tattooed oft the faces ofhis' depend ants or retainers, though fewer in jiumber, were the same in foira as tho'se by which the chief was distin guished. Tbe actJorapanying representation of the head NEW-ZEALANDER. 263 and face of 'Honghi,* the celebrated New-Zealand war rior, who was among tbe party tbat. arrived this morning at the se_ttlement, will convey no inaccurate idea of the effect of this singular practice. ¦ The tattooing of the face of a New-Zealander, answering the purpose of the particular stripe or colour of the Highland.er's plaid, marks the clan, or tribe, to which he-, belongs. It is "considered -highly ornamental; and in addition to the distinguishing, lines, or curves, the intricacy and variety of the pattern thus perraanently fixed on the face con stitutes one principal distinction hetween the chiefs and coramon people, and Jt may be regarded as the crest, or coat-of-arms of the New-Zealand "aristocracy; Tattoo ing is said to be also employed as. a raeans of enabling them to distinguish their enemies. in battle.' In the present ins;tance, its "feffect on the countenance, where -*Ttie bust from -whicli, by the kindness of tlie secretary of the Churoh Missionary Socit^y, the draining of the abow ie taken, -was executed with gr«at fideUty from ,'Honghi during a viaitto Port Jacltson.'. 264 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHBfS. its marks are more thickly implanted, than in any other part of the body, was greatly augmented by a prepara tion of red ochre and oil, which had been liberally ap plied to the cheeks arid tbe forehead. Quantities df oU and ochre adhered to my clothes, from close contact with tbe natives, which I found it impossible toprevent ; but this was the only inco'nvenience I. experienced from my visit, ',',', -The warriors of. New-Zealarid delight in swaggering and bravado ; for while "my companion was talking with some of. Corokoro's party, one 6f them came up to me, Mid several times br'andisheji bis patupatu over ray head, as if intending to-atrifce, accompanying the action with the fiercest expressions of countenance, and the utterance of wOrds exceedingly harsh, though to me unintelhgible. After a few minutes he desisted; but when we walked Away he ran after us, -and, assuming the same aftitfide"and- gestures, accompanied us till we reached another circle, where he continued for a short time these exhibitions of his -skiH in terrifying, &c. When he ceased, he -inquired, rather significantly, if I was not afraid! I told hira I was unconscious of having offended him, and that,' notwithstanding his actions, I did not think he intended to injure riie. The New-Zea landers are fond of endeavouring to alarm strangers, and appear to derive mucb satisfaction in witnessing the indications of fear they are able to excite. A nuraber of tribes from different parts of the bay being now at Rathgghoo, the evening was devoted to public sports on the sea-beach, which most of the strangers attended. Several of 'their public (lances seemed iramoral in tbeir tendency; but in general they were distinguished by the violent "gestures and deafen ing vo'ciferations of the "perfiot-mers. No part of the sports; however, £^ppeared so ihteresting to the natives as a sham-fight, in which the warriors- wore their full dresses, bore their usual weapons,^ and Went through the different moveraents of actual eijg^igement. Shungee, or, according to the modern orthography of the missionaries, 'Horighi, with his numerous depend ants and tflUes, formed one party, and were ranged pn the western side of the beaqh, Weiow the missionaries' dwelling. The chief vpore several mats, or short cloaks, of various sizes and texture, exquisitely" manufactured of the native flax, orie of thera ornaraerited witb small NEW-ZEALAND. 265 shreds of dog's skin, with the hair adhering to it ; tbese were fastened round his neclc, while in his girdle he wore a patupatu, and carried a rausket in his band. His party were generally armed with clubs, and spears nine or ten feet long. , Their antagonists were ranged on the opposite side of the beach. At a signal given they ran violently towards each other, halted, and then, amid shouts and clamour, rushed into each other's ranks, some brand ishing their clubs, others thrusting their spears, whicb were eitber parried or carefully avoided by the opposite party. Several were at length thrown down, sorae prisoners taken, and ultimately both parties retreated to a distance, whence they renewed the corabat. As tbe day closed, tbese sports were discontinued, and the combatants and spectators retired to their respective encampraents. Having filled our water-casks, increased our supply of provender for the cattle and sheep I bad on boartl, procured a nuraber of logs of timber towards the erec tion of our future dweUing, and having spent a week very pleasantly with our raissionary brethren, we took leave of thera, grateful for the assistance of their influ ence witb the natives, and fhe kindness and hospitaUty we had experienced at their hands. To the eye of a missionary New-Zealand is an inter esting country, inhabited by a people of no ordinary powers, could they be brought under the influence of right principles. By tbe Christian philanthropists of Britain, who are desirous, not only to spread the light of revelation and Christian instruction among the igno rant at horae, but are also making noble efforts to send its blessings to the remotest nations of tbe earth, it has not been overlooked. In 1814 the Church Missionary Society sent their missionaries to New-Zealand, and, under the direction and guardianship of the Rev. S. Marsden, the steady patron of the New-Zealand mission, established their first settlement at Rangehoo, in the Bay of Islands. Considerable reinforcements have been sent, and three other stations formed. Since that period the Wesleyan missionaries commenced tbeir labours near Wangaroa, The missionaries and their assistants, who have la boured at these stations ever since their coraraence ment, bave not only steadily and dUigently applied to Vol, III,— M 266 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the Btudy of tbe language, whicb is a dialect of thaf spoken in aU the eastern portion of the Pacific, estab Ushed schools for the instruction of the natives, and endeavoured to unfold to them the great truths of reve lation, but haye from the beginning, by the estabUsh ment of forges for working iron, saw-pits, carpenters' shops, &c., laboured to introduce among the natives habits of industry, a taste for the mechanic arts, and a desire to foUow the peaceful occupations of husbandry ; thereby aiming to promote their advancement in civili zation, and improve their present condition, while they were pursuing the more important objects of their mission. Success, indeed, has not been according to their desires, but it has not been altogether withheld; the general cbaracter of tbe people, 'in tbe neighbourhood of the settleraents, is improved, pleasing instances of piety among tbe natives tiave been afforded ; a number have been baptized, and the missionaries are enabled to continue their exertions under circumstances whicb are daily assuraing a more pleasing aspect. We rejoice to know, that the report of the change which Chris tianity has effected in the Georgian Islands appears to have exerted a favourable influence here. This has been raanifested on several occasions. The following is one of tbe raost recent instances. Writing under date of May 32, 1829, the Rev, W WUliams, one of the missionaries of the Church Mis sionary Society, in describing a visit made in company with Mr, Davies, to Kauakaua, observes, " In the even ing we were much interested by an account given by a chief, who has lately visitedi Tahiti, He simply conflrmed the testimony given by others before, that the natives of that island have undergone a very great change, I asked if they never fought now, " Fight !" said he, "they are all becorae missionaries," The natives who hstened to him said they should like to go there, and live at Tahiti, but that their own island would never leave off its present customs,'* It was a favourable circumstance attending tbe change tbat has taken place both in the Society and Sandwich Islands, that each island had its chief; and that in some instances several adjacent islands were * Missionary Record, Oct. 1830. NEW-ZEALAND. 367 under the government of a principal chief or king, •ftrhose authority was supreme, and whose influence in uniting the people under one bead predisposed them, as a nation, to receive tbe instructions imparted by individuals countenanced and protected by their chief or king. Persons of the highest authority not only patronised the raissionaries, but frequently added to tbeir instructions, their commendation, and the in fluence of their own example in baving already received thera. In New-Zealand there is no king over the whole, or even over one of the larger islands. The people are generaUy governed by a number of chieftains, each indeed a king over his narrow territory, A desire to enlarge tbeir territory, augraent tbeir property, increase tbeir power, or satisfy revenge, leads to frequent and destructive wars, strengthens jealousy, and cherishes treachery, keeps thera without any common bond of union, and prevents any deep or extensive irapression being raade upon them as a people. This necessarily circumscribes tbe influence of the raissionaries, 'and is, in a great degree, the cause which led the Wesleyan missionaries for a tirae to suspend altogether their efforts, and wbicb has recently so painfully disturbed those of their brethren in connexion witb the Church Missionary Society, Tbe labours of the mechanic and the artisan are valuable accompaniments to those of the raissionary ; but Christianity raust precede civilization. Little hope is to be entertained of" tbe natives following to any extent the useful arts, cultivating habits of industry, or realizing tbe enjoyments of social and domestic life, until tbey are brought under tbe influence of those prin ciples inculcated in tbe Word of God, And notwith standing tbe discourageraents to be encountered, this happy result should be steadily and confldently antici pated by tbose engaged on the spot, as well as by their friends at home. Their prospect of success is daily becoming more encouraging, Tbey have not yet laboured in hope so long as their predecessors did in the South Sea islands ; where nearly flfteen years elapsed before they knew of one true convert. The recoUection of tbis circumstance is adapted to inspire tbose eraployed in New-Zealand witb courage, and stimulate to perseverance, as tbere is every reason to M8 268 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. conclude, that when the New-Zcalanders shall, by the blessing of God, become a Christian people, they will assume and maintain no secondary rank among the nations of the Pacific, CHAPTER XIIL Situation, extent, and produutions of Rapa— Singularity of its structure- Appearance ofthe inhabitants — ^Violent proceedings on board— Remarkable interposition of Providence- Visit pf some natives to Tahiti—Introduction of Christianity into Rapa— Raivavai ; Accounts of its inhabitants- Visit of Capt. Henry— Establishment of a native mission— Fatal ravages of a contagious diaeaee- Toboai ; Notice of the mutineers of the Bounty- Origin of the inhabitants— Prevention of war— Establishment of salutary laws— Rimatara; Productions— Circumstances ofthe mhabitants— Abo lition of idolatry^General improvement— Ri'rutu ; Geological character- Population— Auura— His voyage to Maurua— Return to his native island — Destruction ofthe idols^Visit to Rurutu— Advancement ofthe people in knowledge, industry, and comfort — Unjust conduct of visiters— Treatment of the shipwrecked by the natives— Progress of Christianity. About seven degrees nearer the equator than New- Zealand, and thirty-six ferther to th^ eastward, the lofty and many-peaked island of Rapa is situated. The first account of this island is given by Vancouver, who dis covered it in his passage from New-Zealand to Tahiti, on the 22d of December, 1791.* According to the observation made at the time, it was found to be situated in lat. 27° 36', S, and long. 144° 11' W. The moun tains are craggy and picturesque, and the summits of those forming the hi^h land in the centre singularly broken, so as to resemble, in no small degree, a range of irregularly inclined cones, or cylindrical columns, which their discoverer supposed to be towers, or for tifications, manned with natives. * The mingled emotions of astonishment and fear with wliich the natives regarded every thing on board Vancouver's ship prevented their replying very distinctly to the queries he proposed ; and he observes, " Their answers to almost every question were in tbe affirmative, and our inquiries as to the namex)f their island, &c. were continually interrupted by incessant iruyita- tions to go on shore. At length I had reason to believe '^he name of the island was Oparo, und that of their chief Korte. Although I cnuld not positively state that their names wei'e correctly ascertained, yet, as there was a proba bility of their being sb, I distinguished the island by the name of Oparo, until tt might be found more property entitled to another." The expUcit declara tions of the natives, made under mor»- favourable circumstances, have now determined JRopa to be the proper name of this inland. RAFA. 269 It is the farthest from the equator of a number of scattered islands, wbich lie to the south of the Tonga, Navigators', and Society Islands, and are designated by Malte Brun the Austral Islands.* Rapa is about twenty railes in circumference, is tolerably well wooded and watered, especially on the eastern side. The taro, or arum, is the raost valuable article of food the natives possess, and, with the fish taken on their coast, forms their chief subsistence. The bread-fruit, mountain plantain, banana, cocoanut, and fruits, have been brought from Tahiti, but they do not appear to thrive. Tbe eastern coasts appear the most fertile. On tbis side of the island the fine harbour of Aural is situated. The entrance is intricate, but tbe interior capacious, extending several miles inland. Tbe landing on the beach is good, and fresh water con venient. In person the inhabitants resemble those of Tahiti more than the New-Zealanders, though their language bears the greater affinity to that of tbe latter. Van couver, judging from those he saw around bis ship, estimated their nuraber at 1500. Mr. Davis, who visited thera in 1826, supposed tbe population to araount to about 2000 ; but Messrs. Sirapson and Pritchard^ in April, 1829, found that an epideraic had reduced their numbers, and did not think there were above 500. The island is divided into several districts, and is governed by one supreme ruler, or king, and a n^imber of subor dinate chiefs. The narae of the present chief is Tereau. Fortifications crown the summits of many of their hiUs ; tbese are so constructed as to render thera impregnable by any means which the assail ants could bring against the besieged. Wars have not been frequent among them, and when they have existed, have been less sanguinary than those araong the islands to' the northward. Their systera of religion was exceedingly rude, and reserabled, in some respects, that whicb prevailed in Tahiti, though the names of their gods were different. Tbe principal idol was called Paparua ; it was formed of cocoanut-husk, curiously braided, and shaped into a kind of cyhnder, full in the centre, and sraaller at the * System of Geography, vol. il, p. 647. 270 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. ends, and was not more than two or three inches long. To the favour of this god they sought for victory in war, recovery from sickness, and abundance of turtle.* Poere was another of their gods; it was of stone, twelve or fifteen inches in length. It was fixed in the ground, and invoked on the launching of a canoe, and the opening of a newly-built house ; and on its will the supply of water in the springs was supposed to depend. The favour of the gods was propitiated by prayers, offerings, and sacrifices ; human victims were not in cluded among the latter, which principally consisted of fish. On my voyage from New-Zealand to Tahiti, we made this island on the 26th of January, 1817. The higher parts of tbe mountains seemed barren, but tbe lower hills, with raany of the valleys and the shores, were covered with verdure, and enriched with trees and bushes. The island did not appear to be surrounded by a reef, and, consequently, but little low land was seen. . The waves of the ocean dashed against tbe base of those mountains which, extending to the sea, divided the valleys tbat opened upon the western shore. As we were not far from the island when the sun withdrew his light, we lay off and on through the night, and at daybreak the next morning found ourselves at some distance from the shore. We sailed towards the island till about 10 A. M..; when, being within two miles of the ber.ch, the head of our vessel was turned to the north, and we moved slowly along in a direction parallel with the coast. We soon beheld several canoes put off from the land, and not less than thirty were afterward seen paddling around us. There were nei ther feraales nor children in any of them. The raen were not tattooed, and wore only a girdle of yellow ti leaves round their, waists. Their bodies, neither spare nor corpulent, were finely shaped ; their complexion a dark copper colour ; their features regularly formed ; and their countenances, often handsome, were shaded by long black straight or curling hair. Notwithstand ing all our endeavours to induce them to approach the siiip, they continued for a long tirae at some distance, isiewing us with apparent suspicion and surprise. At * Miasionary Chronicle, yoI. iv. p. W'S. RAPA. 271 length one of the canoes, containing two men and a boy, ventured alongside. Perceiving a lobster lying among a number of spears at the bottora of the canoe, I intiraated, by signs, ray wish to have it, and the chief readily banded it up. I gave bim, in return, two or three raiddle-sized fish-hooks ; which, after exaraining rather curiously, he gave to tbe boy, who, being desti tute of any pocket, or even article of dress on wbich be could fasten tbem, instantly deposited thera in his mouth, and continued to bold witb both hands the rope hanging from our ship. Tbe principal person in the canoe appearing wiUing to corae on board, I pointed to the rope he was grasping, and put out ray hand to assist hira up the ship's side. He involuntarily laid hold of it, but could scarcely bave felt ray hand grasping bis, when be instantly drew it back, and raising it to bis nostrils, sraelt at it raost significantly. After a few moments' pause be climbed over the ship's side. As soon as he had reached the deck, our captain led bim to a chair on the quarter-deck, and pointing to tbe seat, signified his wish tbat be should be seated. The chief however, having viewed it for some time, pushed it aside, and sat down on the planks. Our captain bad been desirous to have the chief on board, that he might ascertain from him whether the island produced sandal wood, as he was bound to the Marquesas in search of tbat article. A piece was therefore procured and shown to bim, with the qualities of which he appeared farailiar : for, after smelbng it, he called it by some name, and pointed to tbe shore. While we bad been thus engaged, many of the canoes bad, unperceived by us, approached the ship ; and wben we turned round, a nuraber of the natives appeared on deck, and others wer€ clirabing over the bulwarks. Tbey were the most savage-looking natives I have ever seen, and their be haviour was as unceremonious as their appearance was uninviting. Vancouver found them unusually shy at first, but afterward reraarkably bold, and exceedingly anxious to possess every article of iron they saw; althougb his ship was surrounded by not fewer than three hundred natives, there were neither young chil dren, women, nor aged persons in any of their canoes. A gigantic, fierce-looking fellow, wbo bad boarded us, seized a youth standing by tbe gangway, and en deavoured to lift bim from the deck ; but the lad, strug- 273 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. gling, esca'ped from his grasp. He then seized our cabin-boy, but tbe sailors coraing to his assistance, and the native finding he could not disengage hira from their hold, pulled bis woollen shirt over bis bead and was pre paring to leap out of the ship wben he was arrested by the sailors. Wc had a large ship-dog chained to his kennel on tbe deck, and although this anirnal was not only fearless but savage, yet the appearance of the natives seeraed to terrify him. One of thera caught the dog in his arms and was proceeding over the ship's side with bim, but perceiving hira fastened to the ken nel by his chain, he was obliged to relinquish his prize, evidently disappointed. He then seized tbe kennel with the dog in it ; when, finding it nailed to the deck, he ceased his atterapts to remove it, and gazed round the ship in search of some object less secure. We had brought from Port Jackson two young kittens ; one of these now carae up from the cabin, but she no sooner made her appearance on the deck than a native, spring ing like a tiger upon its prey, caught up the unconscious animal and instantly leaped over the ship's side into the sea. Hastening to the side of the deck, I looked over the bulwarks and beheld bim swiraming rapidly towards a canoe lying about fifty yards frora the ship. As soon as he had reached the canoe, holding the cat with both hands and elevating these above his head, he exhibited her to bis corapanions with evident exultation ; while in every direction tbe natives were seen paddling their canoes towards bim to gaze upon the strange creature he bad brought from the vessel. When our captain beheld tbe thief thus exhibiting' bis prize, he seized his musket, and was- in the act of levelling it at the of fender, when I arrested his arm, and assured hira I had no doubt the little aniraal would be preserved and well treated. Orders were now given to clear tbe ship. A general scuffle ensued between the islanders and the searaen, in. whicb many of the former were driven head long into the sea, where they seemed as much at horae as on solid ground, while others clambered over the vessel's side into their canoes. In the raidst of the con fusion and the retreat of the natives, the dog, which bad hitherto slunk into his kennel, recovered his usual bold ness, and not only increased the consternation by bis barking, but severely tore the leg of one of the fugitives wbo was hastening out of the ship near the spot ta RAPA. 273 which he was chained. The decks were now cleared ; but as many of tbe people still bung upon the shrouds and about the chains, the sailors drew the long knives with wbich, when among the islands, tbey were fur nished, and by raenacing gestures, without wounding any, succeeded in detaching the natives frora tbe ves sel. Some of them seemed quite unconscious of the keenness of the knife, and", I believe, bad their hands deeply cut by snatching or grasping at the blade. A proposal was now made to entice or admit some on board, and take two of tbem to Tahiti, that the raissiona ries there might become acquainted with their language, gain a knowledge of the productions of their island, impart unto thera Christian instruction, and thus pre pare the way for the introduction of Christianity among their countrymen, as well as open a channel for com mercial intercourse. Our captain offered to bring them to their native island again on bis return from the Mar quesas ; and, could their consent have been by any means obtained, 1 sbould, without hesitation, have ac ceded to the plan ; but as we had no raeans of effbcting this object, I did not conceive it right to take thera from their native island by force. On a former voyage, about two years before this pe riod. Captain Powel had been becalmed near the shores of this island. Many of the natives came off in their canoes, but did not venture on board; perceiving, however, a hawser hanging out of the stern of the ship, about flfty of them leaped into tbe sea, and, grasping tbe rope witb one band, began swiraming with the other, labouring and shouting with all their might as they sup posed they were drawing the vessel towards the shore. Their claraour attracted the attention of the seamen, and it was found no easy raatter, even when all hands were employed, to draw in the rope. While the greater part of the crew were thus engaged, a searaan leaning over the stern with a cutlass in his hand so terrified the natives, that, as they were drawn near tlie vessel they quitted their hold, and by this means the hawser was secured. A breeze shortly after springing up, tbey steered away, happy to escape from tbe savages by whom they had been surrounded. On the present occasion we experienced a signal de liverance, wbich, though it did not at the time appear very remarkable, afterward powerfully affected our M3 274 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. minds. As soon as the vessel was cleared of the: natives, and the wind was wafting us from their shor^es, I went down to the cabin, where Mrs. EUis and the nurse had been sitting ever since their first, approach to the ship ; and when I saw our little daughter, only four mortths old, sleeping securely in her berth, I was deeply impressed with the providence of God in the preserva tion of the chUd. During the forenoon the infant had been playing unconsciously in her nurse's lap upon the quarter-deck, under the awning which was usuaUy spread in fine weather, and she had but recently taken her to the cabin when the natives carae on bpard. Had tbe child been on deck, and bad my attention been for a moment diverted, even though I had been standing by the side of the nurse, there is every reason to believe that the raotives which induced them to seize the boys on the deck, gnd even the dog in bis kennel, would have prompted them to grasp the child in ber nurse's lap or arms, andto leap with her into the sea before we could have been aware of their design.. Had this been the case it is impossible to say what the result would have. been; bloodshed might have foUowed, and we might have been obliged to depart from the island leaving our child in their hands. Prom the crude food with which they would have fed ber, it is probable she would have. died; but from my subsequent acquaintance witb the natives of the South Sea islands, I do not think tbat during her infancy tbey would have treated her unkindly. As it was, we felt grateful for the kind Providence whicb bad secured us from aU the distressing circumstances which raust necessarily have attended such an event. These brief facts wiU be sufficient to show soraewhat of the character of the natives of Rapa in 1791 and 1817. They continued in tbis state untU within the last five or six years, during which a considerable change has taken place. Towards tbe, close of the summer of 1825, a cutter belonging to Tati, a chief of Tahiti, on a voyage to the Paumotus, or pearl islands, visited Rapa, and brought two of its inhabitants to Tahiti. On their first arrival, they were under evident feeUngs of apprehension ; but the kindness of Mr. Davies, thft raissionary, and the natives of Papara, reraoved their suspicions, and in spired thera with confidence. They were both deUghted and astonished in viewing tbe strange objects presented RAPA. 275 to their notice. The European families, the houses, tbe gardens, the cattlo, and other animals, which they saw at Tahiti, filled thera with wonder. They also attended tbe schools and places of public worship, and learned the alphabet. Soon after their arrival, the cutter sailed again for their island, and the two natives of Rapa returned to their countryraen, loaded with presents frora their new friends, and accompanied by two Tahitians, who were sent to gain raore accurate information rela tive to their country, and tbe disposition of its inhabit ants. When the vessel approached their island, and the people saw their countrymen, they appeared highly delighted ; and towards the evening, when, accorapanied by tbe two Tahitians, they drew near the beach in the ship's boat, the inhabitants carae out into tbe sea to meet them, and carried the raen and the boat all together to the shore. This to the strangers was rather an unex pected reception ; but, though singular, it was not un friendly, for tbey were treated witb kindness. The accounts the natives gave their countrymen, of wbat tbey had seen in Tahiti, were marvellous to thera : tbe captain of the cutter procured sorae tons of sandal wood ; and when he left, the Tahitians returned, having received an invitation from the chiefs and people to revisit their island, and reside permanently among tbem ; a request so congenial to their own feelings that they at once proraised to comply. In the month of January, 1826, two Tahitian teachers and their wives, accompanied by two others, one a schoolraaster, and the other a raechanic, sailed from Tahiti for Rapa. They carried with tbem, not only spelling-books, and copies bf the Tahitian translations of tbe Scriptures, but also a variety of useful tools, im plements of husbandry, valuable seeds and plants, to gether with timber for a chapel, and doors, &c. for the teachers' houses. They were conducted to their new station by Mr. Davies, one of the senior raissionaries at Tahiti, who was pleased with bis visit, and, upon the whole, with the disposition of the people, although sorae appeared remarkably superstitious, and, as might be ex pected, unwiUing to embrace Christianity. This arose from an apprehension of the anger of their gods, in duced by the eflfects of a raost destructive disease, with wbich tbey bad been recently visited. The gods, they imagined, bad thus punished tbem for tbeir attention to 276> POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. the accounts from Tahiti. The teachers, however, landed their goods, and tbe frame-work of the chapel. The chiefs received them with every mark of respect and hospitality, pointed out an eligible spot for their residence, gave thera sorae adjacent plantations of taro, and proraised them protection and aid. The Sabbath which Mr. Davies spent tbere was prob ably the first ever religiously observed on the shores of Rapa. Several' of the natives attended pubUc worship, and appeared impressed with the services. These being performed in the Tahitian language, were not un intelligible to them. The native teachers were members of the church at Papara ; and as they were but few in nuraber, and were surrounded by a heathen population in a remote and soUtary island, it being then expected the vessel would sail on that or the following day, they joined with Mr. Davies their pastor in commemorating the death of Christ, under the impression that it was tbe last time they should ever unite in this hallowed. ordinance. Situated sorae degrees from the southern tropic, the climate is bracing and salubrious, tbe soil is fertile, and while it nourishes many-of the valuable roots and fruits ofthe intertropical regions, is probably not less adapted to the more useful productions of temperate climes. Mr. Davies estimates the population at about two thou sand. Vancouver supposed tbat Rapa contained not less than fifteen hundred, merely from those he saw round bis ship. In their language, coftiplexion, general character, and superstitions, tbey resemble the other islanders of the Pacific, though less civilized in their manners, raore rude in their arts, and possessed of fewer coraforts than raost of their northern neighbours were when first discovered. Their intercourse with Tahiti has not only increased their knowledge, and their sources of teraporal enjoyment, but has been the means of.in- troducing Christianity among them, and raising many to the participation of its "spiritual blessings." In 1829, Messrs. Pritchard and Simpson found that four chapels bad been erected in different stations, at whieh, by native missionaries, religious instruction was statedly iraparted. The inhabitants manifested a pleasing atten tion during public service, and their advanceraent in knowledge exceeded tbe expectations of their visiters. A fresh avenue is bere opened for European com- RAIVAVAI. 277 merce, and valuable information is likely to result from tbe visit of tbe teacher to this solitary abode. The English raissionary frora Tahiti was the first foreigner that ever landed on their coasts ; but many years be fore his arrival an inhabitant of some otber island, tbe only survivor of the party with whora he saUed frora his native shores, had been by terapestuous weather drifted to the island, and was found there by the native teachers who first went frora Tahiti. His name was Mapuagua, and that of his country Manganeva,* which he stated was much larger than Rapa, and situated in a south-east erly direction. The people he described as numerous, and much tattooed ; the narae of one of their gods the sarae as tbat of one formerly worshipped by the Tahi tians. An old raan wbo resided at the sarae place witb tbe stranger gave Mr. Davies the name of eleven places, either districts of Manganeva, or adjacent islands, which are unknown to the Tahitians. The inforraation thus obtained will be valuable in the search for those islands, which has already been commenced ; and if no sources of wealth be found, nor iraportant channels of com merce opened, their discovery will increase our geo graphical knowledge, and extend tbe range of benevo lent operation. Rapa forms the southern extreraity of that part of Polynesia wbich Malte Brun has designated the AUSTRAL ISLANDS. Raivavai, or High Island, Is one of the most important of these islands, and is situated about six degrees to the north-west of Rapa. It was discovered by Lieut. Broughton, in the Chatham, on the 2d of Deceraber, 1791, who gives its situation as 33° 42' S. lat. and U7° 41' W. long. Its high and broken mountains may be seen in clear weather at tbe distance of fifty miles. Around the sterU centre mountains tbere is a considerable portion of low land. Tbe island -is scarcely twenty railes in circumference. Tbe har- * Tbe islands wbich bear the nearest resemblance to the description here given, ave situated in lat. 23" 12' S. and long. 135» W. They are lotty, verdant, and populous, and were discovered on the 24th of May, 1797, by Cap tain Wilson, hi the Duff; by whom, in honour of Admiral Lord Gambier, ihey were called Gambler's ialmiiB.— Missionary Yayage, p. 116. 278 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. bour is open and insecure; but, being on the westem side, it is sheltered from the prevaUing winds. A few years ago the inhabitants araounted to about 2000 ; but tbe ravages of a fearful epideraic, in the year 1829, re duced thera, it is said, to about 800. , They resemble the South Sea islanders in many of their usages, but appear to have been less cruel, and, in some respects, more ingenious. Tbeir carving is superior to any found amonr their more civilized neigbbours. Infanticide was un known among them, and we have no evidence that they offered huraan sacrifices, though strongly addicted to idolatry. Their teraples were extensive, some ofwhich, with their appendages, though forsaken by their wor shippers, stiU remain entire. One of tbem contains upwards of twenty large stone idols. The temples, fur niture, number,' size, and raaterials of wbich their gods are made manifest the former zeal and devotedness of the people in the service of tbeir idols. In 1819 Pomare visited Raivavai in an American sbip. The inhabitants tendered bim their horaage, and sought his protection. On his departure, be left a man, called Para, as a kind of political agent among them, who also endeavoured to teach sorae of the natives to read. In the raonth of January, 1821, Captain Henry, com manding a vessel belonging to Pomare II., touched at this island. He raade it on the Sabbath-day,, and, on landing, found tbe inhabitants about to assemble in tbeir place of worship. This building was 117 feet by 27. His arrival prevented for a short tirae their coramencing the public service ; but the scene which was afterward presented is described in a letter Captain Henry wrote to us on reaching Tahiti, as " affecting and dehghtful." Eight hundred and forty-eight persons attended ; seven hundred of whom entered the place, the remainder con tinuing round the doors. " Each individual, on entering the church, kneeled down and uttered a short prayer." In reference to' tbeir deportment. Captain Henry ob serves, "The very quiet, devout, and orderly raanner in whicb they conducted themselves, not only in church, but during the Sabbath, excited my highest admiration." Tbe open renunciation of idolatry, and the general profession of Christianity, were effected at a pubUc festival whicb occurred about four months prior to Capt. Henry's visit, AU the inhabitants, with the exception of about twenty-five persons, had declared themselves: RAIVAVAI. 279 desirous of Christian instruction, and every one in the island had renounced idolatry. Most of their former objects of worship were removed from the temples, and sorae of those mutUated stone flgures were actuaUy converted into seats, or benches, at the doors of the building erected for Christian worship. Tbe knowledge of the individual left by Pomare was very limited ; his behaviour also was iramoral ; and the natives had saga city enough to perceive that bis conduct did not accord with what he taught thera Christianity required ; con sequently they refused to pay rauch attention to his instructions, but requested that proper teachers might be sent to thera. In 1822 suitable teachers from Eimeo were stationed in this island j these have shown the utraost diligence and fldelity in promoting the temporal and spiritual improvement of the people. In January, 1825, when visited by Messrs. Tyerraan, Bennet, and Henry, two large places bad been erected for publie worship ; at the opening of one of thera 1300 persons were present.* At the same tirae baptism was admin istered to fifty-two adults aud sixty chUdren. In the latter part of the sarae year I visited Raivavai. The singular, broken, and romantic shape of the raountains gave universal interest to the scenery ; the natives were numerous, and, though uncivilized, their behaviour was neither barbarous nor repulsive. They were anxious to entertain us with hospitality and kindness, and reatUly conducted rae to whatever was interesting in the neigh bourhood. Their idols were of stone, which appeared a kind of cellular lava, of a light ferruginous colour. They were generaUy rudely carved iraitations of the human figure. Tbe people appeared ingenious, patient, and industrious ; and the carving of tbeir paddles, bowls, and other doraestic utensils, in the taste displayed in its devices, and tbe skUl of its execution, surpassed any thing ofthe kind I have seen in the Pacific. The teachers, Horoinuu, Ahuriro, and Tobi, gave rae a very favourable account of their attention to in struction. In 1829, when they were last visited, it was found that a contagious epidemic, a kind of malignant fever, had destroyed a great portion of the inhabitants. Tbis disease was originally brought from "Tubuai, and, for a considerable time after it appeared, from ten ta ^ Missionary Ciironicle, No. 54, p. 165^ 280 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. fifteen deaths occurred daily. If a healthy person came in contact with the body or clothes of one diseased, the malady was generally coraraunicated. During the first stages of the progress of the disease, whole faraiUes, from attending the sick, were siraultaneously attacked with tbe dreadful complaint, and often buried in one comraon grave. Tbe visiters observe, " Never have we witnessed a more melancholy spectacle ; houses are left without inhabitants, land without owners, and that which was formerly cultivated has now become deso late." In 1826 Mr. Davies organized a Christian society, or church, among tbis people, when sixteen persons were, after due examination, united in Christian fellowship with the teachers of Eimeo wbo were residing among them.* Of these twelve bave died ; to the survivors forty-six were added during tbe time Messrs. Pritchard and Simpson reraained with tbem, in 1829. Tubuai. This island is seventeen miles nearer the equator tban Raivavai, and about two degrees farther to the west ward. It is situated in lat. 23° 25' S., and long. 149° 23' W., and is not more than twelve miles in circum ference. Tubuai was discovered by Cook in 1777 ; and, after the mutineers in the Bounty had taken possession of the -vessel, and committed to the mercy of the waves Captain Bligh, witb eighteen of his officers and men, this was the flrst island they visited. Hence they sailed to Tahiti, brought away tbe most serviceable of the live stock left there by forraer navigators, and in 1789 at terapted a settlement here. Misunderstandings between the mutineers and the natives, and the unbridled passions of the forraer, led to acts of violence, which the latter resented. A murderous battle ensued, in which nothing but superior skiU and firearms, together with the advan tages of a rising-ground, saved the mutineers from de struction. Two were wounded, and numbers of the natives slain. This led them to abandon the island : and after revisiting Tahiti, and leaving a part of their number there, they made tbeir final settlement in Pit- * Missionary Report, 1827, p. 29. tubuai. 281 cairn's Island. Their attempt to settle in Tubuai is celebrated in a poem by the late Lord Byron, called "Tbe Island, or Christian and bis Companions," in wbich are recorded sorae affecting circurastances con nected with the subsequent Uves and ultiraate apprehen sion of many of these unhappy men, and several facts relative to the Society and Friendly Islands. Tubuai was also the first of the South Sea islands that gladdened the sight of the missionaries wbo sailed in the Duff. Tbey saw the land on the morning of tbe 22d of February, 1797, near thirty miles distant ; and as the wind was unfavourable, the darkness of night hid the island frora their view before tbey were near enough distinctly to behold its scenery or inhabitants. I can enter in sorae degree into their emotions on this un usually interesting day. AU that bope had anticipated in its brightest moraents was no longer to be raatter of uncertainty, but was to be realized or rejected. Such feeUngs I have experienced, and can readily believe theirs were of the sarae order as those of which 1 was con scious when gazing on the first of the isles of the Pacific that we approached. Theirs were probably raore in tense than mine, as a degree of adventurous enterprise was then thrown around missionary efforts -iyhich has vanished with their novelty. Our information, also, is more circumstantial and expUcit than theirs could pos sibly have been. Tubuai is stated in the Introduction to the Voyage of the Duflf to have been at that tirae but recently peopled by sorae natives of an island to the westward, probably Riraatara, who, when sailing to a spot they were accus toraed to visit, were driven by strong and unfavourable winds on Tubuai. A few years after this, a canoe sail ing frora Raiatea to Tahiti, conveying a chief who was ancestor to Idia, Pomare's mother, was also drifted upon this island, and the chief admitted to the supreme au thority ; a third canoe was afterward wafted upon the shores of Tubuai, containing only a human skeleton, which a native of Tahiti, who accompanied the muti neers, supposed belonged to a man he bad kiUed in a battle at sea. The scantiness of the population favoured the opinion that the present race bad, but recently be corae inhabitants of this abode; and the subsequent visits of missionaries from Tahiti, witb the residence of native teachers among the people, have furnished addi- 282 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. tional fevidence that the present Tubuaian population is but of raodern origin, compared with tbat inhabiting the island of Raivavai on the east, or Rurutu and Rimatara on the west. In 1817 I touched at Tubuai. Tbe island is compact, hiUy, and verdant ; many of the hills appeared brown and sunburnt, while others were partially wooded. At a distance it appears like two distinct islands ; but on a nearer approach tbe high land is found to be united. It is less picturesque than Rapa, but is surrounded by a reef of coral, which protects the low land frora tbe vio lence of the sea. As we approached this natural safe- gnard to the level shore, which is perhaps raore exten sive than the level land in any otber island of equal size, a number of natives came out to meet us. Tbeir canoes, resembling those of Rapa, were generally sixteen or twenty feet long ; tbe lower part being hoUowed out of the trunk of a tree, and tbe sides, stem, and stern formed by pieces of thin plank sewed together with cinet or cord, and adorned with shells. The stem projected nearly horizontally, but, the stem, being considerablyi elevated, extended obliquely frora the seat occupied by the steersraan. The sterns were ornamented with rude carving, and, together with the sides, painted with a kind of red ochre, while the seams were covered with the feathers of aquatic birds. A tabu had been recently laid on the island by the priests, wbich they had sup posed would prevent the arrival of any vessel, and they virere consequently rather disconcerted by our approach. Among the natives wbo came on board \yas a remark ably fine,.taU, well-made man, who appeared, from the respect paid hira by the others, to be a chief. His body was but partially tattooed, his only dress was a girdle, or broad bandage round bis loins, and his glossy, black, and curling hair was tied in a bunch on the crown of his head, while its extremities bung in ringlets on his shoulders. His disposition appeared mild and friendly. His endeavours to induce us to land were unremitted until nearly sunset ; when, finding them unavailing, and receiving from the captain an assurance that he would keep near the island till tbe morrow, he expressed a wish to reraain on board, although considerably affected by tbe raotion of the vessel. The next morning we stood in close to the reefs, and a party from tbe ship accompanied the chief to the TUBUAI. 283 shore : the population appeared but sraall ; the people were friendly, and readily bartered fowls, taro, and mountain-plantains for articles of cutlery and fishhooks. Tbeir gardens were unfenced, and the few pigs they bad were kept in holes, or wide pits, four or five feet deep, and fed with bread-fruit and other vegetables. Only one was brought on board, and tbis was readily pur chased. Many of the natives, in addition to the com mon bandage encircling their bodies, and a Ught cloth overtheir shoulders, wore large folds of white or yellow cloth bound round their heads, in some degree resem bling a turban, whicb gave thera a reraarkably Asiatic appearance. They also wore necklaces of the nuts of the pandanus, the scent of which, though strong, is grateful to raost of the islanders of the Pacific. Tbey were at this tirae addicted to unjust and bar barous war, and soraetiraes failed to raanifest that hos pitality and afford tbat prote'ction to tbe voyagers from other countries which is generally shown by the inhab itants of other islands. On tbe day after our arri val, two or three natives of tbe Paumotus or Palliser Islands, which lie to the eastward of the Society Islands, carae on board our vessel, and asked the captain for a passage to Tahiti. He inquired tbeir business there. They said, that some weeks before they left Tahiti, whither tbey had been on a visit, to return to their native islands, but that contrary winds drifted tbeir ca noe out of its course, and tbey reached tbe island of Tubuai ; that shortly after their arrival, the natives of the island attacked thera, plundered thera of their prop erty, and broke their canoe ; that tbey wished to go to Tahiti and acquaint Poraare with their misfortune, pro cure another canoe, and prosecute their original voyage. Two Europeans, who were on the island at the time, reported that they were very peaceable in their beha viour ; that tbe natives of Tubuai had attacked the stran gers because they had tried to persuade thera to cast away tbeir idols, and bad told thera there was but one true God, viz. Jehovah. Our captain and some others who were present asked why they did not resist tbe attack— inquiring, at tbe sarae time, if they were averse to war ; knowing that their countrymen were continually engaged in most savage wars, and were also cannibals. Tbey said they had been taught to delight in war, and were not afraid of tbe natives of Tubuai ; that if they 284 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. had been heathens they sbould have fought them al once; but that theyhad been to Tahiti, and had era- braced tbe new reUgion, as they caUed Christianity— had heard that Jehovah comnlanded those.who worshipped Hira to do no raurder, and that Jesus Christ had directed his foUowers to love their enemies ; that they feared il would be displeasing to God, should they have killet: any of the Tubuaians, or even have indulged feelings of revenge towards them ; adding, that they would rather lose their canoe and their property than oflfend Jehovah, or disregard the directions of Jesus Christ. — Our captain gave them a passage. Pomare furnished tbem with a canoe.; they returned for their companions. and subsequently saUed to their native islands. These natives, in aU probabUity, had never heard the question as tb the lawfulness or unlawfulness of Chris tians engaging in war discussed, or even named ; but they had most likely been taught to commit to raemory the decalogue and our Lord's Serraon on the Mount, and hence resulted their noble forbearance at tbe island of Tubuai. Subsequently the Tubuaians heard raore ample details of the change that had taken place in the adjacent island of Rurutu, as weU as in the Society Islands— that the inhabitants had renounced their idolatry, and erected places for the worship of the true God — and determined to follow their example. In the month of^arch, 1822, they sent a deputation to Tahiti, requesting teachers and -books. The messengers, from Tubuai were kindly welcomed, and not only hospitably entertained by the Tahitian Christians, but led to their schools and places of public worship. Two native teachers were selected by the- church in Matavai, and publicly designated by the missionaries to instruct the natives of Tubuai. The churches in Tahiti, so far as their raeans admitted, fur nished them with a supply of articles most Ukely to be useful in their missionary station; and on the 13th of June, 1822, they embarked for the island of Tubuai. Mr. Nott, the senior missionary in Tahiti, embarked in the sarae vessel, for tbe purpose of preaching to the peo ple, and affording the native missionaries every assist ance in the commencement of their undertaking, ; Finding, on their arrival, the whole of tbe small popu lation of the island engaged in war, and on the eve of .a battle, Mr. Nott and his companions repaired to the TUBUAI. 285 encampment of Tamatoa, wbo was, by hereditary right, the king of the island, acquainted hira with the design of their visit, and recommended bim to return to his ordinary place of abode. Tbe king expressed his will ingness to accede to the proposal, provided bis rival, who was encaraped but a short distance frora hira, and whora he expected on the morrow to engage, would also suspend hostilities. Paofai, a chief who accorapa nied Mr. Nott, went to Tahuhuatama, the chief of the opposite party, witb a raessage to this effect. He was kindly received, his proposal agreed to, and a tirae ap pointed for tbe chiefs to raeet raidway between the hostile parties, and arrange the conditions of peace. On the sarae evening, or early tbe next raorning, the chieftains, with their adherents, probably not exceeding one bundred on either Side, quitted their encampments, wbicb were about a mile and a half or two miles apart, and proceeded to the appointed place of rendezvous. Wben they carae within fifty yards of each other, they heUted. The chiefs then left their respective bands, and raet raidway between them ; they were attended by the missionaries — and after several propositions had been raade by one party, and acceded to by the otber, peace was concluded. Tbe chiefs then erabraced each other ; and the warriors in each little array, wherein the nearest relations were probably arrayed against each other, per ceiving tbe reconciliation of their chiefs, dropped tbeir impleraents of war, and rushing into each other's arras, presented a scene of gratulation and joy, very different from the raurderous conflict in whicb they expected to bave been engaged. Tbey repaired in corapany to the residence of tbe principal chief, Where an entertainment was provided. Here the missionaries had a second in terview witb tbe chiefs, who welcomed thera to the island, and expressed their desires to be instructed con cerning the true God and tbe new religion, as they usu ally denominated Christianity. On the following raorning, the inhabitants of Tubuai were invited to attend public worship — wben Mr. Nott deUvered, in a new building erected for tbe purpose, the first Christian discourse to which tbey had ever listened. It was truly gratifying to behold those wbo had only the day before expected to bave been engaged in shed ding each Other's blood now mingled in one quiet and attentive assembly, ¦ where the warriors of rival chief- 286 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. tains might be seen sitting side by side, and Ustening tb the gospel of peace. Mr. Nott was unexpectedly detained several weeks at Tubuai; during tbis time be raade the tour of the island, conversed witb the people, and preached on every favourable occasion tbat occurred. The Queen Charlotte at length arrived; wben, baving introduced tbe native teachers to the chiefs and people, and recom mended thera to tbeir protection, Jie bade thera farewell, and prosecuted his voyage to High Island. The chiefs had desired tbat one teacher raight be left with each ; and, in order to raeet their wishes, two, Hapunia and Samuela, from the cburch at Papeete, were stationed by Mr. Nott in this island, one with each of tbe chiefs. Tbe native missionaries found the productions of Tu buai less various and abundant than those of Tahiti and tbe adjacent islands. Tbe habits of the natives were reraarkably indolent, and iniraical to health, especially the practice of dressing their bread-fruit, &c. only once in flve days. Against this the teachers invariably re monstrated, and presented to tbem, also, a better exam ple, by cooking for themselves fresh food every day. Since tbat time, a distressing epidemic bas, in common with raost of the islands, prevailed in Tubuai, and has swept off raany of tbe people. Nevertheless, the native teachers continue their labours, and the condition of the people is iraproved. In February, 1826, when Mr. Davies visited thera, tbe profession of Christianity was general ; thirty-eight adults and four children were bap tized. The chiefs and people were assisting the teach ers in building corafortable dwellings, and erecting a neat and substantial house for public worship. In 1829, wben they were visited, althougb the indus try of the inhabitants, and their advanceraent in civiliza tion were cheering, tbeir progress in learning was but sraaU, and the ignorance or stupidity of the children discouraging. Less attention was paid to the teachers than forraerly, and considerable disorder prevailed among tbe people, from tbe opposition of some to the laws transmitted by the king from Tahiti, and the want of promptitude and decision in those natives who were invested with authority. At a meeting of the people, whicb was held by the appointment of the principal chiefs, while Messrs. Pritchard and Simpson remained on the island, it was resolved, that two criminals, one RIMATARA. 287 guilty of murder, baving shot one of the magistrates, and another of treason, having devised a plot against the governraent, and raeditated tbe death of the Tahitian teachers, should be banished for life to an uninhabited island ;* and tbat others less culpable should beTiept in irons during tbe pleasure of the chiefs. Measures were also proposed, which were adapted to induce a better state of things among aU classes of the inhab itants. RiMATAKA. This island lies nearly three degrees westward of Tu buai, and sorae miles nearer the equator. It is about twenty railes in circumference — and though higher than any of the islands of coral forraation, its hills present but a sraall elevation. The soil is. fertile, and the low Icmd, surrounded by a natural safeguard or reef, is gene rally attached to tbe shore. Tbere is no harbour nor any opening in the reefs, excepting for a boat. Tbe hiUs are clothed with the trees and shrubs common to the neighbouring islands, whUe the valleys and level grounds yield the fruits and roots wbich are met with in Tahiti and the northern clusters. Riraatara, however, is prin cipaUy distinguished as the favourite resort of a beauti ful species of paroquet, which is so nuraerous as to occasion great annoyance tothe inhabitants by destroy ing tbeir fruit. These birds are small — ^but their plu mage, which is of red, green, and purple, is rich and briUiant. Tbe feathers of these little birds have ever been held in high estiraation among the inhabitants of the other islands, whither they have been conveyed as the most valuable articles of native coramerce. "The popu lation of this island is small, not rauch exceeding 300. The natives are weU forraed ; tbeir hair is straight or curled, and their coraplexion fairer than that of the in habitants of the Society Islands. They are a quiet, gentle race, occupied generally in the simplest employ ments of agriculture and fishing. They display less native energy than their neighbours ; and though their sources of enjoyraent are scanty, their criraes and their sufferings are proportionahly less. Diseases are few, and an unusual nuraber of very aged persons are found * Miss. Trans., vol. W. No. vi. p. 163. 288 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. among thera. Yet, in a coraraunity so small and iso lated, and whose habits were in raany respects mild, and comparatively humane, woraan was subjected to an invidious and hurailiating sense of her inferiority. She was necessitated by the will of raan to labour in the culture of the earth, though deprived of an equal partici pation of its abundant and choicest productions. The toil required to furnish the means of subsistence was performed exclusively by the wife, while the husband spent his hours in indolence and arausement. This state of things, not raore favourable to morals tban to happiness, was sustained by the rude system of super stition in whicb tbey lived, and wbich prevailed in tbe adjacent islands. To tbe exertions of tbe missionaries and native Chris tians in spreading Christianity we are indebted for our knowledge of the existence of this island, and the cir cumstances of its inhabitants ; at least, I have raet with no account of it before that given by the missionaries who established native teachers among the people. Al though the inhabitants of the Society Islands reported the existence of an island somewhere to the southward, whicb they designated by this narae, the first inteUi gence that we received of its situation, extent, and popu- l£ition was deriyed frora the inhabitants of Rurutu, wbo were driven -to the Society Islands in 1821. When Auura, the chief of Rurutu, accompanied by teachers frora Raiatea, returned to his native land, in the year 1821, be fount! there a number of tbe inhabit ants of Rimatara. These followed the exaraple of the inhabitants of Rurutu in destroying tbeir idols and re ceiving Christian instruction ; sailing shortly afterward to their own island, they induced raany of their country men to do -the same. In tbe month of June, 1822, the Christians in Borabora sent two of their number, Faa- rava and Oo, to instruct the inhabitants of this island in reading, writing, ^and the first elements of religion. They were accorapanied by the European raissionaries, and all received a cordial welcorae frora ¦ the people. Althougb tbe natural productions of Rimatara were in ferior to those of Bbrabora, and the comforts of life fewer than those enjoyed in tbeir native land, this did not discourage them. They applied theraselves with diligence to the accorapUshraent of their object ; and such was tbe success witb wbicb tbeir exertions were RIMATARA. 289 attended, that when Mr. Williams visited them in Octo ber, 1823, fifteen raonths after tbe arrival of the native teachers, he found the inhabitants bad renounced their idols, and were living in harmony among themselves and witb their teachers, whom they greatly respected. They had erected a place for the worship of the true God. This building was sixty feet long,' and thirty wide ; the waUs were plastered, and the floor was boarded. A neat pulpit, of excellent workmanship, built, as was also tbe chapel, after the plan ef that in which the teachers had been accustoraed to worship in their native island, was also finished. It was opened for divine worship during Mr. Williaras's visit ; and the congregation, in cluding the greater part of the population, amounting to about three hundred, presented a raost interesting spec tacle. The females were neatly dressed in white native cloth, each one wearing a bonnet, whicb the wives of tbe teachers had taught them to make. Men who had grown old in the service of idolatry, and Who had never met for worship in any but a pagan temple, now assem bled to render homage to the living God. Tbe venera ble flgures, whose heads were gray with years, appeared in striking contrast with the youth and sprightliness of the children by whom they were surrounded. During the service, all appeared interested and attentive. At this time the entire population were- under instruction, and the children's school contained 130 scholars. About tbe time of the cotnraenceraent of the raission, an Araerican seaman, of the name of Robert, accom panied by a humber of natives, undertook to convey some books frora Rurutu to Rimatara, a distance of about seventy mUes. He reached Riraatara in safety, but on returning was driven out of his course, and per ished, with several of his companions. The day after his death, the boat was picked up by a vessel, about 200 miles distant from the island ; and, by proper treatment, such of the crew as were still alive recovered from tbe weakness and exhaustion whicb famine bad in duced. In the year 1825, two years after Mr. WUUaras left thera, this island was visited by Mr. Bourne, from Tahaa. He was welcomed by the people, who bad be gun to think that they and their teachers were forgotten by their friends. Twelve months before bis arrival. Vol. hi.— N 290 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. Oo had been removed by death : steadfast and faithful to the end of bis days, he .had the honour of being the first native raissionary wbo had ended his days in cora raunicating the blessings of Christianity to others. Faarara, his companion, bad lost by death his wife and child. - He was eminently devoted to his work, and under tbese bereavements was cheered by the syrapa thies and esteem of the people, and the evident advan tages that resulted from his efforts. Mr. Bourne was delighted with the improvement of the station, and the diligence df the people, especially of sorae who were far advanced in years. Although the circumstances of the feraales were con siderably ameliorated by the aboUtion of idolatry, yet the cultivation of the ground, and other kinds of labour unsuitable to tbeir sejf, were still perforraed by tbem. During bis visit, Mr. Bourne at a public meeting pro posed an alteration of their estabUshed Usage in this re spect, which was alike derogatory to the females, and inimical to an improvement in morals. Each chief present expressed his sentiraents in favour of the pro posal, and tbe result was a unanimous declaration, " that from tbat day forward tbe men should dig, plant, and prepare the food, and the woraen raake cloth, bon nets, and attend to their household work. "* The change thus introduced, by instituting a suitable division of labour, has proved favourable to domestic virtue and social happiness, vrhile it bas augmented tbe means of subsistence, and tbe sources of corafort. Within the last ten years, the intercourse between Rurutu and Riraatara has been frequent, though not always safe. The last accounts from tbis island state, tbat the people continue to improve in tbe knowledge and prac tice of religion, and to advance in energy and industry. In order to increase their conveniences, they bad sent one of their number to Borabora, a distance of nearly four hundred mUes, to learn the art of carpentry, turning, &c., that, on his return, he might be able to teach his countrymen. They had also sent a letter to Mr. Piatt, requesting hira to visit thera, and establish a Christian church among them. * Miss. Chron. No. 41, p. 271. RURUTU. 291 Rurutu. This island, which is situated in lat. 22° 27' S., and long. 150° 47' W., was discovered by Captain Cook, by whom it was called Obetetoa. Tbis is also one of its proper native names, but is much less frequently used than Rurutu, by wbich it is now generally known. Tbe island is of sraall extent, probably not more than twelve railes in circuraference. It is surrounded by a reef of coral, but is destitute of any harbour, and there is only one place at which even a boat can land. A narrov/ border of low land extends frora tbe shore, and the in terior is mountainous and broken. Rurutu, considering its size, presents natural scenery equal in beauty to any of tbe adjacent islands, and a greater variety in its geology than any other. Many of the rocks are ba saltic ; others appear formed of a vesicular kind of an cient lava; besides which, flbrous liraestone is occa sionaUy raet witb, and beautiful and singular stalactites. Garnets are also found in several parts. Tbe soil, is fertile : most of the productions used as articles of food in the Society Islands .flourish here ; while the dracana, the casuarina, and tbe barringtonia are not only abundant, but attain an unusual size — the trunk of the latter frequently exceeding four feet in diameter. The inhabitants, though not raore nuraerous than those of Riraatara, are darker in tbeir coraplexion, more en terprising in their character, and active in tbeir habits. Their temples were numerous, and tbeir idols, especially tbeir great god, Taaroa, were araong tbe most singular we have met with in the Paeiflc. Their priests, who were their physicians, raaintained great influence over the people, though their system of worship appears less sanguinary than tbat of their more civihzed neigbbours. They were addicted to war. Their hdmets were among the most imposing in the South Sea islands, and tbeir spears, which were made of the hard dark wood of tbe casuarina, were often from twelve to eighteen feet long. Vessels traversing tbis part of the Paeiflc occasionally bove-to off this island, for the purpose of allowing the natives, to bring off their hogs, fowls, and vegetables for barter ; but few foreigners went on shore, and little intercourse was held with thera, untU the establishment of a native mission among thera. The events which led to this are rather remarkable, and cannot fail to 292 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES. interest those who find pleasure in noticing the pro ceedings of Divine Providence in the small and remote, as well as more extensive and conspicuous, changes that take^lace in the circurastances of men. In the end of 1820, a distressing and contagious dis ease made its appearance araong the inhabitants of this island. Accustoraed to ascribe every calamity to the anger' of their gods, they attributed that with which they were now visited, and which threatened their anni- Irilation, to this cause, and had recourse to every means which tbey supposed could pacify the evil spirit. StiU the disease continued, until not many raore tban two hundred inhabitants remained. Among these, Auura, a young and adventurons chief, determined to seek his safety on the ocean. He communicated the design to bis friends ; and as some were desirous of proceeding to Tubuai, to obtain pieces of iron, and others, with himself, deeming that, if tbey remained, death was in evitable, thought tbey could but die at sea, determined to accompany him. Taking their wives veith them, Auura and his friends launched his canoe, sailed to Tu buai, and after remaining some -time, embarked to re turn. A storm ^rove them out of their course ; and after baving been drifted at the mercy Of the waves for three weeks, their canoe struck on the reefs which sur round Maurua, the raost westerly of the Society Islands. The natives of this island treated the exhausted voya gers with hospitality and kindness, and gave them an account of the changes that had taken place araong the islands around them. As soon as they had recovered from tbe fatigues of tbeir voyage, Auura and bis com panions launched their canoe, and sailed for Borabora. Wheu tbey reached the raouth of tbe harbour, tbe wind was unfavourabls for entering, but a boat from the island conveyed the chief and his wife to the shore, while tbeir companions continued their voyage to Rai atea, where they were kindly treated by tbe inhabitants, and soon after joined by their chief Every thing in the island wis new and surprising ; and, under tbe influence of astonishment, the strangers visited the dweUings of the raissionaries, the native Christians, the chapel, and the schools, and soon became regular pupils themselves. After having been sorae time at Raiatea, they publicly renounced their idols, and pro fessed themselves the worshippers of the true God. RURUTU. 293 Next to their desire for instruction themselves, they se-smed exceedingly anxious to return to their native island, to impart to their countryraen tbe knowledge tbey had received. No opportunity for accomplishing their wishes in tbis respect occurred, until a vessel, on , her way to England, touched at Raiatea ; we were on board at the time. The captain generously agreed to convey them to Rurutu, which be intended to .pass, in his way to Cape Horn. Two native Christians, and their wives, were, at the request of Auura, selected to accompany them, and tbe short interval between their appointment and the departure of the vessel :5vas. em ployed in makiiig preparations. Tbeir friends and neigbbours carae forward: with prbmptness and gen erosity, and, according to their means, furnished such articles as were most Ukely to be useful in the land to Avbich they were going. The men were inteUigent, active, anil devoted Christians, and their wives pious and araiable women. On tbe 5th of July, 1821, they embarked with the chief and bis friends, and three